User’s Guide

Quantum DXi6902
with DXi 3.1.0_69 Software

6-68159-02 Rev A
Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide, 6-68159-02 Rev A, January 2015, Product of USA.
This document is for DXi 3.1.0_69 Software.
Quantum Corporation provides this publication “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or
implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose. Quantum Corporation may revise this publication from time to time without notice.

COPYRIGHT STATEMENT
© 2015 Quantum Corporation. All rights reserved.
Your right to copy this manual is limited by copyright law. Making copies or adaptations without prior
written authorization of Quantum Corporation is prohibited by law and constitutes a punishable
violation of the law.

TRADEMARK STATEMENT
Quantum, the Quantum Logo, Backup. Recovery. Archive. It's What We Do., Be Certain, Be Quantum
Certain, DLT, the DLT Logo, DLTSage, DLTtape, the DLTtape Logo, DXi, DXi Accent, Dynamic Powerdown,
FastSense, FlexLink, GoProtect, GoVault, iLayer, Lattus, MediaShield, Optyon, Pocket-sized., Well-
armored., Preserving the World's Most Important Data. Yours., Q-Cloud, Quantum Certain, Quantum
Certainty, Quantum vmPRO, Scalar, SDLT, SiteCare, SmartVerify, StorageCare, StorNext, Super DLTtape,
SuperLoader, and Vision are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Quantum Corporation and its
affiliates in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
Products mentioned herein are for identification purposes only and may be registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies. All other brand names or trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
Quantum specifications are subject to change.

ii Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Contents

Preface xxiii
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvii

Chapter 1 DXi6902 System Description 1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What’s New in DXi 3.0 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Data Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Data Deduplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Space Reclamation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Remote Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DXi6902 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Hard Drive Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
DXi6902 Hard Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Virtual Tape Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Network Attached Storage (NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
OpenStorage (OST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Supported RAID Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide iii

Contents

DXi Advanced Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Best Practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Licensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Virtual Media—How Many and What Size? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Chapter 2 DXi6902 Basic Operations 25

DXi6902 Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Node Front Panel Features and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Node Rear Panel Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Node Hard Drive Carrier Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Node 1 GbE Ethernet Port Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Node 10 GbE Ethernet Port Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Node Power Supply Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Array and Expansion Module Front Panel Features and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Array and Expansion Module Hard Drive Carrier Indicators. . . 39
Array Module Rear Panel Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Expansion Module Rear Panel Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Turning On and Shutting Down the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Turning on the DXi6902 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Turning off the DXi6902 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Locating DXi6902 Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Chapter 3 DXi6902 Remote Management 49

Accessing Remote Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Supported Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Logging On to the DXi6902 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Logging Off of the DXi6902 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
The Remote Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
System Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
DXi6902 Management Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

iv Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Contents

Chapter 4 DXi6902 Configuration Wizards 61

NAS Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Step 1: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Step 2: Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Step 3: Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Step 4: Share Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Step 5: Add Share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Step 6: Confirm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
VTL Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Step 1: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Step 2: Add Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Step 3: Add Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Step 4: Discover Remote Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Step 5: Map Remote Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Step 6: Confirm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
OST Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Step 1: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Step 2: Add Storage Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Step 3: Add LSUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Step 4: Add Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Step 5: Confirm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Step 6: Download OST Client Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Replication Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Step 1: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Step 2: System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Step 3: NAS Shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Step 4: VTL Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Step 5: Confirm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Email Alerts Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Step 1: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Step 2: Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Step 3: Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Step 4: Confirm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Support Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Step 1: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Step 2: Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Step 3: Guardian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Step 4: System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Step 5: Licensed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide v

Contents

Chapter 5 DXi6902 Home Page 107

DXi6902 System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Disk Usage Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Data Reduction Statistics Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Replication Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Send Settings & Cumulative Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Receive Settings & Cumulative Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Current Activity Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Chapter 6 DXi6902 Replication 119

Understanding Data Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication. . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
OST Optimized Duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Multiple Target Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Performing Data Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Task Overview: Setting Up and Performing Replication. . . . . 124
Task Overview: Setting Up and Performing Directory/File or
Cartridge Based Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Task Overview: Recovering a Replicated Share or Partition . . 127
Task Overview: Performing a Share or Partition Failback. . . . 127
Replication Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Replication Jobs List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Enabling Replication For a Share or Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Configuring Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication . . . 133
Replicating a Share or Partition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Synchronizing a Share or Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication Queue . . . . . . . 137
Scheduling a Share or Partition For Replication . . . . . . . . . . 139
Target DXis List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Receive NAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Received Snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Recovery Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Failback Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Directory/File Based. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Receive VTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

vi Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Contents

Received Snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Recovery Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Failback Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cartridge Based . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Replication Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Replication State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Replication Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Chapter 7 DXi6902 Status 171

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Inline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fibre Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Disk Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Data Before Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Data After Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
VTL Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Physical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Logical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Performance View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
OST Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Activity Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Viewing Logged Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Enabling or Disabling Activity Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Deleting Logged Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Downloading the Activity Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide vii

Contents

Chapter 8 DXi6902 Alerts 199

Admin Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Service Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Service Ticket Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Recommended Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Working With Service Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Chapter 9 DXi6902 Configuration 209

NAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
NAS Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Windows Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Share Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Advanced Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
VTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Remote Host Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Replication Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Target DXis List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Adding a Replication Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Editing a Replication Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Deleting a Replication Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Pausing or Resuming Replication to a Target . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Enabling System Throttling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Source DXis List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Adding a Replication Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Deleting a Replication Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Changing the Maximum Number of Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . 267
OST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Replicating OST Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Storage Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Manage Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Manage Remote Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Target IP Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
DXi Accent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
OST Client Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

viii Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Contents

PTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Physical Device Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Backup Application Specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
FC Initiators and Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Email. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Primary and Secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 10 DXi6902 Utilities 377

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
System Diag File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Storage Array Diag File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
DSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Healthchecks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Space Reclamation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
License Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
License Key Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Adding a License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Licensing Data-at-Rest Encryption and Obtaining Premium
Feature Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Secure Shred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Software Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Checking For Software Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Uploading a Software Upgrade File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide ix

Contents

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Reboot & Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Appendix A DXi6902 System Specifications 415

Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Appendix B Troubleshooting 423

DXi6902 Status and Problem Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
General Troubleshooting Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Viewing Service Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Checking Hardware Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Downloading a System Diagnostics File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Common Problems and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Start-up Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Hardware Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Ethernet Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Replication Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Temperature Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Glossary 433

x Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Figures

Figure 1 DXi6902 System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Figure 2 DXi6902 Node Drive Slot Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 3 DXi6902 Array and Expansion Module Drive Slot Numbering .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 4 DXi6902 Hard Drive Carriers - Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 5 DXi6902 Hard Drive Carriers - Array and Expansion Modules. .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 6 VTL Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 7 NAS Backup Via CIFS and NFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 8 OpenStorage (OST) Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 9 DXi6902 Node RAID Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 10 DXi6902 Array and Expansion Module DDP Pools . . . . . . . 17
Figure 11 DXi6902 Node Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 12 Node Rear View - DXi6902. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 13 Rear View - DXi6902 With Optional 2 x 10GbE Ports . . . . . 30
Figure 14 Rear View - DXi6902 With Optional 4 x 1GbE Ports . . . . . . 30
Figure 15 Hard Drive Carrier LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 16 Ethernet Port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide xi

Figures

Figure 17 LEDs for 10 GbE Adapter With Dual Optical or Twinax Ports .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 18 Power Supply LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 19 Array and Expansion Module LED Indicators – Front Panel 38
Figure 20 Hard Drive Sled LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 21 Array Module LED Indicators – Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 22 Expansion Module LED Indicators – Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 23 Powering on the DXi6902 Expansion Modules (EBODs) . . . 46
Figure 24 Powering on the DXi6902 Array Modules (RBODs) . . . . . . 46
Figure 25 Powering on the DXi6902 Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 26 DXi6902 Information Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 27 Login Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 28 Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 29 System Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 30 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 31 Remote Management Pages Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 32 Wizards Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 33 NAS Wizard: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 34 NAS Wizard: Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 35 NAS Wizard: Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 36 NAS Wizard: Share Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 37 NAS Wizard: Add Share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 38 NAS Wizard: Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 39 VTL Wizard: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 40 VTL Wizard: Add Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Figure 41 VTL Wizard: Add Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 42 VTL Wizard: Discover Remote Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 43 VTL Wizard: Map Remote Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 44 VTL Wizard: Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

xii Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Figures

Figure 45 OST Wizard: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Figure 46 OST Wizard: Add Storage Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 47 OST Wizard: Add LSUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 48 OST Wizard: Add Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 49 OST Wizard: Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 50 OST Wizard: Download OST Client Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 51 Replication Wizard: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 52 Replication Wizard: System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 53 Replication Wizard: NAS Shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 54 Replication Wizard: VTL Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 55 Replication Wizard: Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 56 Email Alerts Wizard: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Figure 57 Email Alerts Wizard: Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 58 Email Alerts Wizard: Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 59 Email Alerts Wizard: Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 60 Support Wizard: About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 61 Support Wizard: Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 62 Support Wizard: Guardian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 63 Support Wizard: System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 64 Support Wizard: Licensed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 65 Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 66 DXi6902 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 67 Disk Usage Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 68 Data Reduction Statistics Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 69 Replication Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 70 Current Activity Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 71 Replication Send Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 72 Share or Partition Configure Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 73 Share or Partition Configure Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide xiii

Figures

Figure 74 Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication Queue . . . . 138

Figure 75 Scheduler Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 76 Received Snapshots Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 77 Recovered Share Name Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 78 Failback Target Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 79 Recovery Jobs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 80 Failback Jobs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 81 Directory/File Based Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 82 Edit Share Settings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 83 Unpack Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 84 Received Snapshots Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 85 Recovered Partition Name Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 86 Failback Target Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 87 Recovery Jobs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 88 Failback Jobs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 89 Cartridge Based Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 90 Edit Partition Settings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 91 Unpack Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 92 Actions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 93 Reports Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Figure 94 Hardware Summary Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Figure 95 System Board Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Figure 96 Host Bus Adapters Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 97 Network Ports Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 98 Storage Arrays Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 99 Firmware Version Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 100 Inline Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 101 Ethernet Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 102 RAID Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

xiv Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Figures

Figure 103 Fibre Channel Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Figure 104 CPU Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 105 Disk Usage Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Figure 106 Physical View Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 107 Logical View Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 108 Performance View Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 109 OST Status Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 110 Activity Log Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 111 Activity Log View Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 112 Activity Log View Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Figure 113 Admin Alerts Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 114 Service Tickets Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 115 Ticket Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 116 Recommended Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 117 Ticket Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 118 Email Ticket Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 119 NAS Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 120 Add NAS Share Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 121 Edit NAS Share & Replication Settings Page. . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 122 Windows Domain Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 123 Share Access Page (Windows Workgroup). . . . . . . . . . . 220
Figure 124 Share Access Page (Active Directory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 125 Add Workgroup User Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 126 Add Share Administrator Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 127 Edit Workgroup User Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 128 Advanced Setting Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 129 Partitions Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 130 Add VTL Partition & Replication Settings Page . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 131 Edit VTL Partition & Replication Settings Page . . . . . . . . 234

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide xv

Figures

Figure 132 Partitions General Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Figure 133 Media Add Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 134 Media Actions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 135 Media Move Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 136 Media Unload Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 137 Remote Host Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 138 Map Remote Hosts, Define Groups Page . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 139 Edit Remote Host Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 140 Remote Hosts Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 141 Targets Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 142 Target Usage Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 143 Replication Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 144 Add Target Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 145 Edit Target Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 146 Replication Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 147 Add Allowed Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 148 Setting Up OST Automatic Image Replication . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 149 Storage Servers Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 150 Add Storage Server Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 151 Edit Storage Server Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 152 LSU Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 153 Add Logical Storage Unit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 154 Edit Logical Storage Unit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 155 Manage Users Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 156 Add User Credential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 157 Edit User Credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 158 Manage Remote Users Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 159 Add Remote AIR Credential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 160 Edit Remote Credentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

xvi Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Figures

Figure 161 Target IP Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Figure 162 Add Target Data IP Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 163 Edit Target Data IP Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 164 Accent Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Figure 165 Physical Device Discovery Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 166 Backup Application Specific Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 167 Add Backup Application Specific User Page . . . . . . . . . . 302
Figure 168 Edit Backup Application Specific User Page . . . . . . . . . . 303
Figure 169 Scheduler Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 170 Scheduler Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 171 Adding a New Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 172 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 173 Network Page: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 174 Network Page: Bonding Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 175 Network Page: Interface Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 176 Network Page: IP Address Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Figure 177 Network Page: Routing Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Figure 178 Interface Routing: Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Figure 179 Interface Routing: Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Figure 180 Interface Routing: Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Figure 181 Network Page: Backpanel Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Figure 182 Date & Time Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Figure 183 Web & CLI Passwords Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Figure 184 SSL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Figure 185 Install New Certificate Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Figure 186 Data Encryption Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Figure 187 Login Session Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Figure 188 Security Notice Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Figure 189 Data-at-Rest Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide xvii

Figures

Figure 190 FC Initiators and Targets Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Figure 191 Recipients Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 192 Add Email Recipient Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 193 Edit Email Recipient Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Figure 194 Server Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 195 Email Test Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 196 Recipients Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 197 On Demand Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Figure 198 Destinations Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Figure 199 Add Trap Destination Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 200 Edit Trap Destination Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Figure 201 Community Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 202 Add SNMP Community Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 203 Edit SNMP Community Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Figure 204 SNMP Test Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Figure 205 Company Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Figure 206 Primary and Secondary Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 207 System Diag File Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Figure 208 Storage Array Diag File Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 209 DSET Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 210 General Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Figure 211 Status Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Figure 212 Edit Healthcheck Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Figure 213 Drive Replacement Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Figure 214 Performance Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Figure 215 Settings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Figure 216 Disk Analyzer Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Figure 217 Space Reclamation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Figure 218 License Keys Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

xviii Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Figures

Figure 219 License Key Management Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Figure 220 Secure Shred Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Figure 221 Secure Shred Mode Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Figure 222 Software Upgrade Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Figure 223 Home Page - Software Upgrade Available . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Figure 224 Software Upgrade Utility - Software Upgrade Downloaded
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Figure 225 Software Upgrade Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Figure 226 Software Upgrade Page - Software Upgrade File Uploaded.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Figure 227 Software Upgrade Utility - Software Upgrade File Uploaded
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Figure 228 Storage Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Figure 229 Reboot & Shutdown Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide xix

Figures

xx Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Tables

Table 1 Supported Tape Libraries in Backup Application Specific . . . . 21

Table 2 Supported Tape Drives in Backup Application Specific. . . . . . 21
Table 3 DXi6902 Node - Front Panel LED Indicators, Buttons, and
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Table 4 Rear Panel Connectors - DXi6902. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 5 Array and Expansion Module LEDs and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . 38
Table 6 Hard Drive Sled LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table 7 Array Module LEDs and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table 8 Expansion Module LEDs and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 9 DXi6902 Model Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Table 10 Low Space States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Table 11 Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Table 12 Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Table 13 Cable Drops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Table 14 Virtual Device Limits and Hardware Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . 418
Table 15 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Table 16 Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Table 17 Start-up Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide xxi

Tables

Table 18 Hardware Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Table 19 Ethernet Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Table 20 Replication Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

xxii Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Preface

This manual introduces the Quantum DXi6902 disk backup solution and
discusses:
• System operations
• Configuration
• Web interface
• Basic troubleshooting

Audience This manual is written for DXi6902 operators and administrators.

Note: It is useful for the audience to have a basic understanding of

Windows, Linux, and UNIX® as well as backup/recovery
systems.

Document Organization Following is a brief description of chapter contents.

• Chapter 1, DXi6902 System Description provides an overview of the
DXi6902.
• Chapter 2, DXi6902 Basic Operations provides basic operating
instructions for the DXi6902.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide xxiii

Preface

• Chapter 3, DXi6902 Remote Management discusses using the

DXi6902 remote management console to control the system
remotely.
• Chapter 4, DXi6902 Configuration Wizards discusses the wizards
that provide guidance for setting up the DXi6902.
• Chapter 5, DXi6902 Home Page discusses the information that
appears on the Home page of the remote management console.
• Chapter 6, DXi6902 Replication discusses the remote replication
capabilities of the DXi6902.
• Chapter 7, DXi6902 Status discusses DXi6902 status information.
• Chapter 8, DXi6902 Alerts discusses DXi6902 alert information and
service tickets.
• Chapter 9, DXi6902 Configuration discusses configuration of the
DXi6902.
• Chapter 10, DXi6902 Utilities discusses DXi6902 utilities such as
diagnostic tools and rebooting the system.
• Appendix A, DXi6902 System Specifications provides system
specifications for the DXi6902.
• Appendix B, Troubleshooting discusses problems you may
encounter during the setup and operation of the DXi6902.
• Glossary provides definitions of terms used in this guide.

Notational Conventions This manual uses the following conventions:

Note: Note emphasizes important information related to the main

topic.

Caution: Caution indicates potential hazards to equipment or data.

WARNING: Warning indicates potential hazards to personal safety.

• Right side of the system - Refers to the right side as you face the
component being described.

xxiv Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Preface

• Left side of the system - Refers to the left side as you face the
component being described.
• Data sizes are reported in base 1000 rather than base 1024. For
example:
• 1 MB = 1,000,000 bytes
• 1 GB = 1,000,000,000 bytes
• 1 TB = 1,000,000,000,000 bytes

Product Safety Quantum will not be held liable for damage arising from unauthorized
Statements use of the product. The user assumes all risk in this aspect.
This unit is engineered and manufactured to meet all safety and
regulatory requirements. Be aware that improper use may result in
bodily injury, damage to the equipment, or interference with other
equipment.

WARNING: Before operating this product, read all instructions and

warnings in this document and in the system, safety, and
regulatory guide.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide xxv

Preface

xxvi Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Preface

Related Documents The following Quantum documents are also available for the DXi6902:

Document Document
No. Document Title Description

6-00618 System Safety and Lists all safety and

Regulatory Information regulatory
- Quantum Products information for all
Quantum products.

6-67079 DXi-Series NetBackup Provides information

and Backup Exec OST for setting up the
Configuration Guide DXi6902 for OST
operation with
NetBackup and
Backup Exec.

6-67081 DXi-Series Command Provides information

Line Interface (CLI) on the DXi6902
Guide command line
interface.

6-67353 DXi Advanced Provides information

Reporting User’s Guide about using DXi
Advanced Reporting
features.

For the most up-to-date documentation for the DXi6902, go to:

http://www.quantum.com/ServiceandSupport/Index.aspx

Contacts For information about contacting Quantum, including Quantum office

locations, go to:
http://www.quantum.com/aboutus/contactus/index.aspx

Comments To provide comments or feedback about this document, or about other

Quantum technical publications, send e-mail to:
[email protected]

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide xxvii

Preface

Getting More StorageCare™, Quantum’s comprehensive service approach, leverages

Information or Help advanced data access and diagnostics technologies with cross-
environment, multi-vendor expertise to resolve backup issues faster and
at lower cost.
Accelerate service issue resolution with these exclusive Quantum
StorageCare services:
• Service and Support Web site - Register products, license
software, browse Quantum Learning courses, check backup
software and operating system support, and locate manuals, FAQs,
software downloads, product updates and more in one convenient
location. Benefit today at:
http://www.quantum.com/ServiceandSupport/Index.aspx
• eSupport - Submit online service requests, update contact
information, add attachments, and receive status updates via e-
mail. Online Service accounts are free from Quantum. That account
can also be used to access Quantum’s Knowledge Base, a
comprehensive repository of product support information. Sign up
today at:
http://www.quantum.com/osr
For further assistance, or if training is desired, contact the Quantum
Customer Support Center:

United States 1-800-284-5101 (toll free)

+1-720-249-5700

EMEA +800-7826-8888 (toll free)

+49-6131-3241-1164

APAC +800-7826-8887 (toll free)

+603-7953-3010

For worldwide support:

http://www.quantum.com/ServiceandSupport/Index.aspx

Worldwide End-User For more information on the Quantum Worldwide End-User Standard
Product Warranty Limited Product Warranty:

xxviii Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Preface

http://www.quantum.com/serviceandsupport/warrantyinformation/
index.aspx

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide xxix

Preface

xxx Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1
DXi6902 System Description

This chapter describes the DXi6902 system and its components and
includes the following sections:
• Overview
• Features and Benefits
• What’s New in DXi 3.0 Software
• Data Reduction
• Space Reclamation
• Remote Replication
• DXi6902 System
• Hard Drive Storage
• Supported RAID Configurations
• DXi Advanced Reporting
• Network Configuration
• Best Practices

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 1

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Overview

Overview
The DXi6902 is Quantum’s new Enterprise disk backup solution that
integrates data deduplication, replication, and direct tape creation
technology to connect backup and disaster recovery protection across
distributed corporate environments. The DXi6902 disk-based backup
appliance uses Quantum’s patented data deduplication technology to
increase disk capacities by 10 to 50 times, and make WAN replication a
practical, cost-effective part of disaster recovery planning. Scalable to
510 TB usable capacity, the DXi6902 is designed for larger sites and
corporate data centers.

Advanced Data Deduplication Increasing Disk Retention for

Backup Data
The DXi6902 leverages Quantum’s patented data deduplication
technology (U.S. Pat. No. 5,990,810) to dramatically increase the role
that disk can play in the protection of critical data. With the DXi6902
solution, users can retain 10 to 50 times more backup data on fast
recovery disk than with conventional arrays.

Remote Replication of Backup Data Providing Automated

Disaster Recovery Protection
With the DXi6902, users can transmit backup data from single or
multiple remote sites equipped with any other DXi™-Series model to a
central, secure location to reduce or eliminate media handling.
DXi-Series replication is asynchronous, automated, and operates as a
background process.

Enterprise Features Provide Secure Repository

With up to 510 TB usable capacity, the DXi6902 supports large-scale
Enterprise environments. Presentations include both VTL (Fibre Channel)
and NAS (CIFS and NFS) as well as Symantec OpenStorage (OST) APIs.
Integrated tape creation writes physical media directly over dedicated
Fibre Channel connections, and supports ISV direct tape creation in
NetBackup, Backup Exec, NetWorker, Oracle Secure Backup, and ASG-
Time Navigator.

2 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Features and Benefits

DXi Accent distributes deduplication between the DXi6902 and the

backup server to accelerate backups over bandwidth-constrained
networks. Compatibility with Quantum's vmPRO software provides
consolidated support for backup of physical and virtual servers.
In addition, DXi6902 systems support Data-at-Rest Encryption to secure
all data stored on the DXi6902. Data-at-Rest Encryption ensures that a
hard drive that is physically removed from the DXi6902 cannot be read
using another system or device

Features and Benefits

The DXi6902 system provides the following features and benefits:
• Inline data flow provides leading deduplication with an optimal
combination of total system performance, manageability, and value.
• Flexibility of VTL, NAS, and OST (OpenStorage) presentation layers.
• High throughput connectivity options (10 GbE and 8 Gb Fibre
Channel).
• 10 source to one target LAN/WAN replication compatible with
DXi2500-D, DXi4000 family, DXi6000 family, DXi7500, and DXi8500
models.
• Common monitoring and management interface for multiple DXi™
units and Quantum tape libraries through Quantum Vision™.
• OST Optimized Duplication support with Symantec NetBackup™
7.1.x or later or Symantec Backup Exec™ 2010 R3 or later.
• Path to tape (PTT) capability that writes data from virtual cartridges
directly to a tape library to create removable media for long term
retention. It is supported by:
• Symantec™ NetBackup™ (under VTL and OST implementations)
• Symantec Backup Exec

• Oracle® Secure Backup

• ASG-Time Navigator™

• EMC® Networker® (versions prior to 8.1)

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 3

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Features and Benefits

Note: When the path to tape feature is enabled and configured,

backup data can be moved directly from the DXi6902
system to a tape library. For a list of supported tape
libraries and tape drives, see Table 1 on page 21 and
Table 2 on page 21.

• OST direct path to tape support with Symantec NetBackup™ 7.1.x or

later.
• Tape Drives Emulated:
• Quantum DLT-S4, SDLT600, SDLT320, or DLT7000
• Certance LTO-2 and LTO-3
• IBM LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, or LTO-5
• HP LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, or LTO-5
• Libraries Emulated:
• Quantum DXi7500
• ADIC Scalar 100, ADIC Scalar i2000, or ADIC Scalar i500
• ADIC Pathlight VX
• Quantum Scalar i40/i80 or Quantum Scalar i6000
• Quantum DXi6700, Quantum DXi6902, Quantum DXi6800,
Quantum DXi4700, Quantum DXi4601, QuantumDXi4500, or
Quantum DXi8500
• Quantum DX3000 or Quantum DX5000
• Quantum PX500 or Quantum PX720
• ATL M2500, ATL P1000, or ATL P7000
• Supported by every major backup software vendor.
• Rack space requirements: 2U for Node and 2U for each Array
module (RBOD) and Expansion module (EBOD).
• Installs in a standard rack with a minimum depth of 29.79 in (75.68
cm).

4 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
What’s New in DXi 3.0 Software

Note: Quantum recommends installing the DXi6902 system in a

controlled or restricted area and using strong, private
passwords to prevent access by untrained personnel. In
addition, Quantum recommends that system installation
be performed only by qualified IT personnel with strong
networking experience.

What’s New in DXi 3.0 Software

DXi 3.0 Software include the following significant enhancements:
• StorNext 5 File System - The StorNext 5 file system provides the
foundation for DXi 3.0 Software. Completely re-designed for low-
latency and high throughput, StorNext File System 5 delivers rapid
file access in heterogeneous environments. Learn more about
StorNext 5 at: http://www.stornext.com
• CentOS 6 Base Operating System - DXi 3.0 Software runs on the
widely-adopted, enterprise-class CentOS 6 operating system. With
numerous enhancements, CentOS 6 provides a platform for future
DXi hardware and software innovation.

Data Reduction
Data reduction is the process of reducing the amount of storage
capacity required to store your data. The DXi6902 provides two
techniques to optimize the storage space required on your system:
• Data Deduplication
• Compression

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 5

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Space Reclamation

Data Deduplication The DXi-Series disk backup and replication systems use Quantum’s
patented data deduplication technology to dramatically increase the
role that disk can play in data protection. With DXi-Series solutions,
users can retain 10 to 50 times more backup data on fast recovery disk
than with conventional arrays. This advantage allows IT departments to
cost-effectively retain months of backup data on disk for faster, more
reliable restores and more data recovery points. Quantum’s innovative
implementation of this core technology means that users do not have to
compromise on performance to take advantage of extended retention
capability. Inline data flow provides streamlined deduplication that
offers a maximum combination of total system performance,
manageability, and value.
Quantum's deduplication technology uses a sub-file, variable-length
approach to identify redundant blocks in a data stream—blocks that
have appeared before in the same dataset or in datasets processed at an
earlier time. When a block appears that has already been stored, the DXi
system inserts a reference pointer to the earlier instance of the data
segment instead of storing another copy. The result is a dramatic
reduction in the storage capacity needed to store the data set, and a
similar reduction in the bandwidth needed to replicate deduplicated
data sets over a network. For more information on enabling data
deduplication, see Adding a VTL Partition on page 230.

Compression The DXi6902 systems use compression technology after duplicate blocks
have been identified and replaced as part of the deduplication process.
With compression, unique data that has been through the data
deduplication process can be compressed at a typical ratio of
approximately 2:1. This enables you to maximize the storage capacity of
your system.

Space Reclamation
The space reclamation process performs multiple functions on the
DXi6902.

6 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Remote Replication

When data is deduplicated it is stored in a blockpool—a pool of all

unique data blocks that were captured during the data deduplication
cycle. When subsequent backup jobs occur, the data deduplication
engine searches for new data entering the DXi and uses a variable
length compression algorithm to compare new data to existing data in
the blockpool. Unique blocks are added to the blockpool and known
blocks are indexed.
The space reclamation function searches the blockpool for data blocks
that are not referenced by any pointers (that is, the files associated with
the block have been expired and removed). Once such a data block is
identified, the block is removed to make the space reusable.
For correct system operation, space reclamation must be run at regular
intervals (at least once a week). Quantum recommends creating a
schedule to automatically run space reclamation (see Scheduling Space
Reclamation on page 313).
It may be beneficial to schedule space reclamation for a time when
other operations are not normally being carried out. Therefore it is
important to know when to schedule the space reclamation process. As
best practice it is recommended that this process commences at least
two hours after your backup job has completed on a daily basis. It is far
more efficient to process a day’s worth of new data than a week’s
worth.

Remote Replication
Today most backup occurs on isolated devices, making it difficult to
deploy disk backup when disaster recovery protection is required. DXi-
Series solutions use data deduplication and replication to decrease by
up to 50 times the bandwidth required to move backup data over
networks and between sites. This dramatic gain makes it practical and
cost-effective for users to replicate backup data over WANs for secure,
network-based disaster recovery protection, and it lets users combine
rapid, local restores with sound disaster recovery protection.
With DXi-Series replication, users can transmit data from a single site or
multiple sites to a central location using any DXi model. DXi-Series
replication is an asynchronous, automated background process that
includes encryption of data in transit. This model for protecting the

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 7

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
DXi6902 System

distributed enterprise allows users to combine disk, replication, and

tape for an optimal combination of performance, simplicity, and
security.
For more information on implementing a replication plan, see
Chapter 6, DXi6902 Replication.

DXi6902 System
The DXi6902 includes the following features (see Figure 1):
• 1 Node
• 1 or 2 Array modules (RBODs)
• 0 to 13 Expansion modules (EBODs)
• 3 x 1 GbE ports
• 2 x 10 GbE ports (optical or Twinax)
• (Optional) One of the following additional network connectivity
options:
• 4 x 1GbE ports
• 2 x 10 GbE ports
• 6 x 8 Gb Fibre Channel ports (4 for VTL and 2 for path to tape, also
configurable for VTL)
• 17 TB to 510 TB usable capacity
Usable storage capacity for installed Array or Expansion modules can be
upgraded at any time after purchase in increments of 17 TB, up to a
total of 34 TB per module. To purchase a storage capacity upgrade
license, contact your Quantum sales representative.

8 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Hard Drive Storage

Figure 1 DXi6902 System

DXi6902 Node

Array Module (RBOD) /

Expansion Module (EBOD)

Hard Drive Storage

The DXi6902 system is based upon high speed disk drives instead of
tape drives (see DXi6902 Hard Drives on page 10). The usable capacity is
17–510 TB.
The DXi6902 can present its drive storage using multiple protocols:
• Virtual Tape Storage
• Network Attached Storage (NAS)
• OpenStorage (OST)
By making use of high speed drives, the DXi6902 greatly reduces the
time required for backup/restore functions and improves confidence in
completing the backup in the time allowed.

DXi Usage Scenarios

DXi storage presentations are optimized for backup usage rather than
file sharing. Backup application usage is typically characterized by:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 9

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Hard Drive Storage

• Aggregated name spaces and file contents.

• Limited direct, active file access.
• Limited browsing, scanning, or stating.
• Limited metadata manipulation (including rename).
Usage diverging from these characteristics must be qualified to ensure
acceptable behavior with respect to functionality, performance,
replication, and recovery.

Note: Using Backup Exec with GRT (Granular Recovery Technology)

over CIFS is not recommended usage. GRT requires frequently
overwriting portions of and appending data to existing files,
which is inconsistent with the DXi usage scenarios. Instead,
Quantum recommends using OST.

DXi6902 Hard Drives The DXi6902 Node supports sixteen high capacity (900 GB) hard disk
drives (HDDs) (Figure 2). The Node hard drives are used for the
operating system, system software, and indexes needed for data
deduplication, replication, and space reclamation.
The DXi6902 Array modules (RBODs) and Expansion modules (EBODs)
each support twelve high capacity (4 TB) hard disk drives (Figure 3). The
Array and Expansion module hard drives are used for data storage.
All hard disk drives are mounted and pre-assembled in drive carriers (see
Figure 4 and Figure 5). All drives are hot swappable.

Figure 2 DXi6902 Node Drive

Slot Numbering
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot
HDD Slot

10 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Hard Drive Storage

Figure 3 DXi6902 Array and

Expansion Module Drive Slot
Numbering

HDD Slot 1 HDD Slot 2 HDD Slot 3 HDD Slot 4

HDD Slot 5 HDD Slot 6 HDD Slot 7 HDD Slot 8

HDD Slot 9 HDD Slot 10 HDD Slot 11 HDD Slot 12

Figure 4 DXi6902 Hard Drive

Carriers - Node

Figure 5 DXi6902 Hard Drive

Carriers - Array and Expansion
Modules

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 11

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Hard Drive Storage

Virtual Tape Storage A virtual tape storage or virtual tape library (VTL) presentation allows
the storage space on these hard drives to appear to the backup
application as tape cartridges (DLT or LTO). Data is stored on the hard
drives through an interface that appears as a tape library, with virtual
cartridges, virtual drives, and a virtual changer mechanism. A DXi6902
can be configured to present multiple VTL interfaces of different sizes
and types at once. This allows backup applications to recognize and
integrate a DXi series system into a data center environment just like
one or more physical tape libraries.

Figure 6 VTL Example

Network Attached The DXi6902 system has the ability to present itself as NAS backup
Storage (NAS) systems (see Figure 7) where the following protocols are supported:
• CIFS Protocol
• NFS Protocol

12 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Hard Drive Storage

CIFS Protocol
The CIFS (Common Internet File System) protocol defines a standard for
remote file access from many computers at a time in Windows
environments. This protocol allows users with different platforms to
share files without installing additional software.

Active Directory Support

The DXi6902 supports ADS (Active Directory Services) as well as ACLs
(Access Control Lists). This provides the following benefits:
• Compatibility with CIFS domains - NAS shares are able to join CIFS
domains and use domain authentication.
• Precise control of file system permissions - Administrators can
specify which users and groups can perform what actions.
• Robust administrative support - Administrators have the same
implicit permissions as they do in Windows operating systems.

Note: Windows 2003, Windows 2003 R2, Windows 2008, Windows

2008 R2, and Windows 2012 R2 are supported for Active
Directory domain membership.

Note: When you create a CIFS share, the initial permissions are the
same as the default permissions for a Windows 2003 share
with the addition of an ACE (Access Control Entry) that permits
full access to the share for all authenticated users.
Administrators can choose to remove this full access ACE, set
up custom permissions, or leave the ACL (Access Control List)
as is if the server is set up in a fully trusted environment.

NFS Protocol
The NFS (Network File System) protocol was originally designed by
Sun™ Microsystems and allows all network users to access shared files
stored on computers of different types. NFS provides access to shared
files through an interface called the Virtual File System (VFS) that runs
on top of TCP/IP. Users can manipulate shared files as if they were stored
locally on the user's own hard disk. With NFS, computers connected to a
network operate as clients while accessing remote files, and as servers
while providing remote users access to local shared files. This protocol is

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 13

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Hard Drive Storage

used with UNIX and Linux networks. It can also be used with Windows
networks.

Figure 7 NAS Backup Via CIFS

and NFS

OpenStorage (OST) With the OST presentation, the DXi system presents storage servers to a
Symantec NetBackup or Backup Exec media server through a specific
Symantec protocol. A storage server consists of logical storage units
(LSUs), which are similar to directories in a NAS file system or tape
cartridges in a VTL partition.
The OST presentation requires the Symantec NetBackup (7.1.x or later)
or Backup Exec 2010 R3 or later host application and the OST Plug-in
client installation on the media server. Plug-in clients are host-OS
dependent and are supplied by Quantum. To use the DXi in OST mode,
you must configure an OST storage server and LSUs on the DXi. You
must also map the LSUs on the NetBackup server so that NetBackup can
perform backups and restore from them. Additionally, policies for
optimized duplication (OST replication) and OST direct to tape may need
to be set on the NetBackup server.

14 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Supported RAID Configurations

Figure 8 OpenStorage (OST)

Example

Supported RAID Configurations

RAID is short for Redundant Array of Independent (or Inexpensive) Disks,
which is a category of storage that employs two or more drives in
combination for fault tolerance and performance.
DXi6902 systems use the following RAID levels:
• RAID 1 Configuration
• Dynamic Disk Pool (DDP) Technology

RAID 1 Configuration
RAID 1 provides redundancy and fault tolerance by mirroring disks. Each
disk in the RAID set contains a copy of the same data. For example, in a
RAID set with two disks, if one disk fails, all of the data still exists on the
other disk.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 15

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Supported RAID Configurations

The DXi6902 Node uses RAID 1 sets for the boot disk (operating system)
as well as for the blookpool index.
The Node contains the following RAID 1 sets (Figure 9):
• BOOT - HDD slots 1 and 8 (operating system and journal files)
• META 1 - HDD slots 2 and 9 (blockpool index)
• META 2 - HDD slots 3 and 10 (blockpool index)
• META 3 - HDD slots 4 and 11 (blockpool index)
• META 4 - HDD slots 5 and 12 (blockpool index)
• META 5 - HDD slots 6 and 13 (blockpool index)
• META 6 - HDD slots 7 and 14 (blockpool index)

Note: Node HDD slots 0 and 15 contain global hot spares.

Figure 9 DXi6902 Node RAID

Sets
Hot Spare

Hot Spare
META 1
META 2
META 3
META 4
META 5
META 6

META 1
META 2
META 3
META 4
META 5
META 6
BOOT

BOOT

Dynamic Disk Pool (DDP) Technology

Dynamic Disk Pool (DDP) technology is a new alternative to traditional
RAID configuration. DDP distributes data, parity information, and spare
capacity across a pool of drives, providing the following benefits:
• Faster drive recovery
• Easier storage expansion
• Dynamic re-balancing of data across drives
• Better data availability

16 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
DXi Advanced Reporting

The DXi6902 Array modules (RBODs) and Expansion modules (EBODs)

use Dynamic Disk Pool technology for data storage (Figure 9). All hard
disk drives in an Array or Expansion module are configured in a single
DDP pool.
Unlike RAID 6, a Dynamic Disk Pool does not include a physical hot
spare. However, enough disk space is reserved to provide the equivalent
of a hot spare. And similar to RAID 6, a DDP pool can tolerate up to two
drive faults.

Figure 10 DXi6902 Array and

Expansion Module DDP Pools

DDP Pool DDP Pool DDP Pool DDP Pool

DDP Pool DDP Pool DDP Pool DDP Pool

DDP Pool DDP Pool DDP Pool DDP Pool

DXi Advanced Reporting

Quantum DXi Advanced Reporting works with all DXi-Series disk backup
systems. DXi Advanced Reporting combines comprehensive
performance data logging with powerful visual reporting and analysis
tools to help you identify potential problems and optimize system
operation. For more information, refer to the DXi Advanced Reporting
User’s Guide (6-67353).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 17

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Network Configuration

Network Configuration
During network configuration, each individual network interface on the
DXi6902 can be configured as a subnet with its own network settings.
Each physical Ethernet port can be configured as a network device. In
addition, you can also create bonded device (logical ports) consisting of
two or more physical ports.
Keep in mind that any traffic can pass through any of the configured
Ethernet ports. This means that the routing of different traffic types, as
well as firewall capability, must be controlled using the network
infrastructure (routers and switches) that the DXi6902 is connected to.
For more information about configuration network settings, see
Network on page 315.

Note: Each configured network interface requires its own set of

network settings (IP address, network mask, and gateway).

Caution: For effective bonded network use, a properly configured

network switch is required. (A network switch is not
supplied with the DXi6902.) The DXi6902 bonding settings
must match the switch settings. If the switch settings and
the DXi6902 settings do not match, your system may
become inaccessible through the switch.

Best Practices
There are several items that should be considered when installing and
configuring your DXi6902 system. By reviewing this information, you
can help shorten the installation and configuration time for your
system.
• Licensing
• Virtual Media—How Many and What Size?

18 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Best Practices

Licensing The features of the DXi6902 are enabled through licensing options,
which are available through the remote management console (see
License Keys on page 393).
Licenses are either factory-installed on the DXi6902, or they are
available through a license certificate, which is included with the
system.

Factory-Installed Licenses
The following DXi6902 licenses are factory-installed:
• NAS
• VTL
• Backup Application Specific (Path to Tape)
• Data Deduplication
• Replication
• Storage Capacity
• OST
• Data-in-Flight Encryption

NAS
The Network Attached Storage (NAS) license allows NAS shares to be
exposed to backup hosts and applications. (License key is pre-installed
on all DXi6902 systems.)

VTL
The Virtual Tape Library (VTL) license allows virtual devices such as the
media changer and tape drive to be exposed to the attached Fibre
Channel hosts. (License key for 160 VTDs is pre-installed on all DXi6902
systems.)

Backup Application Specific (Path to Tape)

The Backup Application Specific license allows you to export virtual
media directly to an attached physical tape library using Backup
Application Specific NDMP or OST Direct to Tape. (License key is pre-
installed on all DXi6902 systems.)

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 19

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Best Practices

The Backup Application Specific option works with the following backup
applications:
• Symantec NetBackup 7.1.x and higher — direct-to-tape feature
• Symantec Backup Exec 2010 R3 and higher
• EMC Networker

Note: EMC NetWorker 8.1 and later do not support Backup

Application Specific Path to Tape.

• Oracle Secure Backup 10.3

• ASG-Time Navigator

Note: For more information, see the DXi-Series Backup Application

Specific Path to Tape Configuration Guide (6-67211).

When the Path to Tape feature is enabled and configured, backup data
can be moved directly from the DXi6902 system to a tape library. For a

20 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Best Practices

list of supported tape libraries and tape drives for Backup Application
Specific, see Table 1 and Table 2.

Table 1 Supported Tape

Libraries in Backup Application Vendor Tape Library
Specific
Quantum Scalar i40 and i80

Scalar i500

Scalar i2000 and i6000

Scalar 24

Scalar 50 (PX502)

PX500

PX720

Dell PV132T

PVT136T

ML6000

HP ESL E Series

EML Series

IBM TS3500

Oracle/STK L180 (FC only)

L700 (FC only)

SL500 (FC only)

SL3000 (FC only)

Table 2 Supported Tape Drives

in Backup Application Specific Vendor Tape Drive

Quantum SDLT320, SDLT600, DLT-S4, LTO-2, and

LTO-3

HP LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, and LTO-6

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 21

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Best Practices

Vendor Tape Drive

IBM LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, and LTO-6

Data Deduplication
The Data Deduplication license allows the DXi6902 to reduce the size of
data stored on the system through the deduplication process (see Data
Reduction on page 5). (License key is pre-installed on all DXi6902
systems.)

Replication
The Replication license allows the DXi6902 to replicate data to up to
two target systems and received replicated data from up to ten source
systems. (License key is pre-installed on all DXi6902 systems.)

Storage Capacity
The Storage Capacity license is factory-installed for the installed
capacity. Additional capacity requires a certificate license that comes
with each Expansion module. This license allows the storage capacity of
the DXi6902 to be increased. (License key is pre-installed on all DXi6902
systems.)

OST
The OST license, when enabled, allows a Open Storage Technology (OST)
connection. For Symantec users with specific versions of the software,
another replication option is available for DXi6902 models through the
Symantec OpenStorage (OST) API. (License Certificate is included with all
DXi6902 systems.)

Note: For more information, see the DXi-Series NetBackup and

Backup Exec OST Configuration Guide (6-67079).

Data-in-Flight Encryption
The Data-in-Flight Encryption license enables use of AES encryption
(128-bit or 256-bit) when sending data to another system. (Not
available in all regions.)

22 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Best Practices

Virtual Media—How There is no correct answer to this question as it really depends on your
Many and What Size? backup regime and the backup application in use. A DXi system does
not preallocate disk space when a virtual tape cartridge is created, there
can be an inclination to create a lot of large virtual tape cartridges,
greater than the amount that is actually required. While this has no
initial bearing on the DXi’s capacity utilization, it can cause issues down
the track.
Regarding the quantity of virtual media you need to create, as long as
there is sufficient media to hold the amount of backup data for the
required retention period, the quantity does not really matter. However,
it is extremely important, as mentioned earlier, that the aging and expiry
rules of the media pool are defined early. If these rules are not defined,
the virtual tape cartridges will never enter the scratch pool resulting in
you running out of virtual media, and in turn space on the DXi system.
As a rule of thumb, more is better than less; as long as expiry rules are
defined.
Although there is no perfect size when it comes to creating virtual tape
cartridges, there are a few factors to consider. If a virtual tape cartridge
is created at 200 GB, then it will be presented as storing 200 GB of
native data.
Creating smaller sized media is preferred, for example 50 GB or 100 GB,
as it allows a virtual tape cartridge to be completely filled even when
backing up smaller data sets. Smaller sized media also aids the transfer
of data from virtual to physical tape platforms. Once again, virtual tape
cartridge size will depend on the backup application in use.
It is important to note that the design of the DXi will not allow a virtual
tape cartridge to be written to it if its size is larger than the amount of
free space available on the DXi. For example, if you have a virtual tape
cartridge size of 400 GB but only 300 GB of free space is available on the
DXi, the backup will fail when attempting to write data to the virtual
tape cartridge. As a result, smaller virtual tape cartridge sizes are better.
Remember, the DXi system is always cautious of being filled up so that
the integrity of stored data is not compromised.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 23

Chapter 1: DXi6902 System Description
Best Practices

24 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2
DXi6902 Basic Operations

This chapter describes the hardware features and basic operation of

DXi6902 systems and includes the following sections:
• DXi6902 Node
• DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules
• Turning On and Shutting Down the System
• Locating DXi6902 Serial Numbers

DXi6902 Node
The DXi6902 Node is a computer server that provides control for the DXi
software (host OS and software applications). The Node also stores
support data for the DXi6902 system, such as metadata and indexes.
The Node contains 16 drive carriers. In addition, all network connections
are made on the Node.
All DXi6902 systems include one Node.
The DXi6902 Node has a series of LED indicators and buttons located on
the front and back of each component:
• Node Front Panel Features and Indicators

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 25

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Node

• Node Rear Panel Connectors

• Node Hard Drive Carrier Indicators
• Node 1 GbE Ethernet Port Indicators
• Node 10 GbE Ethernet Port Indicators
• Node Power Supply Indicators

Node Front Panel Figure 11 shows the controls, indicators, and connectors located behind
Features and Indicators the optional rack bezel on the front panel of the Node. Table 3 describes
each item.

Figure 11 DXi6902 Node Front

View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10

26 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Node

Table 3 DXi6902 Node - Front

Panel LED Indicators, Buttons,
and Connectors

Indicator, Button, or
Item Connector Icon Description

1 Power-on indicator, The power-on indicator lights when the system

power button power is on. The power button controls the
power supply output to the system.
Warning: Turning off the power removes the
main power but keeps standby power
supplied to the Node. Because of this,
you must unplug the Node before
servicing.
Caution: Turning off the power without properly
shutting down the system may result in
loss of data (see Turning On and
Shutting Down the System on
page 45).
Note: To shut down the Node in the event of an
emergency, press and hold the power
button for 4 seconds. Warning: This may
result in data loss and may cause a delay
on next startup due to a blockpool verify
operation.

2 System identification Press to toggle the system ID on and off.

button The identification buttons on the front and back
panels can be used to locate a particular system
within a rack. When one of these buttons is
pressed, the LCD panel on the front and the
system status indicator on the back flashes until
one of the buttons is pressed again.

3 Video connector Allows you to connect a VGA display to the

system.

4 LCD menu buttons Not used.

5 LCD panel Lights blue during normal system operation.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 27

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Node

Indicator, Button, or
Item Connector Icon Description

6 Information tag A slide-out label panel which displays the system

serial number.

7 Hard drives Sixteen 2.5 inch hot-swappable hard drives.

8 vFlash media card slot Not used.

9 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Allows you to connect USB devices to the system.
The ports are USB 2.0-compliant.
Caution: Use of connected peripheral devices,
such as a USB or PS/2 keyboard and
mouse or a VGA display, is not
supported and may cause incorrect
system operation.

10 NMI button Not used.

Node Rear Panel Figure 12, Figure 13, and Figure 14 show the connectors located on the
Connectors rear panel of the DXi6902 Node. Table 4 describes each item.

Note: Refer to the port numbering labels on the back of the Node
chassis to help you determine the correct port connections.

Caution: Do not disconnect any SAS cables from the Node during
normal system operation. Unplugging a SAS cable while
the system is powered on may result in data loss.

10 GbE Cable Types

Depending on the configuration, Quantum DXi6902 systems support
one of the following 10 GbE cable types:
• 10 GbE optical cable lengths of up to 300 meters with OM3
cables and up to 100 meters with OM2 cables - Quantum
recommends using the two 10 meter LC to LC type optical cables

28 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Node

that are shipped with the DXi6902 system. Consult your 10 GbE
optical switch/SFP documentation for additional information on
optical cable requirements.
• 10 GbE Twinax cable - Quantum recommends using the approved
5 meter Twinax cable type that is shipped with the DXi6902 system.
This cable is compatible with Cisco 5000 Series Data Center Class
switches.

Note: The 10 GbE Copper (Twinax) cable options that Quantum

provides do not support all switches. Please note the
supported switches during the purchase-configuration
process, and if the Twinax cables supplied by Quantum are
not compatible with your switch, then you will need to
provide your own compatible Twinax cables from your
switch vendor. Be sure to have these available before the
system installation takes place.

Figure 12 Node Rear View -

DXi6902

1 2 3 4 5

4 5 1 2

1 2 3 2 1 0
4 5
1 2 3

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 29

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Node

Figure 13 Rear View - DXi6902

With Optional 2 x 10GbE Ports

16

6 7

Figure 14 Rear View - DXi6902

With Optional 4 x 1GbE Ports

16

6 7 8 9

Table 4 Rear Panel Connectors

- DXi6902

Indicator, Button, or
Item Connector Icon Description

1 2 x 10 GbE (SFP+) For data ingest/read.

Ethernet ports

2 2 x 8 Gb Fibre Channel For path to tape or VTL ingest/read.

ports

30 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Node

Indicator, Button, or
Item Connector Icon Description

3 4 x 6 Gb SAS ports For connection to Array modules (RBOD)s.

Note: The rightmost two ports are not used.

4 4 x 6 Gb SAS ports For connection to Array modules (RBOD)s.

Note: The rightmost two ports are not used.

5 4 x 8 Gb Fibre Channel For VTL ingest/read.

ports

6 System identification Press to toggle the system ID on and off.

button The identification buttons on the front and back
panels can be used to locate a particular system
within a rack. When one of these buttons is
pressed, the LCD panel on the front and the
system status indicator on the back flashes until
one of the buttons is pressed again.

7 System identification Not used.

connector

8 iDRAC port For Quantum use only.

9 Serial connector Allows you to connect a serial device to the

system.

10 VGA connector Caution: Use of connected peripheral devices,

such as a USB or PS/2 keyboard and
mouse or a VGA display, is not
supported and may cause incorrect
system operation.

11 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Caution: Use of connected peripheral devices,

such as a USB or PS/2 keyboard and
mouse or a VGA display, is not
supported and may cause incorrect
system operation.

12 Service port For Quantum use only.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 31

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Node

Indicator, Button, or
Item Connector Icon Description

13 3 x 1 GbE Ethernet ports For data ingest/read.

14 Power supply (PSU1) 750 watt hot-swappable power supply.

15 Power supply (PSU2) 750 watt hot-swappable power supply.

16 Optional 2 x 10 GbE For data ingest/read.

(SFP+) Ethernet ports
or
Optional 4 x 1 GbE
Ethernet ports

Node Hard Drive Carrier Each hard drive carrier has two LED indicators (see Figure 15):
Indicators • Drive activity indicator (green)
• Flashing - Indicates hard disk drive activity.
• Drive failure indicator (green and amber)
• Off - Drive ready for insertion or removal

Note: The drive status indicator remains off until all hard
drives are initialized after system power is applied.
Drives are not ready for insertion or removal during this
time.

• Blinks green two times per second - Identify drive/preparing

for removal
• Blinks green, amber, and off - Drive predicted failure
• Blinks amber four times per second - Drive failed
• Blinks green slowly - Drive rebuilding
• Steady green - Drive online
• Blinks green three seconds, amber three seconds, and off
three seconds - Rebuild aborted

32 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Node

Note: If a drive fails, you will be notified by a service ticket in the

remote management console (see Service Tickets on
page 201).

Caution: Do not remove a hard drive that has not failed. Instead,
only remove a drive that has failed. If you accidently
remove a good drive, wait 30 seconds before
reinserting the drive.

Figure 15 Hard Drive Carrier Drive activity Drive status indicator

LEDs indicator (green) (green and amber)

Node 1 GbE Ethernet Depending on the configuration, Quantum DXi6902 systems include
Port Indicators four or eight 1 GbE Ethernet ports. Each 1 GbE port on the back panel
has two LED indicators (see Figure 16):
• Link indicator
• Off - Indicates the port is not connected to the network.
• Green - Indicates the port is connected to the network at
maximum speed (1Gbps).
• Amber - Indicates the port is connected to the network at less
than its maximum port speed.
• Activity Indicator

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 33

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Node

• Blinking green - Indicates network data is being sent or

received.

Figure 16 Ethernet Port LEDs Link indicator Activity indicator

Node 10 GbE Ethernet Depending on the configuration, Quantum DXi6902 systems include
Port Indicators one or two 10 GbE adapter cards with dual optical ports or dual Twinax
ports.
The 10 GbE adapter with dual optical or Twinax ports has two LED
indicators for each 10 GbE port (see Figure 17):
• Link indicator
• Off - Indicates the port is not connected to the network.
• Green - Indicates the port is connected to the network at
10 Gbps speed.
• Yellow - Indicates the port is connected to the network at
1 Gbps speed.
• Activity Indicator
• Blinking - Indicates network data is being sent or received.

34 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Node

Figure 17 LEDs for 10 GbE Port 1 Port 2

Adapter With Dual Optical or
Twinax Ports

Link indicator Activity indicator

Activity indicator Link indicator

Node Power Supply Each power supply has an illuminated translucent handle that serves as
Indicators an indicator to show whether power is present or whether a power fault
has occurred (see Figure 18):
• Not lit - Indicates power is not connected.
• Green - Indicates a valid power source is connected to the power
supply and that the power supply is operational.
• Flashing amber - Indicates a problem with the power supply.
• Flashing green - When hot-adding a power supply, this indicates
that the power supply is mismatched with the other power supply.
Replace the power supply that has the flashing indicator with a
power supply that matches the capacity of the other installed power
supply.

Caution: All power supplies are hot swappable. When replacing

power supplies, never remove more than one power supply
at a time from the system. Also, before you remove one
power supply, make sure the other power supply is
operating correctly (indicator handle is green).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 35

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules

Figure 18 Power Supply LED Power supply status

indicator/handle

DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules

The DXi6902 Array modules (RBODs) and Expansion modules (EBODs)
are used to provide additional capacity (backup data storage) for the
DXi6902 system. Each Array or Expansion module contains 12 drive
carriers and provides 34 TB of licensable storage.
The DXi6902 includes 1 or 2 Array modules (RBODs). Array modules
connect to the Node and contain dual RAID controllers, which provide
storage management logic. The DXi6902 includes 0 to 13 Expansion
modules (EBODs), which connect in a chain to the Array modules, and
which provide additional storage capacity only.

Note: Storage capacity is licensed in 17 TB increments (see Adding a

License Key on page 395). To purchase a storage capacity
upgrade license, contact your Quantum sales representative.

The DXi6902 Array and Expansion modules have a series of LED

indicators and buttons located on the front and back of each
component:
• Array and Expansion Module Front Panel Features and Indicators

36 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules

• Array and Expansion Module Hard Drive Carrier Indicators

• Array Module Rear Panel Indicators
• Expansion Module Rear Panel Indicators

Note: Refer to the port numbering labels on the back of the Array
and Expansion module chassis to help you determine the
correct port connections.

Caution: Do not disconnect any SAS cables from the Array or

Expansion modules during normal system operation.
Unplugging a SAS cable while the system is powered on
may result in data loss.

Array and Expansion LED indicators and buttons are located behind the optional rack bezel
Module Front Panel on the front of the Array modules (RBODs) and Expansion modules
Features and Indicators (EBODs) (see Figure 19 and Table 5).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 37

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules

Figure 19 Array and Expansion

Module LED Indicators – Front
Panel

Enclosure locate

Service action required

Over temperature
Power

Standby power

Table 5 Array and Expansion

Module LEDs and Buttons Button/LED Description

Enclosure locate Indicates the location of the enclosure

(white) within the system.

Service action required Indicates at least one of the components

(amber) within the enclosure has detected a fault.

Over temperature Indicates the environmental temperature

(amber) has reached an unsafe level.

Power (green) Indicates the enclosure has main power.

Standby power (green) Indicates that the enclosure is in standby

mode.

38 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules

Array and Expansion The individual hard drive sleds contain LEDs that indicate the health
Module Hard Drive condition of the hard drive (see Figure 20 and Table 6).
Carrier Indicators

Figure 20 Hard Drive Sled LEDs Drive service

action allowed

Drive fault

Drive active

Table 6 Hard Drive Sled LEDs

LED Description

LEDs off No power.

Drive service action Solid – It is safe to remove the hard drive

allowed LED (blue) from the array for service.

Drive fault (amber) Solid – The hard drive has failed. Contact
Quantum customer support.
Blinking – Drive volume or Array module
locate function.

Drive active LED Solid – No activity on the hard drive.

(green) Blinking – There is activity on the hard
drive.
Note: It is normal to see drive activity even
when the DXi is not reading or
writing data.

Caution: Do not remove a hard drive that has not failed. Instead,
only remove a drive that has failed. If you accidentally
remove a good drive, wait 30 seconds before reinserting
the drive.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 39

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules

Array Module Rear LED indicators and buttons are located on the back of the Array
Panel Indicators modules (RBODs) (see Figure 21 and Table 7).

Figure 21 Array Module LED

Indicators – Rear Panel

Ethernet 2 activity SAS host 1 fault SAS expansion 2 fault

Ethernet 2 link rate SAS host 1 activity SAS expansion 2 activity

Ethernet 1 activity SAS host 2 activity SAS expansion 1 activity

Ethernet 1 link rate SAS host 2 fault SAS expansion 1 fault

Port 1 Port 2

ID/ Reset Switch

Diag

Mini USB

Battery fault

Battery charging Port 1 Port 2

|O|O|
Port 1 Port 2

Service action allowed ID/

Diag
ID/
Diag

Service action required

Cache active

Seven segment display

Power switch
USB

Standby power AC enabled

DC enabled Service action required

Service action allowed

40 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules

Table 7 Array Module LEDs

and Buttons Button/LED Description

Ethernet link rate Solid - port speed 1000MB/sec.

(green) Off - port speed 10/100MB/sec.

Ethernet activity Solid - link established.

(green) Blinking - indicates port activity.

SAS host/expansion Both Off - cable unplugged.

fault (amber) Fault Off and Activity On - all links
SAS host/expansion operating.
activity (green) Fault On and Activity Off - at least one
link active and at least one link fault.

Battery fault (amber) On - battery has failed.

Off - battery operating as normal.

Battery charging Blinking - battery is charging.

(green) On - battery is fully charged.
Off - battery fault or no battery.

Service action allowed Solid - safe for Quantum field service. to

(blue) remove controller from slot.

Service action required Solid - controller has failed and requires

(amber) attention.
Note: Fault light will be on during power
up and will turn off after self-test
sequence completes.

Cache active (green) Solid - unwritten data is stored in cache.

Blinking - during AC power failure, cache
offload is occurring.

Seven segment display Displays tray ID and error code. (Displays

(green) 99 when the Array module is operating
normally.)

USB Not used.

Mini USB Not used.

Reset switch Not used.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 41

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules

Button/LED Description

Standby power (green) Solid - main DC power is off and 5V

standby power is on.

DC enabled (green) Solid - DC power rails are within specified

limits.

Service action allowed Solid - safe for Quantum field service. to

(blue) remove power supply from slot.

Service action required Solid - power supply has failed and

(amber) requires attention.

AC enabled (green) Solid - power is being applied to the power

supply and the power switch is on.

Expansion Module Rear LED indicators and buttons are located on the back of the Expansion
Panel Indicators modules (EBODs) (see Figure 22 and Table 8).

42 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules

Figure 22 Expansion Module

LED Indicators – Rear Panel

SAS host 2 activity Serial port

SAS host 2 fault

SAS host 1 activity Ethernet link rate

SAS expansion activity
SAS host 1 fault Ethernet activity
SAS expansion fault

Port 1

Lnk Lnk

ID/Diag

Seven segment display

Power
Port 1

ID/Diag

Service action required

Service action allowed

Power switch

Standby power AC enabled

DC enabled Service action required

Service action allowed

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 43

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
DXi6902 Array and Expansion Modules

Table 8 Expansion Module

LEDs and Buttons Button/LED Description

SAS host/expansion Both Off - cable unplugged.

fault (amber) Fault Off and Activity On - all links
SAS host/expansion operating.
activity (green) Fault On and Activity Off - at least one
link active and at least one link fault.

Ethernet link rate Solid - port speed 1000MB/sec.

(green) Off - port speed 10/100MB/sec.

Ethernet activity Solid - link established.

(green) Blinking - indicates port activity.

Service action allowed Solid - safe for Quantum field service. to

(blue) remove ESM from slot.

Service action required Solid - ESM has failed and requires

(amber) attention.
Note: Fault light will be on during power
up and will turn off after self-test
sequence completes.

Power (green) Solid - power is being applied to the ESM.

Seven segment display Displays tray ID and error code. (Displays

(green) 00 when the Array module is operating
normally.)

Standby power (green) Solid - main DC power is off and 5V

standby power is on.

DC enabled (green) Solid - DC power rails are within specified

limits.

Service action allowed Solid - safe for Quantum field service. to

(blue) remove power supply from slot.

Service action required Solid - power supply has failed and

(amber) requires attention.

AC enabled (green) Solid - power is being applied to the power

supply and the power switch is on.

44 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
Turning On and Shutting Down the System

Turning On and Shutting Down the System

To turn on or shut down the DXi6902, refer to the following sections:
• Turning on the DXi6902
• Turning off the DXi6902

Turning on the DXi6902 To turn on the system, power on the DXi6902 system components in the
following order:
1 Turn on both power switches on the back of each Expansion module
(EBOD) (see Figure 23). Wait until the seven segment display on the
rear of the module displays 00 (approximately 1 minute).
2 Turn on both power switches on the back of each Array module
(RBOD) (see Figure 24). Wait until the seven segment display on the
rear of the module displays 99 (approximately 3 minutes).
3 Press the power button on the front of the Node (see Figure 25).
Wait for the system to boot before attempting to log on.

Note: The system can take approximately 30 minutes to start up,

depending on the amount of installed storage capacity.

The system is now ready for operation (see Chapter 3, DXi6902 Remote
Management).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 45

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
Turning On and Shutting Down the System

Figure 23 Powering on the Seven segment display

DXi6902 Expansion Modules
(EBODs)
Port 1 Port 1

ID/Diag ID/Diag

Expansion module (rear view)

Power switches

Figure 24 Powering on the Seven segment display

DXi6902 Array Modules
(RBODs)
|O|O| |O|O|
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2

ID/ ID/
Diag Diag

Array module (rear view)

Power switches

Figure 25 Powering on the Power button

DXi6902 Node

Node (front view)

46 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
Locating DXi6902 Serial Numbers

Turning off the DXi6902 To turn off the system:

Caution: Before shutting down the DXi6902, make sure that all
backup and replication jobs are finished, and that space
reclamation activity is complete.

1 Shut down the system from the remote management console using
the Shutdown option on the Utilities > Reboot & Shutdown page
(see Reboot & Shutdown on page 413).

Note: Shutting down the system can take up to 15 minutes. Only

the Node will completely shut down.

2 After the Node shuts down, turn off both power switches on the
back of each Array module (RBOD) (see Figure 24). Wait until the
seven segment display on the rear of the module turns off.
3 Turn off both power switches on the back of each Expansion
module (EBOD) (see Figure 23).

Locating DXi6902 Serial Numbers

You will need the system serial number, the Node serial number, and the
Expansion module serial number at various times:
• System Serial Number - You need this number to contact Quantum
Support or to add a licensed feature.
• Node Serial Number - You need this number for a Node
replacement component.
• Array Module (RBOD) and Expansion Module (EBOD) Serial
Number - You need this number for an Array module or Expansion
module replacement component.
You can locate the system serial number on the Home page of the
remote management console.
You can also locate the system serial number, the Node serial number,
and the Array and Expansion module serial numbers by looking at the
physical components.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 47

Chapter 2: DXi6902 Basic Operations
Locating DXi6902 Serial Numbers

• The system serial number is located on the pull-out information tag

on the front of the Node (see Figure 26). The text Service Call
System Serial Number appears on the label. The system serial
number includes the letters BVW.
• The Node serial number is located to the left of the SAS ports on the
rear of the Node. It is the same as the Node service tag.
• The Array module (RBOD) and Expansion module (EBOD) serial
number is located on front top of the module and on the rear lip of
the module.

Figure 26 DXi6902 Pull out information tag to view

Information Tag system serial number

48 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 3
DXi6902 Remote
Management

The Quantum DXi6902 provides a powerful Web-based user interface

that allows you to configure and manage the system from a remote
workstation on the same network as the DXi6902.
Use the DXi6902 remote management console to perform the following
tasks:
• Set up the DXi6902 using guided procedures (see DXi6902
Configuration Wizards on page 61).
• View important system information at a glance (see DXi6902 Home
Page on page 107).
• Manage data replication activities (see DXi6902 Replication on
page 119).
• Monitor hardware status and system performance (see DXi6902
Status on page 171).
• View administration alerts and resolve service tickets (see DXi6902
Alerts on page 199).
• Configure storage presentation, data replication, and system
settings (see DXi6902 Configuration on page 209).
• Run diagnostic tools and maintain the system (see DXi6902 Utilities
on page 377).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 49

Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
Accessing Remote Management

Accessing Remote Management

Access the remote management console using a Web browser on a
workstation that is on the same network as the DXi6902.
See the following sections for more information about accessing
DXi6902 remote management:
• Supported Browsers
• Logging On to the DXi6902
• Logging Off of the DXi6902

Supported Browsers Web browser software is not included with the DXi6902. You must
obtain and install it separately. The DXi6902 remote management
console supports the following Web browsers:
• Mozilla Firefox 17 or later
• Google Chrome 21 or later
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 9, 10, or 11

Note: For correct operation of the remote management console,

including the display of the online help, disable any pop-up
blockers and enable JavaScript in your Web browser. In the
Google Chrome browser, the DXi help may not appear when
Help is selected. If this occurs, select Settings > Show
Advanced Setting > Privacy > Pop-ups > Manage
Exceptions. Add the DXi IP address to the exceptions box,
select Allow, and click Done.

Logging On to the To log on to the DXi6902 remote management console:

DXi6902 1 Launch a supported Web browser on a workstation that has
network access to the DXi6902.
2 In the browser address box, type the IP address of the DXi6902, and
then press <Enter>.
The Login window displays (see Figure 27).

50 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
Accessing Remote Management

Figure 27 Login Window

If the Login window does not display, verify that the IP address is
correct and that the network path to the DXi6902 is valid. Also
verify that you are using a supported Web browser. Then try again.
If you are still unable to access the Login window, contact your
DXi6902 administrator.

Note: The default IP address is 10.1.1.1. The IP address can be

changed during installation using the Getting Started
Wizard or at a later time on the Network page (see
Network on page 315).

3 Select the login type and enter the corresponding password.

• Monitor - Allowed to view information on the DXi6902 remote
management console but cannot make changes. (The default
password is password.)
• Administrator - Allowed to view and change information on
the DXi6902 remote management console. (The default
password is password.)

Note: Passwords are limited to 15 characters. Alphanumeric

characters and special characters are allowed. Passwords
can be changed on the Web & CLI Passwords page (see
Web & CLI Passwords on page 333).

4 Click Login.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 51

Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
Accessing Remote Management

5 If a security banner message has been specified for the DXi6902,

click Accept.

Note: For information about specifying a security banner

message, see Security Notice on page 342.

The Home page displays (see Figure 28).

Figure 28 Home Page

If you are unable to log on, verify that the password is correct, then
try again. If you are still unable to log on, contact your DXi6902
administrator.

Caution: More than one Administrator can log on to the DXi at a

time. If two Administrators attempt to make configuration
changes on the same page at the same time, it is possible
that one Administrator’s changes will overwrite the other’s.
Always coordinate configuration changes with other
Administrator users.

52 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
The Remote Management Console

Logging Off of the When you are done working in the DXi6902 remote management
DXi6902 console, click Logout on the upper right of the remote management
console to end your session.

Note: If the DXi6902 remote management console is idle for more

than 30 minutes (default setting), the system logs off the user.
The inactivity timeout can be changed on the Login Session
page (see Login Session on page 341).

The Remote Management Console

After you log on to the DXi6902, the remote management console
displays. The remote management console includes the following
features:
• System Banner
• Main Menu
• DXi6902 Management Pages

System Banner The system banner displays at the top of the remote management
console (see Figure 29). Use the system banner to see overall system
status and alert information at a glance, and to quickly access additional
information. The system banner also displays the time and date as well
as the login type (administrator or monitor).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 53

Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
The Remote Management Console

Figure 29 System Banner

Low Capacity Help Menu

Model Number Status Ticket Logout

Admin

System Banner

The following items display on the system banner:

• Model Number - The model number of the DXi6902 (see Model
Number on page 55).
• Status - Displays the operating state of the DXi6902:
• Normal - (Green) The system is operating correctly.
• Attention - (Yellow) There is a problem with the system.

Note: The state displays Attention during a blockpool verify

operation (see Blockpool Verify Behavior on page 57).

• Verify Failure - (Red) The blockpool verify process has failed.

• Low Space - (Yellow) Available disk space is low. Ingest and
replication continue, and space reclamation starts.
• Critical Reserve Space - (Red) Available disk space is critically
low. Ingest and replication are stopped, and space reclamation
continues.
• No Space - (Red) Available disk space is critically low. Ingest and
replication are stopped, and space reclamation continues.

54 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
The Remote Management Console

Click the Status button to display detailed status information about

the system (see Hardware on page 172).
• Admin - The Admin button turns yellow when an administration
alert occurs. Click the Admin button to manage administration
alerts (see Admin Alerts on page 199).
• Ticket - The Ticket button turns yellow when open service tickets
are present. Click the Ticket button to manage service tickets (see
Service Tickets on page 201).
• Low Capacity - The Low Capacity button turns yellow when
available disk space falls to a low level and the DXi enters Low
Space state (see Low Space Management on page 56). Click the
Low Capacity button to view the administration alerts related to
low disk space (see Admin Alerts on page 199).

Note: When disk space is low, target replication to the system is

paused (see Replication Service on page 167). In addition,
space reclamation and compaction are automatically
started to free up disk space (see Space Reclamation on
page 389).

• Logout - Click to end your remote management session.

• Help Menu - Select from the following help options:
• Help Contents - Open the DXi6902 online help.
• Online Documentation - Access documentation resources on
the Quantum Web site.
• About - Display DXi software version information.

Model Number
The Model Number displays in the DXi6902 System Overview section
on the Home page. The model number indicates the specific hardware
configuration of the DXi6902.
Table 9 describes the DXi6902 hardware configuration that is indicated
by each model number.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 55

Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
The Remote Management Console

Table 9 DXi6902 Model

Number DXi6902 Model Number DXi6902 Configuration

DXi6902 17–510 TB usable for data

storage
3 x 1 GbE Ethernet ports
2 x 10 GbE Ethernet ports
(Optional) Additional 4 x 1 GbE
Ethernet ports or 2 x 10 GbE
Ethernet ports
4 x 8 Gb Fibre Channel ports (for
VTL)
2 x 8 Gb Fibre Channel ports (for
path to tape, also configurable
for VTL)

Low Space Management

As disk capacity is used and free disk space approaches low levels, the
DXi6902 automatically responds as detailed in Table 10.
When the DXi6902 enters the Low Space state, space reclamation and
compaction are automatically started to free up disk space (see Space
Reclamation on page 389). Space reclamation and compaction end
when the DXi6902 exits the Low Space state.
When the DXi6902 enters the Critical Reserve Space state, backup
ingest is stopped, and target replication to the system is paused. Backup
ingest and target replication resume when the DXi6902 exits the
Critical Reserve Space state.

Note: The system generates a service ticket and an admin alert when
it enters the Low Space, Critical Reserve Space, and No Space
states. In addition, a service ticket and an admin alert are
generated when Used Disk Space reaches 85% and 95% of
total disk capacity.

56 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
The Remote Management Console

Table 10 Low Space States

DXi State Disk Space Level System Actions

Normal (Green) Normal disk space Low Capacity button is dark.

Backup ingest and replication occur
as normal.
Space reclamation occurs at normally
scheduled times.

Low Space (Yellow) Free Space is less than: Low Capacity button is lit.
500 GB + 100 GB x (total usable Backup ingest and replication occur
capacity in TB / 10 TB) as normal.
Space reclamation is automatically
started.

Critical Reserve Free Space is less than: Low Capacity button is lit.
Space (Red) 250 GB Backup ingest and replication are
stopped.
Space reclamation is automatically
started.
Note: VTL cartridge metadata files
can still be updated.

No Space (Red) Free Space is less than: Low Capacity button is lit.
10 GB Backup ingest and replication are
Note: No Space also occurs if the stopped.
Used Metadata percentage is Space reclamation is automatically
85% or greater. started.
Note: VTL cartridge metadata files
cannot be updated.

Blockpool Verify Behavior

A blockpool verify operation occurs if data on the system requires repair,
for example, after an unexpected shutdown due to a power loss. During
a blockpool verify operation, the banner displays the Attention state.
Clicking Attention displays the message: A previous unclean shutdown
of the DXi has required a data verification to commence. While in this

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 57

Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
The Remote Management Console

condition the DXi is operational, but performance may be severely

degraded.
While a blockpool verify operation is in progress, some system
operations are affected.
• Mounting VTL cartridges created prior to the blockpool verify may
fail.
• Retrieving data created prior to the blockpool verify may fail.
• Creating and mounting new VTL cartridges should succeed.
• Ingesting new data to new VTL cartridges or using NAS/OST should
succeed.
• Sending data that existed prior to the blockpool verify to a
replication target may fail.
• Sending new data to a replication target, or receiving replicated
data, should succeed.
• Space reclamation and healthchecks will fail.
When the blockpool verify is complete, the banner displays Normal, and
the system resumes normal operation

Main Menu The main menu displays on the left side of the DXi6902 remote
management console (see Figure 30). Click a menu item to display the
corresponding management page.
To access DXi Advanced Reporting, click the link below the main menu.
Quantum DXi Advanced Reporting provides performance data logging
and visual reporting and graphing features for Quantum DXi-Series
systems. For more information, see the Quantum DXi Advanced
Reporting User’s Guide (6-67353).

Note: Clicking Wizards on the main menu replaces the main menu
with the wizards menu. Click a menu item to begin a wizard, or
click Exit to return to the main menu (see DXi6902
Configuration Wizards on page 61).

58 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
The Remote Management Console

Figure 30 Main Menu

Main Menu

Map

DXi Advanced Reporting

DXi6902 Management Use the DXi6902 management pages to view information as well as
Pages configure and manage the system. To navigate to a page, first click a
menu item, then click a tab to display the corresponding page. Some
pages include sub-tabs that display pages with additional information
and options.
To view a graphical map of all remote management pages, click Map on
the main menu (see Figure 30). On the map, click the name of a page to
quickly navigate to that page (see Figure 31).
If you need help as you work, click Help in the page's title bar to see
online help for that page. In addition, Quick Tips are available on many
pages. Click the Quick Tip icon [?] next to a section or field to learn
more about that item.

Caution: Unless directed to do so by the documentation, do not use

your Web browser’s Back, Forward, or Refresh buttons
when navigating in the remote management console.
Doing so may have unintended effects. Instead, always use
the main menu and tabs to navigate in the remote
management console.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 59

Chapter 3: DXi6902 Remote Management
The Remote Management Console

Figure 31 Remote
Management Pages Map

Click a page name to

navigate to that page

60 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4
DXi6902 Configuration
Wizards

The Configuration Wizards provide guided assistance for setting up

the DXi6902. Use the wizards to quickly configure the most important
features of the system, including storage presentation and data
replication. Each wizard leads you step-by-step through the
configuration process.
The Configuration Wizards page displays the first time you log on to
the remote management console after completing the Getting Started
wizard. After that, to access the Configuration Wizards, click Wizards
on the main menu. This replaces the main menu with the Wizards menu
(see Figure 32).
The Wizards menu includes the following wizards:
• NAS - Helps you configure the DXi6902 as a NAS (Network
Attached Storage) appliance for use on a Windows or UNIX/Linux
network (see NAS Wizard on page 63).
• VTL - Helps you configure the DXi6902 to present its storage as one
or more VTL (Virtual Tape Library) partitions for use with a backup
application (see VTL Wizard on page 70).
• OST - Helps you configure the DXi6902 to present its storage as
one or more OST (OpenStorage) storage servers for use with a
backup application (see OST Wizard on page 79).
• Replication - Helps you configure the DXi6902 to send replicated
data to or receive replicated data from another DXi system (see
Replication Wizard on page 86).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 61

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards

• Email Alerts - Helps you configure the DXi6902 to automatically

send notifications and reports to selected recipients (see Email
Alerts Wizard on page 95).

Note: Before exiting the Wizards menu, Quantum recommends

configuring an e-mail server and enabling automatic
e-mails. To help maintain system integrity, Quantum
regularly collects system information through automatic
e-mails. These e-mails contain configuration and status
information only, and do not contain any customer data
stored on the system

• Support - Helps you enable licensed features on the DXi6902,

register your system with Quantum, and perform other tasks that
will aid Quantum customer support in assisting you (see Support
Wizard on page 100).
Click an item on the Wizards menu to begin a wizard. After you
complete a wizard, a green check mark displays next to its name on the
Wizards menu. To display the main menu again, click Exit.

Figure 32 Wizards Menu

Wizards Menu

62 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
NAS Wizard

NAS Wizard
The NAS wizard provides guided assistance for configuring the DXi6902
as a NAS (Network Attached Storage) appliance. The wizard helps you
determine if the NAS shares will be used on a Windows or UNIX/Linux
network, and if necessary helps you join the DXi6902 to a Windows
domain. Then the wizard guides you through the process of adding one
or more NAS shares to receive backup data.

Note:

Note: You cannot use the NAS wizard to edit existing shares. For
more information about working with NAS shares, see NAS on
page 210.

To begin the NAS wizard, on the Wizards menu, click NAS.

Step 1: About 1 Read the information about the wizard (see Figure 33).
2 Click Next to continue.

Note: At any time while using the wizard, you can click Previous to
return to the previous step.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 63

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
NAS Wizard

Figure 33 NAS Wizard: About

Step 2: Protocol 1 Select the type of host the DXi6902 will present NAS shares to (see
Figure 34):
• Windows (CIFS) - All hosts that will interact with the DXi6902
run Windows.
• UNIX/Linux (NFS) - All hosts that will interact with the DXi6902
run UNIX or Linux.
• Both Windows & UNIX/Linux - Both types of hosts (Windows
and UNIX/Linux) will interact with the DXi6902.
2 Click Next to continue.

64 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
NAS Wizard

Figure 34 NAS Wizard:

Protocol

Step 3: Windows Note: If you selected the UNIX/Linux (NFS) option in the previous
step, the wizard automatically skips this step and the next step.
Continue with Step 5: Add Share on page 68.

1 Select an option for joining the DXi6902 to the Windows network

(see Figure 35):
• Active Directory - Add the DXi6902 to a Windows network
using Active Directory
• Workgroup - Add the DXi6902 to a workgroup on a Windows
network

Note: To disjoin a domain, see Windows Domain on page 217.

2 In the Domain/Workgroup Name box, enter the name of the

domain or workgroup the DXi6902 is joining.
3 (Active Directory only) Enter information about the primary domain
controller:
• Primary Domain Controller - Select an option for the Primary
Domain Controller (PDC):
• Use DNS Discovery - Discover the PDC automatically.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 65

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
NAS Wizard

• Specify Address - Enter the fully qualified name or the IP

address of the PDC.
• Organization Unit - (Optional) Enter the name of the
organizational unit in the domain.
The DXi6902 will become a member of this organization.
• Administrator Name - Enter Administrator or any user that
has the right to join the domain.
By default, any user belonging to the Administrators group or
the Domain Admins group has the right to join the domain. In
addition, any user can join the domain if they are specifically
delegated this right by a member of the Administrators group.
• Administrator Password - Enter the password for the user
entered above.

Note: To configure users, see Share Access on page 220.

4 Click Next to continue.

Figure 35 NAS Wizard:

Windows

Step 4: Share Access 1 Do one of the following depending on whether the DXi6902 is
joining a Windows Workgroup or an Active Directory Domain:

66 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
NAS Wizard

• Windows Workgroup - Enter information about the workgroup

user:
• User Name - Enter the name of the workgroup user.
• Password - Enter the password for the workgroup user.
• Confirm Password - Enter the password again to confirm
it.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the
workgroup user.
• Grant Administrator Privileges - Select the check box to
add the workgroup user to the Windows Administrators
group.
This allows the workgroup user to override certain
permissions settings and prevents the workgroup user from
being locked out of shares or directories.
• Active Directory Domain - Enter information about the share
administrator:
• Fully Qualified User or Group Name - Enter the
administrator’s user or group name.
2 Click Add.
3 (Optional) To add additional workgroup users or share
administrators, repeat Steps 1–2.
4 Click Next to continue.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 67

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
NAS Wizard

Figure 36 NAS Wizard: Share

Access

Step 5: Add Share 1 Under Add Share, enter information about the NAS share (see
Figure 37):
• Name - Enter the name of the NAS share.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the share.
• Enable deduplication - Select the check box to enable data
deduplication. Quantum recommends that you enable data
deduplication to optimize disk usage.

Note: Data deduplication is enabled by default. You cannot

enable or disable data deduplication after the share is
added.

• Hide from network browsing - (Windows shares only) Select

the check box to hide the share from network browsing. If
selected, you cannot see the share when browsing the network.
• Export Protocol - (Available only if you selected the Both
option in Step 2: Protocol on page 64) Select the export
protocol for the share:
• CIFS - Select the CIFS option to use the share on a Windows
network.

68 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
NAS Wizard

• NFS - Select the NFS option to use the share on a UNIX or

Linux network.
2 Click Add.
3 (Optional) To add additional shares, repeat Steps 1–2.
4 Click Next to continue.

Figure 37 NAS Wizard: Add

Share

Step 6: Confirm 1 Review the settings you selected to make sure they are correct (see
Figure 38). If necessary, click Previous to return to a previous step to
make changes.
2 To make changes to a NAS share you added, first select the share
and click Delete to delete the share. Then click Previous to return to
the previous step and add a new share.
3 After you have confirmed all settings, click Finish. The wizard
configures the DXi6902 with the settings you selected.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 69

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
VTL Wizard

Figure 38 NAS Wizard:

Confirm

VTL Wizard
The VTL wizard provides guided assistance for configuring the DXi6902
to present its storage as one or more VTL (Virtual Tape Library) partitions
for use with a backup application. The wizard guides you through the
process of adding one or more VTL partitions, adding virtual media,
discovering hosts, and mapping partitions to hosts.

Note:

70 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
VTL Wizard

Note: You cannot use the VTL wizard to edit or add media to existing
partitions, or to edit existing host access groups. For more
information about working with VTL partitions, see VTL on
page 227.

To begin the VTL wizard, on the Wizards menu, click VTL.

Step 1: About 1 Read the information about the wizard (see Figure 39).
2 Click Next to continue.

Note: At any time while using the wizard, you can click Previous to
return to the previous step.

Figure 39 VTL Wizard: About

Step 2: Add Partition 1 Enter information about the partition (see Figure 40):
• Name - Enter the name of the VTL partition.
• Library Model - Select the library model emulated by the
partition. The library model determines the inquiry string
returned to the host by the DXi6902.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 71

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
VTL Wizard

The following library models are available:

• Quantum DXi7500
• ADIC Scalar 100, ADIC Scalar i2000, or ADIC Scalar i500
• ADIC Pathlight VX
• Quantum Scalar i40/i80 or Quantum Scalar i6000
• Quantum DXi6700, Quantum DXi6902, Quantum DXi6800,
Quantum DXi4700, Quantum DXi4601, QuantumDXi4500,
or Quantum DXi8500
• Quantum DX3000 or Quantum DX5000
• Quantum PX500 or Quantum PX720
• ATL M2500, ATL P1000, or ATL P7000
If you select a library such as the ATL P1000 or ATL P7000, the
DXi6902 appears as the selected library to the host and backup
application. If you select Quantum DXi6902, the host and
backup application recognize the device as a Quantum
DXi6902.

Note: Quantum recommends that you set the library model

to Quantum DXi6902 for best compatibility. If your
backup application does not support the Quantum
DXi6902 inquiry string, select a different library model.
Check your software compatibility guide to verify what
library models are supported.

• Number of Storage Slots - Accept the default number of

storage slots (based on DXi model), or enter the number of
storage slots in the partition (up to 9,000).

Note: One I/E slot is created for each storage slot up to a

maximum of 240 I/E slots.

• Virtual Tape Drive Model - Select the tape drive model

emulated by the virtual drives in the partition. All virtual tape
drives in a partition must be the same model.
The following tape drive models are available:
• Quantum DLT-S4, SDLT600, SDLT320, or DLT7000
• Certance LTO-2 and LTO-3

72 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
VTL Wizard

• IBM LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, or LTO-5

• HP LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, or LTO-5
• Number of Virtual Tape Drives - Accept the default number of
tape drives (based on DXi model), or enter the number of virtual
tape drives in the partition.

Note: If all tape drives are currently assigned to other

partitions, you must remove one or more tape drives
from an existing partition to make them available for
use in a new partition.

• Enable deduplication - Select the check box to enable data

deduplication. Quantum recommends that you enable data
deduplication to optimize disk usage.

Note: Data deduplication is enabled by default. You cannot

enable or disable data deduplication after the partition
is added.

2 Click Add.
3 (Optional) To add additional partitions, repeat Steps 1–2.
4 Click Next to continue.

Figure 40 VTL Wizard: Add

Partition

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 73

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
VTL Wizard

Step 3: Add Media 1 In the Partition drop-down box, select the partition where the
media will be created (see Figure 41).
2 Under Add Contiguous Media, enter information about the media:
• Initial Location - The initial location for cartridges after they are
created (Storage Slot or I/E Slot).

Note: You cannot create more cartridges than the number of

available slots in the initial location. For example, if 50
I/E slots are available, you cannot create more than 50
cartridges if the initial location is set to I/E Slot.

• Number of Media - The number of cartridges to create in the

partition.
• Starting Barcode - The first barcode number in the cartridge
sequence.
You can enter any alpha-numeric string for the starting barcode.
Subsequent barcodes are incremented accordingly. For example,
if you enter AA, the cartridges are numbered AA0000, AA0001,
AA0002, and so on. If you enter a starting barcode with less
than 6 characters, zeroes are appended to the barcode to make
it 6 characters long.
• Media Type - The media type of the cartridges.

Note: The available media type options are determined by the

type of tape drive selected when the partition was
created (see Adding a VTL Partition on page 230).

• Media Capacity - The capacity of the cartridges. Select an

option:
• Native Size - The capacity is determined by the selected
media type.
• Custom Size - The capacity is a custom value. Enter the
custom cartridge capacity in the box. Make sure the value is
within the acceptable range displayed next to the box.
3 Click Add.
4 (Optional) To add additional media, repeat Steps 1–3.
5 Click Next to continue.

74 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
VTL Wizard

Figure 41 VTL Wizard: Add

Media

Step 4: Discover 1 Click Discover Remote Hosts to list all hosts that are known to the
Remote Hosts DXi6902 (see Figure 41).
A host is made known to the DXi6902 if you enter the host ID on
this page, or if the host logs on to one or more Fibre Channel target
ports.
If you do not see the world wide name (WWN) of the host, make
sure the host is connected to a Fibre Channel port on the DXi6902
and click Discover Remote Hosts again.
The Backpanel Locations section displays a graphical
representation of the Fibre Channel and Ethernet ports as they
appear on the rear of the system.

Note: An Active status indicates the host is currently logged on

to one or more Fibre Channel target ports.

2 Enter information about the host:

• Remote Host WWPN - Enter the World Wide Port Name
(WWPN) of the host.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 75

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
VTL Wizard

• Alias - Enter a descriptive alias for the host.

3 Click Apply.
4 (Optional) To discover additional hosts, repeat Steps 1–3.
5 Click Next to continue.

Figure 42 VTL Wizard: Discover

Remote Hosts

Step 5: Map Remote 1 Enter information about the host access group (see Figure 43):
Hosts • Group Name - Enter a name for the group.
• Partition - Select the partition to associate with the group.
• Remote Host - Select the host (initiator) to associate with the
group.
• Target - Select the target (port) to associate with the group.
The Backpanel Locations section displays a graphical
representation of the Fibre Channel and Ethernet ports as they
appear on the rear of the system. A dark border displays around
the currently selected target.

76 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
VTL Wizard

Note: To change the LUN numbers assigned to a device, or to

map virtual devices to a host, use the Configuration > VTL
> Host Access > Host Mapping page (see Remote Host
Mapping on page 246).

2 (Optional) Select the Use CCL check box to use the Command and
Control LUN.

Note: The CCL (Command and Control LUN) is not used in most
environments. This option is recommended for host access
groups that contain an HP-UX host. It can also be used if
hosts that are not assigned to any host access group exist
in the SAN. The CCL is accessible to hosts only through LUN
0.

Caution: If you are not sure if you should use CCL, contact
Quantum Customer Support before you enable this
option.

3 Click Add.
4 (Optional) To map additional hosts, repeat Steps 1–3.
5 Click Next to continue.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 77

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
VTL Wizard

Figure 43 VTL Wizard: Map

Remote Hosts

Step 6: Confirm 1 Review the settings you selected to make sure they are correct (see
Figure 44). If necessary, click Previous to return to a previous step to
make changes.
2 To make changes to a VTL partition, media, or host access group you
added, first select the item and click Delete to delete it. Then click
Previous to return to the appropriate step and add a new item.
3 After you have confirmed all settings, click Finish. The wizard
configures the DXi6902 with the settings you selected.

78 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
OST Wizard

Figure 44 VTL Wizard: Confirm

OST Wizard
The OST wizard provides guided assistance for configuring the DXi6902
to present its storage as one or more OST (OpenStorage) storage servers
for use with a backup application. The wizard guides you through the
process of adding one or more OST storage servers, configuring LSUs
(logical storage units), and adding OST users. The wizard also provides a
link for downloading and installing the OST Plug-in on your backup
host.

Note:

Note: If you plan to use Concurrent Optimized Duplication, you

should complete the Replication wizard before beginning the
OST wizard (see Replication Wizard on page 86).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 79

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
OST Wizard

Note: You cannot use the OST wizard to edit existing storage servers
or LSUs. For more information about working with OST, see
OST on page 267.

To begin the OST wizard, on the Wizards menu, click OST.

Step 1: About 1 Read the information about the wizard (see Figure 45).
The About page displays the status of the OST service. OST settings
can be configured in Ready, Stopped, or Verifying state. The OST
server is available for backup only in Ready state.
2 Click Next to continue.

Note: At any time while using the wizard, you can click Previous to
return to the previous step.

Figure 45 OST Wizard: About

Step 2: Add Storage 1 Under Add Storage Server, enter information about the storage
Servers server (see Figure 46):
• Name - Enter the name of the storage server.

80 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
OST Wizard

Caution: Do not use an underscore ( _ ) in the name of the

storage server.

• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the storage

server.
• Max Connections - Enter the maximum number of connections
allowed to the storage server (3 to 65536).

Note: Quantum recommends setting Max Connections to

300.

• Enable Concurrent Optimized Duplication - Select the check

box to enable optimized duplication during OST ingest.
Concurrent Optimized Duplication is disabled by default. If
enabled, as data is written to the storage server, it is
simultaneously replicated to the target DXi. When optimized
duplication or Automatic Image Replication subsequently
occurs, the operation is more efficient because a portion of the
required data has already been replicated to the target storage
server.

Note: To configure the target DXi, see Replication Wizard on

page 86.

Note: When Concurrent Optimized Duplication is enabled, all

data on the storage server is duplicated, not just the
specified images.

2 Select the check box for each optimized duplication target you want
to duplicate the storage server to. When the storage server is
duplicated, its data will be sent to all selected targets.
3 Click Add.
The storage server displays in the Storage Servers Added table.
4 (Optional) To add additional storage servers, repeat Steps 1–2.
To remove a storage server, select it in the Storage Servers Added
table and click Delete.
5 Click Next to continue.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 81

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
OST Wizard

Figure 46 OST Wizard: Add

Storage Servers

Step 3: Add LSUs 1 Enter information about the LSU (see Figure 47).
• Storage Server - Select the storage server that will contain the
new LSU.
• Use Available Capacity - Select this option to add an LSU that
uses the available capacity on the system.
You cannot add an available capacity LSU to a storage server
that already contains an LSU. Also, if you add an available
capacity LSU to a storage server, you cannot add additional LSUs
to that same storage server.

Note: After you add an LSU that uses the Available Capacity
option, you cannot change the LSU to use the Specific
Capacity option. Instead, you must delete the LSU,
then add a new LSU and choose the Specific Capacity
option (see Deleting an LSU on page 286).

• Specify Capacity - Select this option to specify the physical

capacity of the LSU, and then enter the following information.
• LSU Name - Enter the name of the LSU.
• Physical Capacity - Enter the physical capacity of the LSU (1
to 1048576 GB).

82 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
OST Wizard

2 Click Add.
The LSU displays in the LSUs Added table.
3 (Optional) To add additional LSUs, repeat Steps 1–2.
To remove an LSU, select it in the LSUs Added table and click
Delete.
4 Click Next to continue.

Note: To configure the LSU for Automatic Image Replication, use the
Configuration > OST > LSU page (see LSU on page 280).

Figure 47 OST Wizard: Add

LSUs

Step 4: Add Users 1 Enter information about the authenticated user (see Figure 48):
• Username - Enter the name of the authenticated user.
• Password - Enter the password for the authenticated user.
• Confirm Password - Enter the password again to confirm it.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the
authenticated user.
2 Click Apply.
The user displays in the Users Added table.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 83

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
OST Wizard

3 (Optional) To add additional users, click Add and then repeat Steps
1–2.
To remove a user, select it in the Users Added table and click
Delete.
4 Click Next to continue.

Figure 48 OST Wizard: Add

Users

Step 5: Confirm 1 Review the settings you selected to make sure they are correct (see
Figure 49). The items to be added display in the Storage Servers
Added, LSUs Added, and Users Added tables. If necessary, click
Previous to return to a previous step to make changes.
2 To make changes to storage servers, LSUs, or users you added, click
Previous to return to the appropriate step. Select the incorrect item
and click Delete to remove it, and then add a new item.
3 After you have confirmed all settings, click Finish. The wizard
configures the DXi6902 with the settings you selected.

84 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
OST Wizard

Figure 49 OST Wizard:

Confirm

Step 6: Download OST To download the OST Plug-in, click Client Plug-in Download (see
Client Plug-In Figure 50). On the download page, download the correct OST Plug-in
for your backup application and operating system.
Also on the download page, click Installation Instructions, to
download the OST Plug-in Installation Instructions. Follow the
instructions to install the OST Plug-in on your media server.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 85

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Replication Wizard

Figure 50 OST Wizard:

Download OST Client Plug-in

Replication Wizard
The Replication wizard provides guided assistance for configuring the
DXi6902 to send replicated data to another DXi system as part of
disaster recovery plan. The wizard can also help you configure the
DXi6902 to receive replicated data from another DXi system.
Sources send replicated data, and targets receive replicated data. A
target system can receive data from up to 10 sources. However, a source
system can send data to only a single target. Finally, one system can act
as both a source and a target.

Note: For more information about working with data replication, see
DXi6902 Replication on page 119.

Note: Use the Replication wizard (or the Configuration >

Replication page) to configure other DXi systems that this
DXi6902 is configured to send replicated data to or receive
replicated data from. You should configure a target system
before configuring source systems.

86 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Replication Wizard

To begin the Replication wizard, on the Wizards menu, click

Replication.

Step 1: About 1 Read the information about the wizard (see Figure 51).
2 Click Next to continue.

Note: At any time while using the wizard, you can click Previous to
return to the previous step.

Figure 51 Replication Wizard:

About

Step 2: System 1 If data on this DXi6902 will be replicated to another DXi system,
enter target information under Target DXis (see Figure 52). You can
specify up to two targets:

Note: If two targets are already specified, you must delete a

target before adding another. First click Pause to pause
replication to the target, and then click Delete to remove
the target.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 87

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Replication Wizard

Note: Before specifying a target, make sure you have completed

the Replication wizard on the target DXi. The target DXi
must be configured to allow the source DXi hostname or IP
address.

a In the Target Hostname or IP Address box, enter the hostname

or IP address of the system that will receive the replicated data.

Note: When entering IP addresses, never use an address that

is in a reserved IP address range. To see a list of
reserved IP address ranges, click the quick tip icon [?]
located near the IP address field.

Note: To use hostname format, you must specify at least one

DNS IP address on the Network page (see Network on
page 315).

b (Optional) Select an encryption option:

• NONE - Data is not encrypted when sending replication
data to the target system.
• AES 128-BIT - Data is encrypted using AES 128-bit
encryption when sending replication data to the target
system.
• AES 256 BIT - Data is encrypted using AES 256-bit
encryption when sending replication data to the target
system.

Caution: Select 128-bit encryption if you are sending data to

a DXi running a system software version prior to
DXi 2.1 Software.

Note: AES encryption options are available only if the Data-

in-Flight license is installed (see License Keys on
page 393).

c In the Source IP Address field, enter the IP address that is used

to uniquely identify the source DXi to the target. This may be
different than the actual network IP address of the source DXi.

88 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Replication Wizard

If the target system is at DXi 2.1 Software or higher, this field is

not required. If the target system is at DXi 2.0.1.x Software or
below, then you must enter the IP address by which the target
system recognizes the source system. The default value is
0.0.0.0.
2 If data on other DXi systems will be replicated to this DXi6902, enter
the following information under Source DXis:
a In the Source Hostnames or IP Addresses box, enter the
hostname or IP address of the system that will send the
replicated data to the DXi6902.
You can specify up to 10 replication sources. To enter multiple
sources, press <Enter> after each entry.
b In the Maximum Snapshots Per Share or Partition drop-down
box, select the number of snapshots to retain for each
replicated share or partition (up to 32).
During scheduled or manual data replication, the DXi6902
receives a snapshot from the source system. A snapshot
contains all of the data necessary to fully recover or failback a
NAS share or VTL partition to the point in time when the
snapshot was saved.
3 Click Next to continue.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 89

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Replication Wizard

Figure 52 Replication Wizard:

System

Step 3: NAS Shares 1 Select a NAS share in the Replication Settings for NAS Shares
section to manage its replication settings (see Figure 53).

Note: For help adding NAS shares to the system, use the NAS
Configuration Wizard (see NAS Wizard on page 63).

2 To configure the share to replicate its data to another DXi system,

enter the following information under Send:
a Select the Enable replication for selected share check box to
enable replication for the share.
b (Optional) Select the Enable Directory/File based replication
to target check box to enable Directory/File Based Replication
for the share, and then enter a Sync ID in the box.
With Directory/File Based Replication, a file is automatically
replicated when it is closed or a period of time after it is

90 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Replication Wizard

modified. After replication, the replicated files are immediately

available on the target system.
The Sync ID is used to identify the target share that will receive
replicated data from the source share. The Sync ID must be
identical to the Sync ID of the target share on the target system.
c Select the check box for each replication target you want to
replicate the share to. When the share is replicated, its data will
be sent to all selected targets.
3 To configure the share to receive replicated data from another DXi
system, enter the following information under Receive:
a (Optional) Select the Enable Directory/File based replication
to this DXi check box to enable Directory/File Based Replication
for the share, and then enter a Sync ID in the box.
The Sync ID is used to identify the source share that will send
replicated data to the target share. The Sync ID must be
identical to the Sync ID of the source share on the source
system.
b If you enabled Directory/File Based Replication, select an Access
option:
• Locked - The share is not allowed to receive new Directory/
File Based Replication data.
• Unlocked - The share is allowed to receive new Directory/
File Based Replication data.

Note: You cannot configure a share to both send and receive

Directory/File Based Replication data.

4 Click Apply.
5 (Optional) To configure additional shares for replication, repeat
Steps 1–4.
6 Click Next to continue.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 91

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Replication Wizard

Figure 53 Replication Wizard:

NAS Shares

Step 4: VTL Partition 1 Select a VTL partition in the Replication Settings for VTL Partitions
section to manage its replication settings (see Figure 54).

Note: For help adding VTL partitions to the system, use the VTL
Configuration Wizard (see VTL Wizard on page 70).

2 To configure the partition to replicate its data to another DXi

system, enter the following information under Send:
a Select the Enable replication for selected partition check box
to enable replication for the partition.
b (Optional) Select the Enable Cartridge based replication to
target check box to enable Cartridge Based Replication for the
partition, and then enter a Sync ID in the box.
With Cartridge Based Replication, a cartridge is automatically
replicated when it is unmounted. After replication, the
replicated cartridges are immediately available on the target
system.
The Sync ID is used to identify the target partition that will
receive replicated data from the source partition. The Sync ID

92 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Replication Wizard

must be identical to the Sync ID of the target partition on the

target system.
c Select the check box for each replication target you want to
replicate the partition to. When the partition is replicated, its
data will be sent to all selected targets.
3 To configure the partition to receive replicated data from another
DXi system, enter the following information under Receive:
a (Optional) Select the Enable Cartridge based replication to
this DXi check box to enable Cartridge Based Replication for the
partition, and then enter a Sync ID in the box.
The Sync ID is used to identify the source partition that will send
replicated data to the target partition. The Sync ID must be
identical to the Sync ID of the source partition on the source
system.
b If you enabled Cartridge Based Replication, select an Access
option:
• Locked - The partition is not allowed to receive new
Cartridge Based Replication data.
• Unlocked - The partition is allowed to receive new Cartridge
Based Replication data.

Note: You cannot configure a partition to both send and receive

Cartridge Based Replication data.

4 Click Apply.
5 (Optional) To configure additional partitions for replication, repeat
Steps 1–4.
6 Click Next to continue.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 93

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Replication Wizard

Figure 54 Replication Wizard:

VTL Partitions

Step 5: Confirm 1 Review the settings you selected to make sure they are correct. If
necessary, click Previous to return to a previous step to make
changes (see Figure 55).
2 After you have confirmed all settings, click Finish. The wizard
configures the DXi6902 with the settings you selected.

94 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Email Alerts Wizard

Figure 55 Replication Wizard:

Confirm

Email Alerts Wizard

The Email Alerts wizard provides guided assistance for configuring the
DXi6902 to automatically send notifications and reports to selected
recipients. The wizard helps you configure an outgoing e-mail server.
Then the wizard guides you through the process of specifying e-mail
recipients and selecting the notifications and reports to send to the
recipients.

Note: For more information about sending e-mail alerts, see Email on
page 352.

To begin the Email Alerts wizard, on the Wizards menu, click Email
Alerts.

Step 1: About 1 Read the information about the wizard (see Figure 56).
2 Click Next to continue.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 95

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Email Alerts Wizard

Note: At any time while using the wizard, you can click Previous to
return to the previous step.

Figure 56 Email Alerts Wizard:

About

Step 2: Server 1 In the Hostname or IP Address box, enter the hostname or IP

address of the outgoing e-mail server (see Figure 57).

Note: When entering IP addresses, never use an address that is in

a reserved IP address range. To see a list of reserved IP
address ranges, click the quick tip icon [?] located near the
IP address field.

Note: To use hostname format, you must specify at least one DNS
IP address on the Network page (see Network on
page 315).

2 In the From Email Address box, enter the return e-mail address
displayed in e-mails sent by the DXi6902.
Specify a return address that lets you easily identify the system that
generated the e-mail (for example, systemname@any-
domain.com). The return address must contain an @ symbol and a
valid domain name, including a period.

96 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Email Alerts Wizard

3 (Optional) Select the Enable Admin Alerts about Email Server not
configured check box to have system generate administration alerts
to notify you if an e-mail server is not configured.
4 (Recommended) Select the Enable automatic emails to Quantum
check box to periodically send system configuration and status
information to Quantum, including any software upgrades you have
installed using the Software Upgrade Utility. Quantum Support
can use this information to provide a better support experience in
the future.

Note: Automatic e-mails contain configuration and status

information only, and do not contain any customer data
stored on the system.

5 Click Next to continue.

Figure 57 Email Alerts Wizard:

Server

Step 3: Recipients 1 Click Add to add an e-mail recipient.

2 Under Add Email Recipient, enter information about the recipient
(see Figure 58):
• Name - The name of the recipient.
• Email Address - The e-mail address of the recipient.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 97

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Email Alerts Wizard

• Notification Type - Select the types of notifications to send to

the recipient:
• High - Send e-mail notifications for High service tickets.
High service tickets indicate that a critical problem has
occurred and needs to be resolved immediately. The
operation and performance of the DXi6902 are degraded,
and there is a risk of system failure or data loss.
• High and Medium - Send e-mail notifications for High and
Medium service tickets.
Medium service tickets indicate that a serious problem
occurred and needs to be resolved, but it does not
necessarily need to be fixed immediately. The operation and
performance of the DXi6902 may be degraded.
• All - Send e-mail notifications for High, Middle, and Low
service tickets, as well as any administration alerts.
Low service tickets indicate that a minor problem occurred
and needs to be resolved, but the operation and
performance of the DXi6902 are not significantly affected.
3 Select the Notification Enabled check box to enable sending of
notifications to the recipient.
4 Click Add.
The recipient displays in the Email Recipient list.
5 (Optional) To add additional recipients, click Add and then repeat
Steps 1–4.
To change a recipient, select it in the Email Recipient list and click
Edit. To remove a recipient, select it in the Email Recipient list and
click Delete.
6 Click Next to continue.

98 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Email Alerts Wizard

Figure 58 Email Alerts Wizard:

Recipients

Step 4: Confirm 1 Review the settings you selected to make sure they are correct. If
necessary, click Previous to return to a previous step to make
changes (see Figure 59).
2 To make changes to an e-mail recipient you added, click Previous to
return to the appropriate step. Select the incorrect item and click
Delete to remove it, and then add a new item.
3 After you have confirmed all settings, click Finish. The wizard
configures the DXi6902 with the settings you selected.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 99

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Support Wizard

Figure 59 Email Alerts Wizard:

Confirm

Support Wizard
The Support wizard provides guided assistance to help you enable
licensed features on the DXi6902 and register your system with
Quantum. The wizard also guides you through other tasks that will aid
Quantum customer support in assisting you, such as downloading
StorageCare Guardian and creating a system log.
To begin the Support wizard, on the Wizards menu, click Support.

Step 1: About 1 Read the information about the wizard (see Figure 60).
2 Click Next to continue.

100 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Support Wizard

Note: At any time while using the wizard, you can click Previous to
return to the previous step.

Figure 60 Support Wizard:

About

Step 2: Registration You must register your DXi6902 to receive service and support from
Quantum.
1 Click the link for Quantum’s Product Registration site (see
Figure 61).
2 Follow the onscreen instructions to register your system.
3 When you are finished, switch back to the Support wizard.
4 Click Next to continue.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 101

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Support Wizard

Figure 61 Support Wizard:

Registration

Step 3: Guardian StorageCare Guardian is a remote monitoring and diagnostic solution

that enables Quantum to monitor the health of Quantum systems over
the Internet and use the intelligent diagnostics data to remotely service
the equipment if issues arise.
StorageCare Guardian delivers more reliable operation and faster
resolution time for customers at no additional cost for supported
products under warranty or service contract.
1 Click the link to learn more about the features and benefits of
StorageCare Guardian (see Figure 62).
2 Click the link to download StorageCare Guardian, and then install it
on a workstation with outgoing Internet access.
For more information, see the StorageCare Guardian Installation
Guide. You can download a copy of the Installation Guide by
clicking the link under Documentation on the StorageCare
Guardian download page.
3 When you are finished, switch back to the Support wizard.
4 Click Next to continue.

102 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Support Wizard

Figure 62 Support Wizard:

Guardian

Step 4: System Log This system diagnostics file contains the diagnostic logs for all of the
system components. The diagnostic files are helpful when
troubleshooting problems on the DXi6902. You should generate a
system diagnostic file after setting up your DXi6902 and save it for
future reference.
1 Click Generate New to generate a new system diagnostics file (see
Figure 63).
The system generates a new diagnostics file. This can take several
minutes.
2 After the file finishes generating, click the link to enable the
Download Current button.
3 To download the generated diagnostics file, click Download
Current.
A dialog box displays asking if you want to open or save the file.
4 Click Save or OK to download the file.
5 Click Next to continue.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 103

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Support Wizard

Figure 63 Support Wizard:

System Log

Step 5: Licensed Add a license key to enable new functionality on the DXi6902. To install
Features a license key, you must first obtain a License Certificate containing an
authorization code.
Contact your Quantum sales representative to purchase a license. After
you purchase the license, you will receive a License Certificate
containing an authorization code.

Note: Some licenses are pre-installed on the DXi6902. In addition,

License Certificates for some licenses may be included with the
DXi6902. For more information about licensed features, see
License Keys on page 393.

1 Select the DXi system serial number (displayed under Enable

Licensed Features) and press <Ctrl+C> to copy it (see Figure 64).
2 Click the link for Quantum’s License Key Management site.
The License Key Management page displays.
3 Click to place the cursor in the Serial Number box and press
<Ctrl+V> to paste the DXi system serial number.
4 Click Submit.
The Licensed Feature page displays.

104 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Support Wizard

5 Enter the authorization code (printed on the License Certificate) and

click Get License Key.
The Licensed Feature page returns a license key. Select the license
key and press <Ctrl+C> to copy it. You should also print out or
write down the license key, or save it to a text file, for future use.
6 Switch back to the Support wizard.
7 Enter the license key in the New Key box, and then click Add.
The license key is added to the system, and the new feature is
enabled.
8 (Optional) To add additional license keys, repeat Steps 1–7.
9 Click Finish to complete the Support wizard.

Figure 64 Support Wizard:

Licensed Features

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 105

Chapter 4: DXi6902 Configuration Wizards
Support Wizard

106 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 5
DXi6902 Home Page

The first page that displays after you log on to the DXi6902 remote
management console is the Home page (see Figure 65). Use the Home
page to see important performance information at a glance, including
disk usage, data reduction statistics, and replication activity.
To return to the Home page at any time, click Home on the main menu.
The Home page contains the following overviews:
• DXi6902 System Overview
• Disk Usage Overview
• Data Reduction Statistics Overview
• Replication Overview
• Current Activity Overview

Note: Disk usage statistics, data reduction statistics, replication

statistics, and current activity are updated every 30 seconds.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 107

Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
DXi6902 System Overview

Figure 65 Home Page

DXi6902 System Overview

The DXi6902 System Overview on the Home page (see Figure 66)
displays the following information about the system:
• Hostname - The hostname of the DXi6902. Click to change the
hostname (see Network on page 315).
• IP Address - The IP address of the DXi6902. Click to change the IP
address (see Network on page 315).
• Version - The software version installed on the DXi6902. A Quick Tip
icon indicates if a software upgrade is available for the DXi6902.
Click to upgrade the software (see Software Upgrades on
page 401).

108 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
Disk Usage Overview

• Serial Number - The serial number of the DXi6902. (You need to

know the serial number to add a licensed feature. For more
information, see License Keys on page 393.)
• Data-at-Rest Encryption - The status of Data-at-Rest encryption
(Enabled or Disabled). (To enable Data-at-Rest encryption, see
Data-at-Rest Encryption on page 343).
• Software Upgrade - Click to displays the Software Upgrade Utility
(see Software Upgrades on page 401).

Figure 66 DXi6902 System

Overview

Disk Usage Overview

The Disk Usage overview on the Home page (see Figure 67) displays the
following information about disk usage as an amount and as a
percentage of the total capacity in the system:
• Disk Capacity - The total usable disk capacity of the DXi6902.
• Available Disk Space - The disk space available for data storage
(free space).
On the disk space meter, blue (left side of meter) indicates used disk
space and gray (right side of meter) indicates available disk space.
The left side of the meter changes color based on the amount of
remaining free disk space and the state of the DXi6902. For more
information, see Low Space Management on page 56.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 109

Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
Disk Usage Overview

Note: When disk space is low, click the Quick Warning icon [!]
next to the space meter to see more information.

Note: When disk space is low, target replication to the system is

paused (see Replication Service on page 167). In addition,
space reclamation is automatically started to free up disk
space (see Space Reclamation on page 389).

Note: For optimal system performance, Quantum recommends

keeping the amount of Available Disk Space (free space)
at 20% or more.

Click Show More to display additional information:

• Free Space - The disk space that can be used for new deduplicated
or non-deduplicated data.
• Reclaimable Space - The disk space that is occupied by outdated
deduplicated data and which will be automatically reused if
additional space for new deduplicated data is needed.
• Used Disk Space - The disk space that already holds data, including
deduplicated data, system metadata, and data not intended for
deduplication.
• Deduplicated Data - The amount of data that has been
deduplicated.
• Data Not Intended for Deduplication - The amount of data on
shares or partitions that do not have deduplication enabled.
• System Metadata - The amount of disk space used for internal
operations of the DXi, including system configuration files as well as
temporary files created during replication, space reclamation, and
healthchecks.
Click an item to view detailed statistics for disk usage (see Disk Usage on
page 186).

110 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
Data Reduction Statistics Overview

Figure 67 Disk Usage Overview

Data Reduction Statistics Overview

The Data Reduction Statistics overview on the Home page (see
Figure 68) displays the following information about the results of data
reduction:
• Data Size Before Reduction - The original, native size of all data
that has been processed by the data deduplication and compression
engines.
• Data Size After Reduction - The final, reduced size of all data that
has been processed by the data deduplication and compression
engines.
• Total Reduction Ratio - The total reduction ratio of all data that has
been processed by the data deduplication and compression engines
(Data Size Before Reduction divided by Data Size After
Reduction).
Click Show More to display additional information:
• Incoming Replication - The amount of data stored on the DXi via
replication from another DXi. This does not include incoming data
from Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication, or incoming data
from Failback replication.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 111

Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
Replication Overview

• Shares & Partitions - The amount of data stored on the DXi via
local I/O. This includes incoming data from Directory/File or
Cartridge Based Replication, and incoming data from Failback
replication.
• OST Storage Servers - The amount of data stored in deduplicated
OpenStorage (OST) storage servers. This includes incoming data for
OST and DXi Accent.
• Deduplication Ratio - The deduplication ratio of all data that has
been processed by the data deduplication engine.
• Compression Ratio - The compression ratio of all data that has
been processed by the compression engine.
Click an item to view detailed statistics for disk usage (see Disk Usage on
page 186).

Figure 68 Data Reduction

Statistics Overview

Replication Overview
The Replication overview on the Home page (see Figure 69) displays
the following information about target and source replication activity:
• Send Settings & Cumulative Statistics
• Receive Settings & Cumulative Statistics

112 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
Replication Overview

Send Settings & The Send Settings & Cumulative Statistics section displays statistics
Cumulative Statistics for all data sent from the system since system installation or since Send
cumulative replication statistics were last cleared by clicking Clear Send
on the Replication Actions page (see Replication Performance on
page 169).
• Target DXis - The IP address and replication status for each
configured replication target (up to two). Click to specify a
replication target (see Replication Configuration on page 256).
• Ready - (Green) The system is ready to perform replication.
• In Progress - (Blue) A replication job is currently in progress.
• Queued - (Blue) A replication job is queued and will continue
when the system is ready.
• Partial - (Yellow) A replication job was partially completed.
Generate a replication report to see the files that were not
replicated (see Reports on page 169).
• Manually Paused - (Yellow) Replication was manually paused.
To resume replication, click Resume.
• System Paused - (Yellow) The system has automatically paused
replication due to a problem, for example, low disk space or a
problem on the target system.
To see more information about the problem that occurred, click
Admin at the top of the remote management console to view
administration alerts (see Admin Alerts on page 199). You may
also need to view alerts on the target DXi. In addition, make
sure that the DXi is an allowed replication source on the target
DXi (see Replication Configuration on page 256).
• Failed - (Red) A replication job was not completed.
• Internal Error - (Red) An error occurred during replication.
• Pause/Resume - The source DXi controls the replication pause
behavior. To manually pause replication between the source and
target, click Pause on the source DXi. To manually restart
replication, click Resume on the source DXi.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 113

Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
Replication Overview

Note: When the target DXi enters low disk space condition,
replication on the source DXi is automatically paused.
Replication will resume when the target leaves low disk
space condition.

• Original Data Size - The original, native size of data sent during
replication or failback. This value does not represent the amount of
data actually sent over the network during replication or failback
because data is deduplicated and compressed before being sent.
• Actual Data Sent - The amount of data actually sent over the
network during replication or failback. This value is usually much
less than the Original Data Size due to the benefits of data
deduplication and compression.
• Average Send Rate - The average send rate (in MB/s) of data sent
over the network during replication or failback (Actual Data Sent
divided by the amount of time required to complete replication or
failback).

Receive Settings & The Receive Settings & Cumulative Statistics section displays statistics
Cumulative Statistics for all data received by the system from all sources since system
installation or since Receive cumulative replication statistics were last
cleared by clicking Clear Receive on the Replication Actions page (see
Replication Performance on page 169).
• Source DXis - The number of source systems configured to replicate
data to the DXi6902. Click to specify replication sources (see
Replication Configuration on page 256).
• Actual Data Received - The amount of data actually received over
the network during replication or failback.
• Average Receive Rate - The average receive rate (in MB/s) of data
received over the network during replication or failback (Actual
Data Received divided by the amount of time required to complete
replication or failback).

114 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
Current Activity Overview

Figure 69 Replication
Overview

Current Activity Overview

The Current Activity overview on the Home page (see Figure 70)
displays the following information about system activity that occurred
in the previous minute:
• Inline - The inline data flow throughput (in MB/s). Inline data flow
includes deduplicated and non-deduplicated backup data as well as
received OST data. Click to view detailed statistics for inline
performance (see Inline on page 180).
• Replication Throttle - The system replication throttle currently in
effect (in KB/s or MB/s). When a constant throttle is enabled, the DXi
limits the amount of data it sends during source replication so that
it does not exceed the specified bandwidth. Click to enable or
disable system throttling (see Replication Configuration on
page 256).
• Ethernet - The amount of data received (In) and sent (Out) by all
Ethernet ports (in MB/s). Click to view details statistics for Ethernet
performance (see Ethernet on page 181).
• Fibre Channel - The amount of data received (In) and sent (Out) by
all Ethernet ports (in MB/s). Click to view details statistics for Fibre
Channel performance (see Fibre Channel on page 184).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 115

Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
Current Activity Overview

• OST Service - The status of the OST service. OST settings can be
configured in Ready, Stopped, or Verifying state. The OST server is
available for backup only in Ready state.
• Inline (OpDup) - The inline data flow throughput (in MB/s).
Inline data flow represents the original, native size of the data
protected by the DXi.
• Ethernet In (OpDup) - The amount of data received by all
Ethernet ports (in MB/s). This amount represents the reduced
size of the data protected by the DXi (after deduplication and
compression on the media servers).
• OpDup Bandwidth Reduction - The percentage by which
network bandwidth utilization was reduced by using Optimized
Duplication.
• Inline (Accent) - The inline data flow throughput (in MB/s).
Inline data flow represents the original, native size of the data
protected by the DXi.
• Ethernet In (Accent) - The amount of data received by all
Ethernet ports (in MB/s). This amount represents the reduced
size of the data protected by the DXi (after deduplication and
compression on the media servers).
• Accent Bandwidth Reduction - The percentage by which
network bandwidth utilization was reduced by enabling Accent.
• Space Reclamation - The status of space reclamation (Not running
or Percent complete). Click to start or stop space reclamation (see
Space Reclamation on page 389).
• Compaction - The status of space reclamation (Not running or
Running). Click to start or stop compaction (see Space Reclamation
on page 389).
• Healthchecks - The status of healthchecks (Not running or Percent
complete). Click to start or stop space healthchecks (see
Healthchecks on page 382).
To view or modify scheduled system activity, click Current Schedules
(see Scheduler on page 304).

Note: For more detailed information about all system activity, see
DXi6902 Status on page 171.

116 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
Current Activity Overview

Note: DXi Accent activity displays only if DXi Accent is currently

enabled or was previously enabled (see DXi Accent on
page 296).

Figure 70 Current Activity

Overview

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 117

Chapter 5: DXi6902 Home Page
Current Activity Overview

118 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6
DXi6902 Replication

The DXi6902 provides data replication capabilities that you can use as
an integral part of a disaster recovery plan. Replication allows you to
configure the DXi6902 to create a copy of your data on another DXi
system at scheduled intervals (or manually as needed).
In the event of a disaster in which the original data is lost, you can
quickly recover the replicated data on the remote system, allowing your
business to resume normal operations. Once the original system is
available again, you can restore all data back to its original location.

Note: Quantum recommends that you configure and start replication

before storing large amounts of data on the DXi6902.

See the following sections for more information about the data
replication capabilities of the DXi6902:
• Understanding Data Replication
• Performing Data Replication

Note: To schedule replication for a share or partition, use the

Configuration > Scheduler page (see Scheduling a Share or
Partition for Replication on page 309). To limit the amount of
network bandwidth used for replication, enable a constant
throttle (see Enabling System Throttling on page 263), or
schedule replication throttling (see Scheduling Replication
Throttling on page 310).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 119

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Understanding Data Replication

Understanding Data Replication

During data replication, data is sent from one system (the source) to
another system, usually in another location (the target). For example,
you might replicate data from a branch office (the source) to a central
office (the target).
Sources send replicated data, and targets receive replicated data. A
target system can receive data from up to ten sources. A source system
can send data to up to two targets. Finally, one system can act as both a
source and a target.
Replication works only with deduplicated data, and data is compressed
before it is replicated. Because of this, the amount of data transmitted
between systems during replication is greatly reduced compared to the
original amount of data stored. In addition, a data block is transmitted
only if the target does not already have a copy of the block. Finally, data
can optionally be encrypted before it is transmitted.
The DXi6902 can perform the following types of replication:
• Replication
• Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication
• OST Optimized Duplication
• Multiple Target Replication

Replication Replication occurs when replication is enabled for a deduplicated NAS

share or VTL partition and a replication schedule is configured (or
manual replication is performed on a regular basis). For replication to
occur, the source system must be configured to point to the target
system. Similarly, the target system must be configured to accept data
from the source system.
To optimize the replication process, deduplicated data is continuously
sent in the background from the source system to the target system.
However, a snapshot that preserves the file structure of your data is sent
to the target system only when a scheduled or manual replication job
occurs. A snapshot contains all of the information that is necessary to
recreate a share or partition just as it was at the point in time when the
snapshot was created.

120 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Understanding Data Replication

Caution: A saved snapshot is necessary to recover your data at a

later time. For this reason, it is not enough to simply enable
replication for a share or partition. You must also configure
a replication schedule (recommended) or perform manual
replication on a regular basis to send snapshots of the
share or partition to the target system.

If the source system ever becomes unavailable, you can recover the
share or partition on the target system using a saved snapshot. After
you recover a share or partition, it is recreated on the target system and
is available for use. Once the source system becomes available again,
you can perform a failback operation to restore the share or partition to
its original location.

Directory/File or Like replication, Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication sends data

Cartridge Based from a NAS share or VTL partition to another system where it can be
Replication accessed. However, Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication differs
in a number of important ways:
• Both replication and Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication
must be enabled for the share or partition.
• A unique Sync ID is used to associate the replicated share or
partition on the source system with the share or partition that will
receive the replicated data on the target system.
• You do not need to schedule or manually perform Directory/File or
Cartridge Based Replication through the remote management
console. Instead, replication is triggered when a file is closed or a
period of time after it is modified (NAS shares), or when a tape
cartridge is unmounted (VTL partitions).

Note: For CIFS shares, a file is replicated immediately after it is

closed. For NFS shares, a file is replicated after it has been
idle (not accessed) for several minutes.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 121

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Understanding Data Replication

Note: To optimize the replication process, deduplicated data is

continuously sent in the background from the source
system to the target system. Any remaining data is sent
(along with metadata) at the time a file is closed or a tape
cartridge is unmounted.

• After files or cartridges are replicated using Directory/File or

Cartridge Based Replication, they are automatically recovered on the
target system and are immediately available for use. There is no
need to first recover the share or partition to access its data.
• Deletions are automatically propagated from the source system to
the target system in order to free up space on the target. In
addition, you can manually initiate a synchronization from the
source system at any time. Synchronizing ensures that the contents
of the source share or partition are exactly the same as the target
share or partition.

Caution: Cartridge barcodes for all source systems that are

replicating to the same target must be unique.

Note: If you delete a share configured for Directory/File Based

Replication on the source DXi, the share is not automatically
deleted on the target DXi. If you do not want to retain the
share on the target DXi, you can manually delete it.

OST Optimized The DXi6902 can duplicate the data on an LSU (logical storage unit) to
Duplication another location using the OST optimized duplication (OST replication)
feature supported by Symantec NetBackup and Backup Exec. If you are
using Symantec NetBackup 7.1 or higher, you can configure an LSU for
Automatic Image Replication.
For information about configuring and using OST optimized duplication
and Automatic Image Replication, see Replicating OST Data on
page 268.

122 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Performing Data Replication

Multiple Target The DXi6902 can send replicated data to multiple target systems. First,
Replication configure up to two replication targets (see Adding a Replication Target
on page 259). Then, for each share or partition, select which targets to
replicate data to—one, both, or neither (see Enabling Replication For a
Share or Partition on page 132).
Below are two possible scenarios in which multiple replication targets
are configured.

All Shares or Partitions Replicate to Multiple Targets

For enhanced disaster recovery, all shares or partitions on the DXi6902
are configured to replicate to multiple targets. In this scenario, even if
one target system is lost, the other target system still retains a full copy
of all data on the source DXi6902.

Some Shares or Partitions Replicate to Multiple Targets

For increased flexibility, each share or partition on the DXi6902 is
configured to replicate only to the targets where needed. In this
scenario, shares or partitions fall into three categories:
• Some shares or partitions replicate to Target 1. (They may also
replicate to Target 2.)
• Some shares or partitions replicate to Target 2. (They may also
replicate to Target 1.)
• Some shares or partitions are not replicated.

Performing Data Replication

The Replication page allows you to set up replication for NAS shares or
VTL partitions and to replicate and recover data.
To access the Replication page, click the Replication menu.
The Replication page contains the following tabs:
• Replication Send

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 123

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Performing Data Replication

• Receive NAS
• Receive VTL
• Actions
• Reports
Use the DXi6902 data replication features to perform the following
tasks:
• Replicate all data on a share or partition to another system where it
can be recovered at a later time (see Task Overview: Setting Up and
Performing Replication on page 124).
• Automatically replicate files or cartridges to another system where
they are immediately available (see Task Overview: Setting Up and
Performing Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication on
page 126).
• Recover data from a lost or damaged share or partition (see Task
Overview: Recovering a Replicated Share or Partition on page 127).
• Restore a lost or damaged share or partition back to its original
location (see Task Overview: Performing a Share or Partition Failback
on page 127).

Note: The Replication wizard provides guided assistance for

configuring data replication (see DXi6902 Configuration
Wizards on page 61).

Task Overview: Setting To replicate all data on a NAS share or VTL partition from a source
Up and Performing system to a target system:
Replication 1 On the target system, add the source system to the list of allowed
replication sources (see Adding a Replication Source on page 265).
2 On the source system, specify the target system that will receive
replicated data (see Adding a Replication Target on page 259).
3 On the source system, create a new share or partition with
deduplication enabled (see Adding a NAS Share on page 213 or
Adding a VTL Partition on page 230).
4 Enable replication for the new share or partition (see Enabling
Replication For a Share or Partition on page 132).

124 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Performing Data Replication

5 Before writing any data to the new share or partition, replicate the
new share or partition (see Replicating a Share or Partition on
page 136
Quantum recommends that you always replicate a new share or
partition immediately after creating it. This establishes the initial
data structure on the target system and greatly increases the speed
of the first replication.
6 Choose one of the following methods to regularly replicate the new
share or partition:
• (Recommended) Use the Scheduler page to set up a schedule
for performing replication automatically after backups complete
(see Scheduling a Share or Partition for Replication on
page 309).
• Manually perform replication at frequent intervals (see
Replicating a Share or Partition on page 136).
After replication, a snapshot is sent to the target system. You can use
the snapshot to recover the replicated share or partition on the target
system (see Task Overview: Recovering a Replicated Share or Partition on
page 127) or restore the share or partition to its original location on the
source system (see Task Overview: Performing a Share or Partition
Failback on page 127).

Caution: If you do not configure a replication schedule or manually

replicate the share or partition on a regular basis, your data
is not protected. While the DXi6902 continually sends data
to the target system in the background to optimize the
replication process, a snapshot that preserves the complete
structure of your data is sent to the target system only
when a scheduled or manual replication job occurs. If you
do not regularly and frequently replicate your data as
described in Step 6 above, it cannot be restored at a later
time.

Note: To limit the amount of network bandwidth used for replication,

enable a constant throttle (see Enabling System Throttling on
page 263), or schedule replication throttling (see Scheduling
Replication Throttling on page 310).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 125

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Performing Data Replication

Task Overview: Setting To automatically replicate files or cartridges from a source system and
Up and Performing immediately recover them for use on a target system:
Directory/File or 1 Perform the following steps on the target system:
Cartridge Based
Replication a Add the source system to the list of allowed replication sources
(see Adding a Replication Source on page 265).
b Create a new share or partition with deduplication enabled (see
Adding a NAS Share on page 213 or Adding a VTL Partition on
page 230).
c Enable Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication for the new
share or partition and specify the Sync ID (see Configuring a
Target Share for Directory/File Based Replication on page 150 or
Configuring a Target Partition for Cartridge Based Replication on
page 164).
2 Perform the following steps on the source system:
a Specify the target system that will receive replicated data (see
Adding a Replication Target on page 259).
b Create a new share or partition with deduplication enabled (see
Adding a NAS Share on page 213 or Adding a VTL Partition on
page 230).
c Enable Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication for the new
share or partition and specify the Sync ID (see Configuring
Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication on page 133
A file is automatically replicated when it is closed or a period of time
after it is modified. A cartridge is automatically replicated after it is
unmounted. After replication, the replicated files or cartridges are
immediately available on the target system. There is no need to recover
the share or partition to make the files or cartridges available.

Caution: Cartridge barcodes for all source systems that are

replicating to the same target must be unique.

Note: To limit the amount of network bandwidth used for replication,

enable a constant throttle (see Enabling System Throttling on
page 263), or schedule replication throttling (see Scheduling
Replication Throttling on page 310).

126 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Performing Data Replication

Task Overview: If a NAS share or VTL partition is lost or damaged on the source system,
Recovering a Replicated you can recover it on the target system using a received snapshot. When
Share or Partition you recover a share or partition, it is recreated on the target system just
as it was at the point in time when the snapshot was saved.
To recover a replicated share or partition:
1 On the target system, select a received snapshot and perform a
recover operation (see Recovering a Share on page 142 or
Recovering a Partition on page 155).
The share or partition is now available on the target system.
2 (Optional) Map your backup application to the recovered share or
partition on the target system to continue making backups.
3 When the source system is operating correctly again, choose one of
the following actions:
• Failback the share or partition to restore it on the original source
system (see Task Overview: Performing a Share or Partition
Failback on page 127). Then, if necessary, map your backup
application to the restored share or partition on the original
source system.
• Continue to make backups to the recovered share or partition
on the original target system. In addition, set up replication to
replicate the share or partition back to the original source
system (see Task Overview: Setting Up and Performing
Replication on page 124). In this scenario, the original source
system is now the target, and the original target system is now
the source.

Task Overview: If a NAS share or VTL partition is lost or damaged on the source system,
Performing a Share or you can failback the share or partition to the source system using a
Partition Failback received snapshot on the target system. When you failback a share or
partition, it is restored on the source system just as it was at the point in
time when the snapshot was saved.
To perform a share or partition failback:
1 On the original source system, add the original target system to the
list of allowed replication sources (see Adding a Replication Source
on page 265).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 127

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

Note: For the purposes of failback, the original source system is

now acting as a target because it will receive the snapshot
from the original target system.

2 On the original target system, select a received snapshot and

perform a failback operation pointing to the original source system,
and then recover the share or partition on the original source
system (see Performing a Failback For a Share on page 143 or
Performing a Failback For a Partition on page 157).
The share or partition is now available on the original source
system.
3 (Optional) If necessary, map your backup application to the restored
share or partition on the original source system.

Replication Send
The Replication Send page allows you to manage outgoing replication
activity for NAS shares or VTL partitions. You can replicate shares or
partitions on the DXi6902 (the source) to other DXi systems (the
targets). You can also schedule replication, and view the status of
current and recent replication jobs.

Note: Before you can replicate shares or partitions, you must specify a
replication target (see Adding a Replication Target on
page 259).

To access the Replication Send page, click the Replication menu, and
then click the Send tab (see Figure 71).

128 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

Figure 71 Replication Send

Page

Use the Replication Send page to perform the following tasks:

• View replication information for shares or partitions (see Replication
Jobs List on page 130).
• Enable or disable replication for a share or partition (see Enabling
Replication For a Share or Partition on page 132).
• Configure Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication for a share or
partition (see Configuring Directory/File or Cartridge Based
Replication on page 133).
• Initiate replication for a share or partition (see Replicating a Share or
Partition on page 136).
• Synchronize a share or partition configured for Directory/File or
Cartridge Based Replication (see Synchronizing a Share or Partition
on page 136).
• View replication statistics for a share or partition configured for
Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication (see Directory/File or
Cartridge Based Replication Queue on page 137).
• Schedule a share or partition for replication (see Scheduling a Share
or Partition For Replication on page 139).
• Manage replication targets (see Target DXis List on page 140)

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 129

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

Replication Jobs List The Replication Jobs list displays replication statistics for all NAS shares
or VTL partitions on the DXi6902 that are eligible for replication. To be
eligible for replication, a share or partition must have data
deduplication enabled at the time it is created.

Note: For information about creating NAS shares or VTL partitions,

see Adding a NAS Share on page 213 or Adding a VTL Partition
on page 230.

The Replication Jobs list displays the following information:

Note: Click the arrow next to Shares or Partitions to display all

shares or partitions in the list. Alternately, click the plus [ + ] or
minus [ - ] icons to show or hide all shares or partitions.

• NAS/VTL - The name of the share or partition. Hold the cursor over
the name to display detailed information about the share or
partition.

Note: If multiple targets are configured for a share or partition,

click the arrow next to the share or partition to view all
targets.

• Replication - The replication state (On or Off). Click the toggle

switch to turn replication on or off for the share or partition.

Note: Clicking the toggle next to Shares or Partitions will turn

replication on or off for all shares or partitions.

• Target - The hostname or IP address of the configured replication

target. If the share or partition is configured to replicate to multiple
targets, click the arrow next to the share or partition name to
display all targets.
• Sync ID - The Sync ID of the share or partition if Directory/File or
Cartridge Based Replication is enabled.
• Last Job Type - The type of the most recent replication job
(Replication or Synchronization).
• Job Status - The status of the most recent replication job (see
Replication and Synchronization Status on page 131). Hold the
cursor over the job status to display detailed job statistics.

130 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

• Started - The time the most recent replication job was started.
• Finished - The time the most recent replication job was completed.
• Schedule - A watch icon displays if replication is scheduled for the
share or partition, as well as the next scheduled event (see
Scheduling a Share or Partition For Replication on page 139).
You can customize the appearance of the Replication Jobs list in the
following ways:
• Click the top banner row of the list to collapse or expand the list.
• Click the arrow to the right of a column heading and select Sort
Ascending or Sort Descending to sort the rows in the table by that
column.
• To show or hide a column, click the arrow to the right of a column
heading, and then click Columns. Select the check box to show a
column, or clear the check box to hide a column. (The following
columns are hidden by default: Original Data Size, Actual Data
Sent, and Average Data Sent.)
• To filter content in a column, click the arrow to the right of a
column heading, and then click Filters. Type or select the desired
filter. (If one row for a share or partition matches the filter, all rows
for the share or partition are displayed.)

Replication and Synchronization Status

A replication job can have one of the following statuses:
• In Progress - The replication job is in progress.
• Partial - A replication job was partially completed. Generate a
replication report to see the files that were not replicated (see
Reports on page 169).
• Queued - The replication job is queued and will continue when the
system is ready.
• Success - The replication job was completed successfully.
• Failed - The replication job was not completed.
A synchronization job can have one of the following statuses:
• Queued - The synchronization job is queued and will continue when
the system is ready.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 131

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

• Success - The synchronization job was completed successfully.

• Recovering - The recover operation is in process.
• Replicating - The replication operation is in process.
• Failed - The synchronization job was not completed.

Enabling Replication Enable replication for a NAS share or VTL partition to allow the data on
For a Share or Partition the share or partition to be replicated to other DXi systems (the targets).
Disable replication if you do not want to replicate the share or partition
to other DXi systems.

Note: To be eligible for replication, a share or partition must have

data deduplication enabled at the time it is created.

To enable or disable replication for a share or partition:

1 Select the share or partition and click Configure.
The Share or Partition Configure window displays (see Figure 72).

Figure 72 Share or Partition

Configure Window

2 Select the Enable Replication check box to enable replication for

the share or partition.
Or clear the Enable Replication check box to disable replication for
the share or partition. Any jobs from that share or partition that are
in progress or queued will transition to failure. Also, all replication

132 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

job history for that combination of target and share or partition will
be removed.
3 Select the check box for each replication target you want to
replicate the share or partition to. (You must select at least one
target.) When the share or partition is replicated, its data will be
sent to all selected targets.
4 Click Apply.

Note: Quantum recommends scheduling replication to run after

backups are complete (see Scheduling a Share or Partition For
Replication on page 139). If you do not enable scheduled
replication, replication will only occur if you manually replicate
a share or partition (see Replicating a Share or Partition on
page 136) or if you configure Directory/File Based Replication
(see Configuring Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication
on page 133).

Note: Disabling replication for a share or partition does not delete

any scheduled replication events for that share or partition. If
you no longer want to schedule the share or partition for
replication, manually delete the schedule (see Deleting a
Scheduled Event on page 314).

Configuring Directory/ Configure a NAS share or VTL partition for Directory/File or Cartridge
File or Cartridge Based Based Replication to automatically replicate files or cartridges to other
Replication DXi systems (the targets). A file is automatically replicated when it is
closed or a period of time after it is modified. A cartridge is
automatically replicated when it is unmounted. After replication, the
replicated files or cartridges are immediately available on the target
systems. There is no need to recover the share or partition to make the
files or cartridges available. Disable Directory/File or Cartridge Based
Replication if you do not want to automatically replicate files or
cartridges.
When you configure a share or partition for Directory/File or Cartridge
Based Replication, you must specify a Sync ID. The Sync ID associates the
share or partition on the source system with the share or partition on
the target systems that will received the replicated data. The Sync ID for

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 133

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

the source share or partition must match the Sync ID for the target
share or partition.
If Cartridge Based Replication is enabled for a VTL partition, the
following media behaviors apply:
• When a cartridge is exported from the partition, the cartridge is
deleted from the configured target systems.
• When a cartridge is imported into the partition, the cartridge is
replicated to the configured target systems.
• When a cartridge is deleted on a source system, it is in the
Unassigned partition, thus this action has no effect on Cartridge
Based Replication activity.
To configure a source share or partition for Directory/File or Cartridge
Based Replication:
1 If you have not already done so, configure the target share or
partition on the target DXi (see Configuring a Target Share for
Directory/File Based Replication on page 150 or Configuring a Target
Partition for Cartridge Based Replication on page 164.)
2 On the source DXi, select the source share or partition and click
Configure.
The Share or Partition Configure window displays (see Figure 73).

Figure 73 Share or Partition

Configure Window

3 If it is not already selected, select the Enable Replication check box

to enable replication for the share or partition.

134 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

4 Select the Enable Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication to

target check box to enable Directory/File or Cartridge Based
Replication for the share or partition.
Or clear the Enable Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication
to target check box to disable Directory/File or Cartridge Based
Replication for the share or partition.
5 Enter a Sync ID in the box.
The Sync ID is used to identify the target share or partition that will
receive replicated data from the source share or partition. The Sync
ID must be identical to the Sync ID of the target share or partition
on the target system.
The Sync ID must contain no more than 32 characters (NAS share)
or 12 characters (VTL partition) and can contain only alphanumeric
characters, underscores, and hyphens. (An underscore or hyphen
must not be the first character.)

Note: If you are performing Directory/File or Cartridge Based

Replication with a system running a DXi software version
prior to 2.3, you may need to change the Sync ID on the
system running pre-2.3 software to match the above Sync
ID name restrictions.

6 Select the check box for each replication target you want to
replicate the share or partition to. (You must select at least one
target.) When the share or partition is replicated, its data will be
sent to all selected targets.

Note: Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication will be

configured for all selected targets. You cannot configure
one share or partition for multiple replication types.

7 Click Apply.

Note: After you configure a share or partition for Directory/File or

Cartridge Based Replication, you should synchronize it to
ensure it is in sync with the target share or partition (see
Synchronizing a Share or Partition on page 136).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 135

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

Replicating a Share or Replicate a NAS share or VTL partition to send a snapshot of the share or
Partition partition to the target systems. A snapshot is required to recover the
data on the targets at a later time. If you have not configured a
replication schedule for a share or partition, replication only occurs
when you manually initiate it (see Scheduling a Share or Partition For
Replication on page 139).

Caution: Do not replicate a partition containing media in an

Exported state.

To replicate a share or partition:

1 Select the share or partition to replicate.
If multiple targets are configured, click the arrow next to the share
or partition to display all targets, and then select the desired target.
2 Click Replicate Now.
The status of the replication job displays in the Job Status column.
To cancel the replication job, select the share or partition and click
Abort.

Synchronizing a Share Synchronize a NAS share or VTL partition to synchronize its contents
or Partition with the corresponding share or partition on the target systems. To
synchronize a share or partition, it must be configured for Directory/File
or Cartridge Based Replication (see Configuring Directory/File or
Cartridge Based Replication on page 133).
Synchronizing a share or partition ensures that the contents of the
source share or partition are the same as the target share or partition.
The synchronization verifies that the same files or cartridges exist in
both locations, and that no additional files or cartridges exist in either
location.
You should perform a synchronization in any of the following situations:
• When Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication is first enabled
for a share or partition.
• If a Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication job fails.
• If Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication is disabled for a time
and then is re-enabled.

136 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

Manually performing a synchronization is not necessary except in the

cases described above. When synchronization is manually initiated for a
share or partition, the replication queue for that share or partition is
cleared. All file write and delete requests are queued after the
synchronization, and they are not processed until the synchronization is
complete. This can cause replication to appear to be slow, especially for
a share or partition that is frequently accessed.

Caution: Before synchronizing a share or partition, make sure all

media are unmounted and there are no active backup jobs
to the share or partition. (After the synchronization reaches
the Replicating state, backup jobs are allowed.)

Note: Even when replication is paused, the system continues to

queue Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication operations.
Each time an operation is queued, the system logs an
administration alert that reports the total number of queued
Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication requests.

Note: If a synchronization fails, make sure the target share or

partition is unlocked (see Configuring a Target Share for
Directory/File Based Replication on page 150 or Configuring a
Target Partition for Cartridge Based Replication on page 164).

To synchronize a share or partition:

1 Select the share or partition to synchronize.
If multiple targets are configured, click the arrow next to the share
or partition to display all targets, and then select the desired target.
2 Click Synchronize Now.
The status of the synchronization job displays in the Job Status column.
To cancel the synchronization job, select the share or partition and click
Abort.

Directory/File or The Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication Queue displays

Cartridge Based replication statistics for shares or partitions that are configured for
Replication Queue Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication (see Configuring Directory/
File or Cartridge Based Replication on page 133).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 137

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

To view the Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication Queue:

1 Select a share or partition that is configured for Directory/File or
Cartridge Based Replication.
If multiple targets are configured, click the arrow next to the share
or partition to display all targets, and then select the desired target.
2 Click Queue.
The Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication Queue displays (see
Figure 74).

Figure 74 Directory/File or
Cartridge Based Replication
Queue

The Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication Queue displays the

following information for the share or partition:
• File/Directory or Barcode - The file/directory or cartridge to be
replicated.
• State - The replication state for the file/directory or cartridge.
• Progress - The percentage complete for replication of the file/
directory or cartridge.
• Estimated Duration - The estimated time it will take to
complete replication for the file/directory or cartridge.

Note: The estimated duration may display as unknown if

replication has been very recently initiated. After the
system has enough information to calculate a value,
the estimated duration will display.

138 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Replication Send

Note: The contents of the Directory/File or Cartridge Based

Replication Queue are dynamic. Because of this, statistics
are subject to change if items are added to the queue.

Note: The queue may show a large number of deletion entries

after a single directory is deleted. This is expected behavior,
and occurs because several recursive file or subdirectory
deletions may be required.

3 To close the Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication Queue,

click the Close icon.

Scheduling a Share or When a share or partition is enabled for replication, it is important to

Partition For regularly replicate the share or partition to the target systems. Quantum
Replication recommends scheduling replication to run after backups are complete.
To schedule a share or partition for replication, click Scheduler. The
Scheduler window displays (see Figure 75).
For details about using the Scheduler to add or edit a replication
schedule, see Scheduling a Share or Partition for Replication on
page 309.

Figure 75 Scheduler Window

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 139

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

Target DXis List The Target DXis list allows you to configure and manage replication
targets on the DXi6902. Click the arrows at the upper right, or click the
top banner row, to expand or collapse the Target DXis list. For details
about working with targets, see Target DXis List on page 258.

Receive NAS
The Receive NAS page allows you to manage incoming replication
activity for NAS shares. You can recover a replicated share on the target
system if the source system is unavailable. Once the source system
becomes available, you can failback the share to make it available on
the source system again.

Note: Before you can receive replicated shares, you must specify one
or more replication sources (see Adding a Replication Source
on page 265).

To access the Receive NAS page, click the Replication menu, and then
click the Receive > NAS tab.
Use the Receive NAS page to perform the following tasks:
• View received snapshots and recover, failback, or delete snapshots
(see Received Snapshots on page 140).
• Manage recovery jobs (see Recovery Jobs on page 146).
• Manage failback jobs (see Failback Jobs on page 147).
• Manage shares configured for Directory/File Based Replication (see
Directory/File Based on page 148).

Received Snapshots The Received Snapshots page allows you to view and work with
received snapshots. When a replicated NAS share is received from a
source system, it is saved as a snapshot. The snapshot contains all of the
data necessary to fully recover or failback the share to the point in time
when the snapshot was saved.

140 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

To access the Received Snapshots page, on the Receive NAS page, click
the Received Snapshots tab (see Figure 76).

Figure 76 Received Snapshots

Page

Use the Received Snapshots page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about received snapshots (see Snapshots List on
page 141).
• Recover a share on the target system (see Recovering a Share on
page 142).
• Failback a share to the source system (see Performing a Failback For
a Share on page 143).
• Delete a received snapshot (see Deleting a Snapshot on page 145).

Note: The target system will retain up to 10 replication snapshots

(default setting) for each replicated share. Once 10 snapshots
have been saved, the oldest snapshot is deleted to make room
for each new snapshot that is received. (To change the
maximum number of snapshots retained for each share, see
Changing the Maximum Number of Snapshots on page 267).

Snapshots List
The Snapshots List displays all available snapshots that have been
received from configured replication sources. Snapshots are grouped by

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 141

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

NAS share. To see all available snapshots for a share, click the plus icon
[+] next to the share name.
The Snapshots List displays the following information about each
snapshot:
• Share Name - The name of the share.
• Source DXi - The hostname of the system that the snapshot was
sent from.
• Started - The time the most recent replication job was started.
• Finished - The time the most recent replication job finished.
• Status - The status of the most recent replication job (see
Replication and Synchronization Status on page 131). Click the
status to display detailed information about the most recent
replication job.

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Recovering a Share
Recover a NAS share if the source system is unavailable and you need to
access the share (for example, to continue performing backups). When
you recover a share, you select a received snapshot. The DXi6902 uses
the snapshot to recreate the share on the target system just as it was at
the point in time when the snapshot was saved.

Note: Before recovering a share, you must enable CIFS on the DXi (see
Windows Domain on page 217). Also, if the DXi is not using
Active Directory, you must configure at least one workgroup
user to own recovered CIFS shares (see Share Access on
page 220).

To recover a share:
1 On the target system, select a snapshot in the Snapshots List and
click Recover.
The Recovered Share Name page displays (see Figure 77).

142 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

Figure 77 Recovered Share

Name Page

2 (Optional) In the Recovered Share Name box, type a new name for
the recovered share. (The default name is the original share name.)
3 Click Apply.
4 If the DXi is joined to a Windows workgroup, select the workgroup
user that will own the recovered share, and then click Apply.
The share is recovered on the target system. All data stored on the share
at the time the snapshot was saved is available. The original export
protocol of the share (NFS or CIFS) is retained in the recovery process.

Note: After you recover a share, if you want to continue backing up

data to the share, you must remap your backup application to
point to the target system instead of the source system.

Performing a Failback For a Share

Perform a failback of a NAS share if a source system that was previously
unavailable becomes available again. When you failback a share, you
select a received snapshot. The DXi6902 copies the snapshot from the
target system back to the source system. You can then perform a
recover operation to recreate the share on the source system just as it
was at the point in time when the snapshot was saved.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 143

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

Note: Before you can failback a share, on the original source system,
you must add the original target system to the list of allowed
replication sources (see Adding a Replication Source on
page 265). This is because, during failback, the original target
is acting as a source when it sends a snapshot to the original
source.

To perform a share failback:

1 On the target system, select a snapshot in the Snapshots List and
click Failback.
The Failback Target page displays (see Figure 78).

Figure 78 Failback Target Page

2 (Optional) In the Failback Destination DXi box, type the hostname

or IP address of a new destination system to failback the share to.
(The default destination is the original source system.)

Note: To use hostname format, you must specify at least one DNS
IP address on the Network page (see Network on
page 315).

3 (Optional) Leave the Use Encryption check box selected to enable

encryption when sending the snapshot to the destination. Or clear
the Use Encryption check box to disable encryption when sending
the snapshot to the destination.

144 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

Caution: Select 128-bit encryption if you are sending data to a

DXi running a system software version prior to DXi 2.1
Software.

Note: AES encryption options are available only if the Data-in-

Flight license is installed (see License Keys on page 393).

4 Click Apply.
The snapshot is sent to the source system.
5 On the source system, in the Snapshots List, select the snapshot
that was sent during the failback operation and click Recover.
The Recovered Share Name page displays (see Figure 77).
6 (Optional) In the Recovered Share Name box, type a new name for
the recovered share. (The default name is the original share name.)
7 Click Apply.
The share is recovered on the source system. All data stored on the
share at the time the snapshot was saved is available. The original
export protocol of the share (NFS or CIFS) is retained in the recovery
process.

Note: If you previously remapped your backup application to a

recovered share on the target system, after you failback the
share, you must remap your backup application again to point
to the source system.

Deleting a Snapshot
Delete a snapshot if it is no longer needed. After you delete a snapshot,
it can no longer be used to recover or failback a NAS share.

Note: You cannot delete a snapshot if a failback operation is in

progress for the snapshot. Wait for the failback operation to
complete, or abort the operation (see Failback Jobs on
page 147).

To delete a snapshot:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 145

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

1 Do one of the following actions:

• On the source system, disable replication for the share
associated with the snapshot (see Enabling Replication For a
Share or Partition on page 132).
• On the target system, delete the source system associated with
the snapshot from the list of allowed replication sources (see
Deleting a Replication Source on page 266).
2 On the target system, select a snapshot in the Snapshots List and
click Delete.

Note: If you delete the last snapshot for a share while replication
for the share (to this target) is still enabled, any replicated
data not yet protected by a replicated share is not deleted.
To delete this data, on the source system, disable
replication for the share before deleting the last snapshot.

3 Click Yes to confirm the action.

Recovery Jobs The Recovery Jobs page allows you to view information about snapshot
recover operations that were previously completed.
To access the Recovery Jobs page, on the Receive NAS page, click the
Recovery Jobs tab (see Figure 79).

146 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

Figure 79 Recovery Jobs Page

The Snapshot Recovery Jobs section displays the following information

about recovery jobs:
• Original Share Name - The name of the share the snapshot was
created from.
• New Share Name - The name of the share the snapshot was
recovered to.
• Source DXi - The hostname of the system that the snapshot was
received from.
• Started - The time the recovery job was started.
• Finished - The time the recovery job finished.
• Status - The status of the recovery job (Success, In Progress, or
Failed).
To delete information for a recovery job, select it in the Snapshot
Recovery Jobs list and click Delete Job Info.

Failback Jobs The Failback Jobs page allows you to view information about snapshot
failback operations that were previously completed. You can also abort
a failback that is currently in progress.
To access the Failback Jobs page, on the Receive NAS page, click the
Failback Jobs tab (see Figure 80).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 147

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

Figure 80 Failback Jobs Page

The Snapshot Failback Jobs section displays the following information

about failback jobs:
• Share Name - The name of the share the snapshot was created
from.
• Destination DXi - The hostname of the system that the snapshot
was sent to.
• Started - The time the failback job was started.
• Finished - The time the failback job finished.
• Status - The status of the failback job (Success, In Progress, or
Failed).
Use the Failback Jobs page to perform the following tasks:
• To delete information for a failback job, select it in the Snapshot
Failback Jobs section and click Delete Job Info.
• To abort a failback job that is in progress, select it in the Snapshot
Failback Jobs section and click Abort.

Directory/File Based The Directory/File Based page allows you to manage Directory/File
Based Replication on the target system. You can configure a NAS share
to receive Directory/File Based Replication data sent from a source
system and view replication statistics for the share.

148 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

Note: For information about creating NAS shares, see Adding a NAS
Share on page 213.

To access the Directory/File Based page, on the Receive NAS page, click
the Directory/File Based tab (see Figure 81).

Figure 81 Directory/File Based

Page

Use the Directory/File Based page to perform the following tasks:

• View shares eligible to receive Directory/File Based data (see Shares
Eligible to Receive Directory/File Based Data on page 149)
• Configure a share to receive Directory/File Based Replication data
(see Configuring a Target Share for Directory/File Based Replication
on page 150)
• View statistics for shares configured for Directory/File Based
Replication (see Unpack Queue on page 152)

Shares Eligible to Receive Directory/File Based Data

The Shares Eligible to Receive Directory/File Based Data section
displays information for all NAS shares on the DXi6902 that are eligible
to receive Directory/File Based Replication data from a source share. To
be eligible to receive Directory/File Based Replication data, a share must
have data deduplication enabled at the time it is created.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 149

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

The Shares Eligible for Replication section displays the following

information:
• Share Name - The name of the share.
• State - The state of Directory/File Based Replication for the share
(Enabled or Disabled).
• Sync ID - The Sync ID used to identify the source share that will
send replicated data to the share.
• Access - The selected access option for the share (Locked or
Unlocked).

Note: Click the Information button [i] next to a share to display

detailed information about the share and recent replication
activity.

Configuring a Target Share for Directory/File Based

Replication
Configuring a NAS share for Directory/File Based Replication enables the
automatic replication of files and directories on the source share to the
target share. Before you configure a share on the source system for
Directory/File Based Replication, you must configure a share on the
target system to receive the replicated data from the source share.

Note: For information about configuring Directory/File Based

Replication on the source system, see Configuring Directory/File
or Cartridge Based Replication on page 133.

To configure a target share for Directory/File Based Replication:

1 Select the share and click Edit.
The Edit Share Settings page displays (see Figure 82).

150 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive NAS

Figure 82 Edit Share Settings

Page

2 Select the Enable to receive Directory/File Based replication data

check box to enable Directory/File Based Replication for the share.
Or clear the Enable to receive Directory/File Based replication
data check box to disable Directory/File Based Replication for the
share.
3 Enter a Sync ID in the box.
The Sync ID is used to identify the source share that will send
replicated data to the target share. The Sync ID must be identical to
the Sync ID of the source share on the source system.
4 Select an Access option:
• Locked - The share is not allowed to receive new Directory/File
Based Replication data.
• Unlocked - The share is allowed to receive new Directory/File
Based Replication data.

Note: If a share configured for Directory/Filed Based Replication is

locked on the target system, synchronization jobs may fail
on the source system.

5 Click Apply.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 151

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

Unpack Queue
Use the Unpack Queue to view Directory/File Based Replication statistics
for data received from the source system.
To view the Unpack Queue, select a share and click View Unpack
Queue (see Figure 83).

Figure 83 Unpack Queue

The Unpack Queue displays the following information:

• File/Directory - The file or directory to be replicated.
• State - The replication state of the file or directory.
Click Refresh to update the statistics in the Unpack Queue. Click OK to
return to the Directory/File Based page.

Receive VTL
The Receive VTL page allows you to manage incoming replication
activity for VTL partitions. You can recover a replicated partition on the
target system if the source system is unavailable. Once the source
system becomes available, you can failback the partition to make it
available on the source system again.

152 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

Note: Before you can receive replicated partitions, you must specify
one or more replication sources (see Adding a Replication
Source on page 265).

To access the Receive VTL page, click the Replication menu, and then
click the Receive > VTL tab.
Use the Receive VTL page to perform the following tasks:
• View received snapshots and recover, failback, or delete snapshots
(see Received Snapshots on page 153).
• Manage recovery jobs (see Recovery Jobs on page 160).
• Manage failback jobs (see Failback Jobs on page 161).
• Manage partitions configured for Cartridge Based Replication (see
Cartridge Based on page 162).

Received Snapshots The Received Snapshots page allows you to view and work with
received snapshots. When a replicated VTL partition is received from a
source system, it is saved as a snapshot. The snapshot contains all of the
data necessary to fully recover or failback the partition to the point in
time when the snapshot was saved.
To access the Received Snapshots page, on the Receive VTL page, click
the Received Snapshots tab (see Figure 84).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 153

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

Figure 84 Received Snapshots

Page

Use the Received Snapshots page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about received snapshots (see Snapshots List on
page 154).
• Recover a partition on the target system (see Recovering a Partition
on page 155).
• Failback a partition to the source system (see Performing a Failback
For a Partition on page 157).
• Delete a received snapshot (see Deleting a Snapshot on page 159).

Note: The target system will retain up to 10 replication snapshots

(default setting) for each replicated partition. Once 10
snapshots have been saved, the oldest snapshot is deleted to
make room for each new snapshot that is received. (To change
the maximum number of snapshots retained for each partition,
see Changing the Maximum Number of Snapshots on
page 267).

Snapshots List
The Snapshots List displays all available snapshots that have been
received from configured replication sources. Snapshots are grouped by
VTL partition. To see all available snapshots for a partition, click the plus
icon [+] next to the partition name.

154 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

The Snapshots List displays the following information about each

snapshot:
• Partition Name - The name of the partition.
• Source DXi - The hostname of the system that the snapshot was
sent from.
• Started - The time the most recent replication job was started.
• Finished - The time the most recent replication job finished.
• Status - The status of the most recent replication job (see
Replication and Synchronization Status on page 131). Click the
status to display detailed information about the most recent
replication job.

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Recovering a Partition
Recover a VTL partition if the source system is unavailable and you need
to access the partition (for example, to continue performing backups).
When you recover a partition, you select a received snapshot. The
DXi6902 uses the snapshot to recreate the partition on the target
system just as it was at the point in time when the snapshot was saved.

Note: To recover a partition, the target system must support the

library emulation and drive type used in the original partition.
For a list of the available library emulations and drive types on
the target system, see Adding a VTL Partition on page 230.

To recover a partition:
1 On the target system, select a snapshot in the Snapshots List and
click Recover.
The Recovered Partition Name page displays (see Figure 85).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 155

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

Figure 85 Recovered Partition

Name Page

2 (Optional) In the Recovered Partition Name box, type a new name

for the recovered partition. (The default name is the original
partition name.)
3 Click Apply.
The partition and its cartridges are recovered on the target system. All
data stored on the partition at the time the snapshot was saved is
available.
After recovering the partition, you must add tape drives to the partition.
The tape drive type must be identical to the original partition so that the
media is compatible. In addition, you must map the devices before the
VTL partition is accessible.
If the partition contains media, you will only be able to select the
highest capacity tape drive for that media type. For example, if the
partition contains SDLT600 tape cartridges, you will only be able to
select DLT-S4 tape drives when mapping devices to the recovered
partition.

Note: When a VTL partition is recovered on a target system, a new

serial number is created for the partition.

156 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

Note: After you recover a partition, if you want to continue backing

up data to the partition, you must remap your backup
application to point to the target system instead of the source
system.

Performing a Failback For a Partition

Perform a failback of a VTL partition if a source system that was
previously unavailable becomes available again. When you failback a
partition, you select a received snapshot. The DXi6902 copies the
snapshot from the target system back to the source system. You can
then perform a recover operation to recreate the partition on the source
system just as it was at the point in time when the snapshot was saved.

Note: Before you can failback a partition, on the original source

system, you must add the original target system to the list of
allowed replication sources (see Adding a Replication Source
on page 265). This is because, during failback, the original
target is acting as a source when it sends a snapshot to the
original source.

To perform a partition failback:

1 On the target system, select a snapshot in the Snapshots List and
click Failback.
The Failback Target page displays (see Figure 86).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 157

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

Figure 86 Failback Target Page

2 (Optional) In the Failback Destination DXi box, type the hostname

or IP address of a new destination system to failback the partition
to. (The default destination is the original source system.)

Note: To use hostname format, you must specify at least one DNS
IP address on the Network page (see Network on
page 315).

3 (Optional) Leave the Use Encryption check box selected to enable

encryption when sending the snapshot to the destination. Or clear
the Use Encryption check box to disable encryption when sending
the snapshot to the destination.

Caution: Select 128-bit encryption if you are sending data to a

DXi running a system software version prior to DXi 2.1
Software.

Note: AES encryption options are available only if the Data-in-

Flight license is installed (see License Keys on page 393).

4 Click Apply.
The snapshot is sent to the source system.
5 On the source system, in the Snapshots List, select the snapshot
that was sent during the failback operation and click Recover.

158 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

The Recovered Partition Name page displays (see Figure 85).

6 (Optional) In the Recovered Partition Name box, type a new name
for the recovered partition. (The default name is the original
partition name.)
7 Click Apply.
The partition and its cartridges are recovered on the source system. All
data stored on the partition at the time the snapshot was saved is
available.
After recovering the partition, you must add tape drives and a robot to
the partition, and you must map the devices before the VTL partition is
accessible. If the partition contains media, you will only be able to select
the highest capacity tape drive for that media type. For example, if the
partition contains SDLT600 tape cartridges, you will only be able to
select DLT-S4 tape drives when mapping devices to the recovered
partition.

Note: When a VTL partition is recovered on a target system, a new

serial number is created for the partition.

Note: If you previously remapped your backup application to a

recovered partition on the target system, after you failback the
partition, you must remap your backup application again to
point to the source system.

Deleting a Snapshot
Delete a snapshot if it is no longer needed. After you delete a snapshot,
it can no longer be used to recover or failback a VTL partition.

Note: You cannot delete a snapshot if a failback operation is in

progress for the snapshot. Wait for the failback operation to
complete, or abort the operation (see Failback Jobs on
page 161).

To delete a snapshot:
1 Do one of the following actions:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 159

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

• On the source system, disable replication for the partition

associated with the snapshot (see Enabling Replication For a
Share or Partition on page 132).
• On the target system, delete the source system associated with
the snapshot from the list of allowed replication sources (see
Deleting a Replication Source on page 266).
2 On the target system, select a snapshot in the Snapshots List and
click Delete.

Note: If you delete the last snapshot for a partition while

replication for the partition (to this target) is still enabled,
any replicated data not yet protected by a replicated
partition is not deleted. To delete this data, on the source
system, disable replication for the partition before deleting
the last snapshot.

3 Click Yes to confirm the action.

Recovery Jobs The Recovery Jobs page allows you to view information about snapshot
recover operations that were previously completed.
To access the Recovery Jobs page, on the Receive VTL page, click the
Recovery Jobs tab (see Figure 87).

Figure 87 Recovery Jobs Page

160 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

The Snapshot Recovery Jobs section displays the following information

about recovery jobs:
• Original Partition Name - The name of the partition the snapshot
was created from.
• New Partition Name - The name of the partition the snapshot was
recovered to.
• Source DXi - The hostname of the system that the snapshot was
received from.
• Started - The time the recovery job was started.
• Finished - The time the recovery job finished.
• Status - The status of the recovery job (Success, In Progress, or
Failed).
To delete information for a recovery job, select it in the Snapshot
Recovery Jobs list and click Delete Job Info.

Failback Jobs The Failback Jobs page allows you to view information about snapshot
failback operations that were previously completed. You can also abort
a failback that is currently in progress.
To access the Failback Jobs page, on the Receive VTL page, click the
Failback Jobs tab (see Figure 88).

Figure 88 Failback Jobs Page

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 161

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

The Snapshot Failback Jobs section displays the following information

about failback jobs:
• Partition Name - The name of the partition the snapshot was
created from.
• Destination DXi - The hostname of the system that the snapshot
was sent to.
• Started - The time the failback job was started.
• Finished - The time the failback job finished.
• Status - The status of the failback job (Success, In Progress, or
Failed).
Use the Failback Jobs page to perform the following tasks:
• To delete information for a failback job, select it in the Snapshot
Failback Jobs section and click Delete Job Info.
• To abort a failback job that is in progress, select it in the Snapshot
Failback Jobs section and click Abort.

Cartridge Based The Cartridge Based page allows you to manage Cartridge Based
Replication on the target system. You can configure a VTL partition to
receive Cartridge Based Replication data sent from a source system and
view replication statistics for the partition.

Note: For information about creating VTL partitions, see Adding a VTL
Partition on page 230.

To access the Cartridge Based page, on the Receive VTL page, click the
Cartridge Based tab (see Figure 89).

162 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

Figure 89 Cartridge Based

Page

Use the Cartridge Based page to perform the following tasks:

• View partitions eligible to receive Cartridge Based data (see
Partitions Eligible to Receive Cartridge Based Data on page 163)
• Configure a partition to receive Cartridge Based Replication data
(see Configuring a Target Partition for Cartridge Based Replication
on page 164)
• View statistics for partitions configured for Cartridge Based
Replication (see Unpack Queue on page 165)

Partitions Eligible to Receive Cartridge Based Data

The Partitions Eligible to Receive Cartridge Based Data section
displays information for all VTL partitions on the DXi6902 that are
eligible to receive Cartridge Based Replication data from a source
partition. To be eligible to receive Cartridge Based Replication data, a
partition must have data deduplication enabled at the time it is created.
The Partitions Eligible for Replication section displays the following
information:
• Partition Name - The name of the partition.
• State - The state of Cartridge Based Replication for the partition
(Enabled or Disabled).
• Sync ID - The Sync ID used to identify the source partition that
will send replicated data to the partition.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 163

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

• Access - The selected access option for the partition (Locked or

Unlocked).

Note: Click the Information button [i] next to a partition to display

detailed information about the partition and recent replication
activity.

Configuring a Target Partition for Cartridge Based Replication

Configuring a VTL partition for Cartridge Based Replication enables the
automatic replication of cartridges on the source partition to the target
partition. Before you configure a partition on the source system for
Cartridge Based Replication, you must configure a partition on the
target system to receive the replicated data from the source partition.

Note: For information about configuring Cartridge Based Replication

on the source system, see Configuring Directory/File or
Cartridge Based Replication on page 133.

To configure a target partition for Cartridge Based Replication:

1 Select the partition and click Edit.
The Edit Partition Settings page displays (see Figure 90).

Figure 90 Edit Partition

Settings Page

164 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Receive VTL

2 Select the Enable to receive Cartridge Based replication data

check box to enable Cartridge Based Replication for the partition.
Or clear the Enable to receive Cartridge Based replication data
check box to disable Cartridge Based Replication for the partition.
3 Enter a Sync ID in the box.
The Sync ID is used to identify the source partition that will send
replicated data to the target partition. The Sync ID must be identical
to the Sync ID of the source partition on the source system.
4 Select an Access option:
• Locked - The partition is not allowed to receive new Cartridge
Based Replication data.
• Unlocked - The partition is allowed to receive new Cartridge
Based Replication data.

Note: If a partition configured for Cartridge Based Replication is

locked on the target system, synchronization jobs may fail
on the source system.

5 Click Apply.

Unpack Queue
Use the Unpack Queue to view Cartridge Based Replication statistics for
data received from the source system.
To view the Unpack Queue, select a partition and click View Unpack
Queue (see Figure 91).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 165

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Actions

Figure 91 Unpack Queue

The Unpack Queue displays the following information:

• Barcode - The barcode of the cartridge to be replicated.
• State - The replication state of the cartridge.
Click Refresh to update the statistics in the Unpack Queue. Click OK to
return to the Cartridge Based page.

Actions
The Actions page allows you to manage replication activity on the
DXi6902. You can pause the replication service, enable the replication
state, and clear performance statistics.
To access the Actions page, click the Replication menu, and then click
the Actions tab (see Figure 92).

166 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Actions

Figure 92 Actions Page

Use the Actions page to perform the following tasks:

• Pause or resume the replication service (see Replication Service on
page 167).
• Enable or disable the replication state (see Replication State on
page 168).
• Clear cumulative replication statistics (see Replication Performance
on page 169).

Replication Service The replication service controls replication and failback traffic on the
DXi6902. You can pause each replication target independently.
• Click Pause next to a target to pause all replication and failback
traffic to that target.
If a replication job is currently in progress, the system continues to
replicate the current block of data. The process of replicating the

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 167

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Actions

current block can take up to 15 minutes to complete. After the

block has completed replication, the system pauses replication.

Note: If you pause a replication job that is in process, a Failure

event is logged in the replication report (see Reports on
page 169).

• Click Resume next to a target to resume all incoming and outgoing

replication and failback traffic to that target.
If a replication job was in progress when replication was paused,
the replication job continues.

Replication State The replication state applies to all NAS shares or VTL partitions on the
DXi6902 that are eligible for replication (that is, all deduplicated shares
or partitions).

Note: The Replication Actions page may appear busy for a few
moments when enabling or disabling the replication state.
Wait for the process to complete before performing other
actions.

• Click Enable to enable replication for all shares or partitions.

• Click Disable to disable replication for all shares or partitions.
If a replication job is currently in progress, the system continues
until the entire replication job is complete. After the replication job
has completed, the system disables replication. The system will not
be able to replicate data for any shares or partitions until you click
Enable.

Note: To disable replication for a single share or partition, select it

on the Replication > Send page and click Edit. Clear the
Enable replication and the Enable scheduled replication
check boxes, and then click Apply. For more information,
see Replication Send on page 128

168 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Reports

Replication The DXi6902 maintains cumulative performance statistics for send and
Performance receive replication activity. The statistics appear on the Home page and
elsewhere. You can reset these statistics so the system will calculate
them with new data going forward.
• To clear send statistics, first select one or more targets to clear
statistics for, and then click Clear Send. This resets cumulative
performance statistics gathered while replicating shares or
partitions to the selected target systems, or when sending a
snapshot during a failback operation.
• To clear receive statistics, click Clear Receive. This resets cumulative
performance statistics gathered while receiving replicated shares or
partitions from source systems, or when receiving a snapshot during
a failback operation.

Reports
The Reports page allows you to generate and download a replication
report. The report includes detailed information about all replication
activity, including Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication.
To access the Reports page, click the Replication menu, and then click
the Reports tab (see Figure 93).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 169

Chapter 6: DXi6902 Replication
Reports

Figure 93 Reports Page

Use the Reports page to perform the following tasks:

• To generate a new replication report, click Generate New.
• To download the most recently generated replication report, click
Download Current.
Save the replication report to your local workstation, and then unzip
the downloaded file. The report consists of a ZIP file that contains
multiple CSV (comma separated value) files. To view the CSV files,
open them in a compatible spreadsheet application.

170 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7
DXi6902 Status

The Status page allows you to view status information for the DXi6902
hardware as well as performance and disk usage information.

Note: Status information is gathered by the system every two

minutes.

To access the Status pages, click the Status menu.

The Status pages contains the following tabs:
• Hardware
• Performance
• Disk Usage
• VTL Status
• OST Status
• Activity Log

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 171

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Hardware

Hardware
The Hardware page allows you to view information about the hardware
components of the DXi6902. You can view the overall status of the node
as well as detailed status information for components such as the
system board, host bus adapters, network ports, and storage arrays.
To access the Hardware page, click the Status menu, and then click the
Hardware tab.
The Hardware page contains the following tabs:
• Summary
• Details
• Firmware Version

Summary The Hardware Summary page allows you to view the overall status of
the node and its main components. The system and each component
can have one of the following statuses:
• Normal - (Green) The hardware is operating correctly.
• Attention - (Yellow) There is a problem with the hardware.
• Failed - (Red) The hardware has failed.
To access the Hardware Summary page, on the Hardware page, click
the Summary tab (see Figure 94).

172 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Hardware

Figure 94 Hardware Summary

Page

The Hardware Summary page displays the following information:

• Available System Memory (RAM) - The total amount of memory
(RAM) installed in the system.
• Free System Memory (RAM) - The amount of system memory
(RAM) that is currently free.
• State - The status of the node.
• Status - The overall status of all components in the node.
• Component Name - The name of the main component.
Click the component name to see detailed information (see Details
on page 173).
• Component Status - The overall status of the main component.

Details The Details page allows you to view detailed information about the
hardware components of the DXi6902.
To access the Details page, on the Hardware page, click the Details tab.
Use the Details page to view information for the following components:
• System Board
• Host Bus Adapters
• Network Ports

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 173

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Hardware

• Storage Arrays

System Board
The System Board page allows you to view information reported by the
main system board in the node, such as temperature, voltage, fan, and
power supply information.
To access the System Board page, on the Details page, click the System
Board tab (see Figure 95).

Figure 95 System Board Page

The System Board page displays the following information:

• Component - The name of the component on the system board.
• Type - The component type (Sensor, Fan, or Power Supply).
• Value - The value reported by the sensor or component.
• Status - The status of the component.
• Normal - (Green) The component is operating correctly.
• Attention - (Yellow) There is a problem with the component.
• Failed - (Red) The component has failed.

174 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Hardware

Host Bus Adapters

The Host Bus Adapters page allows you to view information about
installed Fibre Channel or SAS cards and their ports.
To access the Host Bus Adapters page, on the Details page, click the
Host Bus Adapters tab (see Figure 96).

Figure 96 Host Bus Adapters

Page

The Host Bus Adapters section displays the following information

about each Fibre Channel or SAS card:
• Component - The name of the Fibre Channel or SAS card.
Click the name of the card to view detailed information for the card
below.
• Status - The status of the Fibre Channel or SAS card.
• Normal - (Green) The component is operating correctly.
• Attention - (Yellow) There is a problem with the component.
• Failed - (Red) The component has failed.
The Fibre Channel Controller or SAS HBA section displays the
following information about the ports in the selected Fibre Channel or
SAS controller:
• Component - The number of the Fibre Channel or SAS port.
• Value - The throughput capacity of the port (if connected).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 175

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Hardware

• Status - The status of the port.

• Up - (Green) The port is connected.
• Down - (Green) The port is not connected.

Network Ports
The Network Ports page allows you to view information about Ethernet
ports in the system. The DXi6902 includes three or more Ethernet ports
(depending on the configuration).
To access the Network Ports page, on the Details page, click the
Network Ports tab (see Figure 97).

Figure 97 Network Ports Page

The Network Ports page displays the following information:

• Component - The number of Ethernet port.
• Value - The speed of the port in Mb/s.
• Status - The status of the Ethernet port.
• Up - (Green) The port is connected.
• Down - (Green) The port is not connected.

176 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Hardware

Storage Arrays
The Storage Arrays page allows you to view information about storage
arrays and controllers in the DXi6902.
To access the Storage Arrays page, on the Details page, click the
Storage Arrays tab (see Figure 98).

Figure 98 Storage Arrays Page

The Storage Arrays section displays the following information about

each storage array:
• Component - The name of the storage array.
Click the name of the storage array to view detailed information for
the array in the Component section.
• Status - The status of the storage array.
• Normal - (Green) The component is operating correctly.
• Attention - (Yellow) There is a problem with the component.
• Failed - (Red) The component has failed.
The Components section displays the following information about the
components in the selected storage array:
• Component - The name of the component.
Click the name of the component to view detailed information for
the component in the subcomponent section.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 177

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Hardware

• Count - The number of that component type in the system.

• Status - The status of the component.
• Normal - (Green) The component is operating correctly.
• Attention - (Yellow) There is a problem with the component.
• Failed - (Red) The component has failed.
The subcomponent section displays the following information about the
subcomponents in the selected component:
• Component - The name of the subcomponent.
• Location - The location of the subcomponent within the system.
• Value - The value reported by the subcomponent.
• Status - The status of the subcomponent.
• Normal - (Green) The component is operating correctly.
• Attention - (Yellow) There is a problem with the component.
• Failed - (Red) The component has failed.

Firmware Version The Firmware Version page allows you to view information about
hardware components installed in the DXi6902, such as the firmware
version, hardware revision, and manufacturer.
To access the Firmware Version page, on the Hardware page, click the
Firmware Version tab (see Figure 99).

178 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Hardware

Figure 99 Firmware Version

Page

The Firmware Version page displays the following information:

• Name - Displays a hardware component or a property of the
component (for example, Manufacturer, Version, or Release Date).

Note: The properties that are listed vary depending on the

hardware component.

• Firmware Version - The value of the corresponding item in the

Name column (for example, the specific manufacturer, version
number, or release date for the item).
Click Update to refresh the table with the latest information.

Note: In some cases, when updating firmware versions, the remote

management console may time out and then return to the
Home page. If this occurs, simply navigate back to the Status
> Hardware > Firmware Version page to see the updated
information.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 179

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Performance

Performance
The Performance page allows you to view information about system
performance, including inline throughput, network throughput, read/
write throughput, and CPU usage.
To access the Performance page, click the Status menu, and then click
the Performance tab.
The Performance page contains the following tabs:
• Inline
• Ethernet
• RAID
• Fibre Channel
• CPU

Inline The Inline page allows you to view throughput performance for inline
data flow. Inline data flow includes deduplicated and non-deduplicated
backup data as well as received replication data.
To access the Inline page, on the Performance page, click the Inline tab
(see Figure 100).

180 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Performance

Figure 100 Inline Page

Use the Inline page to display recent inline data flow activity in a
dynamic graph:
• Select the amount of time to display in the Last list (1–24 hours).
• The horizontal axis displays time (in minutes).
• The vertical access displays inline throughput (0–2,000 MB/s).

Note: The range represented by the Y-axis changes based on the

maximum value, increasing in 200 MB increments as
needed.

• Each bar on the graph represents approximately 1 minute of time.

• Hold the cursor over a bar to display the value of the bar.

Ethernet The Ethernet page allows you to view throughput performance for
network send and receive activity.
To access the Ethernet page, on the Performance page, click the
Ethernet tab (see Figure 101).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 181

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Performance

Figure 101 Ethernet Page

Use the Ethernet page to display recent network activity in dynamic

graphs:
• The top graph reports data received and the bottom graph reports
data sent.
• Select the port to monitor in the Ethernet drop-down box, or select
Avg to display an average of all ports.
• The horizontal axis displays time (0–100 seconds).
• The vertical axis displays data throughput (0–125 MB/s for 1 GbE
ports or 0–1.25 GB/s for 10 GbE ports).
• Values that exceed the maximum value of the vertical axis are
shown in lighter green.
• Each bar on the graph represents approximately 1 second of time.
• Hold the cursor over a bar to display the value of the bar.

182 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Performance

RAID The RAID page allows you to view throughput performance for RAID
read and write activity.
To access the RAID page, on the Performance page, click the RAID tab
(see Figure 102).

Figure 102 RAID Page

Use the RAID page to display recent RAID activity in dynamic graphs:
• The top graph reports data reads and the bottom graph reports
data writes.
• The horizontal axis displays time (0–100 seconds).
• The vertical axis displays the amount of data read or written (100
OPS/s).
• Values that exceed the maximum value of the vertical axis are
shown in lighter green.
• Each bar on the graph represents approximately 1 second of time.
• Hold the cursor over a bar to display the value of the bar.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 183

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Performance

Fibre Channel The Fibre Channel page allows you to view throughput performance
for Fibre Channel send and receive activity.
To access the Fibre Channel page, on the Performance page, click the
Fibre Channel tab (see Figure 74).

Figure 103 Fibre Channel Page

Use the Fibre Channel page to display recent fibre channel activity in
dynamic graphs:
• The top graph reports data received and the bottom graph reports
data sent.
• Select the port to monitor in the Fibre Channel drop-down box, or
select Avg to display an average of all ports.
• The horizontal axis displays time (0–100 seconds).
• The vertical axis displays data throughput (0–500 MB/s).
• Values that exceed the maximum value of the vertical axis are
shown in lighter green.

184 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Performance

• Each bar on the graph represents approximately 1 second of time.

• Hold the cursor over a bar to display the value of the bar.

CPU The CPU page allows you to view CPU usage.

To access the CPU page, on the Performance page, click the CPU tab
(see Figure 104).

Figure 104 CPU Page

Use the CPU page to display recent CPU usage in a dynamic graph:
• Select the CPU core to monitor in the CPU drop-down box, or select
Avg to display an average of all CPUs.

Note: The CPU drop-down box lists all CPU threads. Each hyper-
threaded CPU core counts as two threads.

• The horizontal axis displays time (0–100 seconds).

• The vertical axis displays CPU usage (0–100%).
• Each bar on the graph represents approximately 1 second of time.
• Hold the cursor over a bar to display the value of the bar.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 185

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Disk Usage

Disk Usage
The Disk Usage page allows you to view information about free and
used disk space on the system. You can also view data reduction
statistics.
To access the Disk Usage page, click the Status menu, and then click
the Disk Usage tab (see Figure 105).

Figure 105 Disk Usage Page

Use the Disk Usage page to view the following information:

• Available
• Used
• Data Before Reduction
• Data After Reduction

Available Available space is the area that is available for data storage. The
Available value is displayed as an amount and as a percentage of the
total capacity in the system.

186 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Disk Usage

Available space is divided into the following categories:

• Free Space - The disk space that can be used for new deduplicated
or non-deduplicated data.
• Reclaimable Space - The disk space that is occupied by outdated
deduplicated data and which will be automatically reused if
additional space for new deduplicated data is needed.

Note: For optimal system performance, Quantum recommends

keeping the amount of Available disk space at 20% or more.

Used Used space is the area that already holds data. The Used value is
displayed as an amount and as a percentage of the total capacity in the
system.
Used space is divided into the following categories:
• Deduplicated Data - The amount of data that has been
deduplicated.
• Data Not Intended For Deduplication - The amount of data that
will not be deduplicated (data on shares or partitions that do not
have deduplication enabled).
• System Metadata - The amount of disk space used for internal
operations of the DXi, including system configuration files as well as
temporary files created during replication, space reclamation, and
healthchecks.

Data Before Reduction The Data Before Reduction value represents the original, native size of
all data that has been processed by the data deduplication and
compression engines.
Data before reduction is divided into the following categories:
• Incoming Replication - The amount of data stored on the DXi via
replication from another DXi. This does not include incoming data
from Directory/File or Cartridge Based Replication, or incoming data
from Failback replication.
• NFS Deduplicated Shares - The amount of data stored in
deduplicated shares configured in Network File System (NFS) format

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 187

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
VTL Status

for Linux systems. This includes incoming data from Directory/File

Based Replication, and incoming data from Failback replication.
• CIFS Deduplicated Shares - The amount of data stored in
deduplicated shares configured in Common Internet File System
(CIFS), also known as Server Message Block (SMB), format for
Windows systems. This includes incoming data from Directory/File
Based Replication, and incoming data from Failback replication.
• Deduplicated Partitions - The amount of data stored in
deduplicated partitions. This includes incoming data from Cartridge
Based Replication, and incoming data from Failback replication.
• OST Storage Servers - The amount of data stored in deduplicated
OpenStorage (OST) storage servers. This includes incoming data for
OST and DXi Accent.

Data After Reduction The Data After Reduction value represents the final, reduced size of all
data that has been processed by the data deduplication and
compression engines.
Data after reduction is divided into the following categories:
• Total Reduction Ratio - The total reduction ratio of all data that has
been processed by the data deduplication and compression engines
(Data Before Reduction divided by Data After Reduction).
• Deduplication Ratio - The deduplication ratio of all data that has
been processed by the data deduplication engine.
• Compression Ratio - The compression ratio of all data that has
been processed by the compression engine.

VTL Status
The VTL Status page allows you to view information about virtual tape
library (VTL) components, including tape drives, storage slots, and
cartridges. You can view a physical or logical representation of VTL
components, or view VTL performance statistics.

188 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
VTL Status

Note: For information about creating VTLs, see Adding a VTL Partition
on page 230.

To access the VTL Status page, click the Status menu, and then click the
VTL tab.
The VTL Status page contains the following tabs:
• Physical View
• Logical View
• Performance View

Physical View The Physical View page allows you to view a physical representation of
the virtual components in a VTL. You can view information about virtual
tapes drives, storage slots, and cartridges.
To access the Physical View page, on the VTL Status page, click the
Physical View tab (see Figure 106).

Figure 106 Physical View Page

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 189

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
VTL Status

Use the controls in the VTL Physical View Information section to select
the information to display:
• Select the VTL to display in the Partition drop-down box.
• Click Hide Drives or Show Drives to hide or show the virtual tape
drives in the VTL (see Tape Drives on page 190).
• Click Hide Storage Slots or Show Storage Slots to hide or show
the virtual storage slots in the VTL (see Storage and I/E Slots on
page 190).
• Click Hide I/E Slots or Show I/E Slots to hide or show the virtual I/E
slots in the VTL (see Storage and I/E Slots on page 190).

Tape Drives
The Tape Drives section displays information about virtual tape drives in
the VTL:
• If a cartridge is mounted in the tape drive, the barcode of the
cartridge displays beneath the drive.
• Click a tape drive to view detailed information about the drive.

Storage and I/E Slots

The Storage Slots and I/E Slots sections displays information about the
virtual cartridges located in the storage and I/E slots:
• The following information is displayed for each cartridge:
• Slot - The slot where the cartridge is located.
• Barcode - The barcode of the cartridge.
• WP - The write protect status of the cartridge.
• Capacity - The capacity of the cartridge.
• Used - The amount of space on the cartridge currently used to
store data. The value for Used might be less than the original,
native (raw) data size because the data is compressed before it
is written to the media.
• Used Percent - The amount of currently used space on the
cartridge expressed as a percentage of the total capacity
( [ Used / Capacity ] x 100 ).

190 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
VTL Status

• Click a cartridge to view detailed information about the cartridge.

• When the storage system is degraded, all tape cartridges are shown
in a degraded state.
• When the storage system has failed or is inaccessible due to failure,
all tape cartridges are shown as unavailable.

Logical View Use the Logical View page to view information about the virtual
(logical) components in a VTL partition. You can also view information
about used space in the partition.
To access the Logical View page, on the VTL Status page, click the
Logical View tab (see Figure 107).

Figure 107 Logical View Page

The Partitions section displays the following information about VTL

partitions:
• Partition - The name of the partition.
• Number of Drives - The number of virtual tape drives in the
partition.
• Capacity - The storage capacity of the partition.
• Used - The amount of space on all cartridges in the partition
currently used to store data. The value for Used might be less than

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 191

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
VTL Status

the original, native (raw) data size because the data is compressed
before it is written to the media.
• Used Percent - The amount of currently used space on all cartridges
in the partition expressed as a percentage of the total capacity
( [ Used / Capacity ] x 100 ).

Note: Click the Information button [i] next to a partition to display

detailed information about the partition.

Performance View Use the Performance View page to view information about the
throughput of VTL partitions. You can also view performance for virtual
tape drives.
To access the Performance View page, on the VTL Status page, click
the Performance View tab (see Figure 108).

Figure 108 Performance View

Page

The Partition Throughput section displays the following information

about VTL partitions:
• Partition - The name of the partition.

192 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
OST Status

Click the partition name to display the tape drives in the partition.
Click a tape drive to see individual performance information for that
drive.
• Performance (write) - The average write speed to the partition in
MB/s.

Note: Click the Information button [i] next to a partition to display

detailed information about the partition. Click a tape drive to
view detailed information about the drive.

OST Status
Use the OST Status page to view statistics for OST optimized
duplication and DXi Accent activity that occurred in the previous
minute.

Note: DXi Accent statistics display only if DXi Accent is currently

enabled or was previously enabled (see DXi Accent on
page 296).

To access the OST Status page, click the Status menu, and then click the
OST tab (see Figure 109).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 193

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
OST Status

Figure 109 OST Status Page

Combined statistics for all media servers display at the top of each
section (Optimized Duplication and Accent):
• Inline - The inline data flow throughput (in MB/s). Inline data flow
represents the original, native size of the data protected by the DXi.
• Ethernet In - The amount of data received by all Ethernet ports (in
MB/s). This amount represents the reduced size of the data
protected by the DXi (after deduplication and compression on the
media servers).
• Bandwidth Reduction - The percentage by which network
bandwidth utilization was reduced by using optimized duplication
or enabling Accent.
Statistics for individuals media servers display in the tables in each
section (Optimized Duplication and Accent):
• Media Server - The IP address of the media server.
• Inline - The inline data flow throughput (in MB/s). Inline data flow
represents the original, native size of the data protected by the DXi.
• Ethernet In - The amount of data received by all Ethernet ports (in
MB/s). This amount represents the reduced size of the data
protected by the DXi (after deduplication and compression on the
media server).

194 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Activity Log

• Bandwidth Reduction - The percentage by which network

bandwidth utilization was reduced by using optimized duplication
or enabling Accent.

Activity Log
The Activity Log page allows you to view a record of all activities
performed by administrative and service users in the past 90 days. You
can view the user who performed the activity, the time the activity was
performed, and other information. You can also download the activity
log to an XML file.
To access the Activity Log page, click the Status menu, and then click
the Logs tab (see Figure 110).

Figure 110 Activity Log Page

Activity log toolbar

Navigation controls

Use the Activity Log page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about activities that have been recorded in the log
(see Viewing Logged Activities on page 196).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 195

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Activity Log

• Enable or disable the recording of activities in the log (see Enabling

or Disabling Activity Logging on page 197).
• Delete one or more activities from the log (see Deleting Logged
Activities on page 198).
• Download the activity log in XML format (see Downloading the
Activity Log on page 198).

Viewing Logged The Administrative Activity Log list displays the following information
Activities for each entry:
• User - The user that performed the activity (Administrator,
Monitor, Service, Engineering, cliadmin, or root).
• Date/Time - The date and time the activity was performed.
• Origin - The interface where the activity originated. Possible origins
are the GUI (remote management console) or the CLI (command
line interface).
• Action - The type of activity performed (Create, Update, or Delete).
• Category - The category of the activity (Alert, Analyzer, Cluster,
Date Time, Email, Event, Hard Drive Security, Healthcheck, NAS,
Network, OST, PTT, Replication, Security, SNMP, Utility, or VTL).
• Role - The role of the user that performed the activity (Admin).
• Summary - Details about the activity that was performed, including
CLI commands and field values.

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Note: To rearrange the order of the columns, click and drag a column
heading left or right. To show or hide columns, click the arrow
to the right of a column heading. In the pop-up menu, point to
Columns, then select the name of a column to show or hide it.

196 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Activity Log

Navigating in the Activity Log

Use the controls at the bottom of the Administrative Activity Log list
to adjust the activity log view (see Figure 111):
• To navigate between pages in the list, use the left and right arrows.
• To view a specific page, type the page number in the box.
• To update the activity log with latest data, click the Refresh icon.

Figure 111 Activity Log View Page navigation

Controls
Refresh

Enter page number

Enabling or Disabling By default, activity logging is enabled on the DXi6902. Use the toolbar
Activity Logging above the Administrative Activity Log list to enable or disable activity
logging (see Figure 112).
• To enable the logging of administrative and service actions, click
Enable Logging on the toolbar.
• To disable the logging of administrative and service actions, click
Disable Logging on the toolbar.
• To update the activity log with latest data, click Refresh on the
toolbar.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 197

Chapter 7: DXi6902 Status
Activity Log

Figure 112 Activity Log View Delete selected log entry

Controls
Refresh the log

Delete all log entries

Enable or disable activity logging

Download log as XML

Deleting Logged Use the toolbar above the Administrative Activity Log list to delete
Activities one or more entries in the activity log (see Figure 112).
• To delete a log entry, select the entry and click Delete.
• To delete all entries in the activity log, click Delete All.

Downloading the Use the toolbar above the Administrative Activity Log list to save the
Activity Log activity log in XML format (see Figure 112). You can then open the log
file in another program that is compatible with XML.
To download the activity log, click Download Log. Specify a location to
save the file, and then click OK or Save.

198 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 8
DXi6902 Alerts

The Alerts page allows you to view and work with administration alerts
and service tickets. The DXi6902 generates administration alerts and
service tickets when a hardware or software event occurs.
To access the Alerts page, click the Alerts menu.
The Alerts page contains the following tabs:
• Admin Alerts
• Service Tickets

Admin Alerts
The Admin Alerts page allows you to view and work with
administration alerts. The DXi6902 generates an administration alert
when the condition of the system has changed, such as going from the
offline state to the online state.

Note: In addition to viewing administration alerts on the Admin

Alerts page, you can configure the system to send alerts to an
e-mail address (see Recipients on page 352).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 199

Chapter 8: DXi6902 Alerts
Admin Alerts

To access the Admin Alerts page, click the Alerts menu, and then click
the Admin Alerts tab (see Figure 113).

Figure 113 Admin Alerts Page

The Admin Alerts page displays the following information about

administration alerts:
• Alert - The name of the administration alert.
• Library - The library or partition where the admin alert was
generated.
• Last Update - The date when the administration alert was last
updated by the system.
• Summary - A brief description of the administration alert.

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Use the Admin Alerts page to perform the following tasks:

• To view details about an administration alert, click the alert name.
Detailed information about the alert appears in the Activity Status
History section.
• To delete an administration alert, select it and click Delete.

200 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 8: DXi6902 Alerts
Service Tickets

Service Tickets
The DXi6902 has the capability to automatically detect and resolve
problems encountered by the system during operation. If a problem
cannot be resolved automatically and requires user intervention or
servicing, the system generates a service ticket.
A service ticket contains detailed information about the problem and, if
appropriate, steps you can take to resolve it. If the DXi6902 detects that
the problem is resolved, the system automatically closes the service
ticket. You can also manually close a service ticket after the problem is
corrected.

Note: Tickets that are not resolved are generated again after 24
hours.

See the following sections for more information about service tickets:
• Service Ticket Priority
• Recommended Actions
• Working With Service Tickets

Service Ticket Priority The system assigns each service ticket a priority based on the criticality
of the problem that caused the system to generate the ticket. There are
three priority levels:
• Low - A minor problem occurred and needs to be resolved, but the
operation and performance of the DXi6902 are not significantly
affected.
• Middle - A serious problem occurred and needs to be resolved, but
it does not necessarily need to be fixed immediately. The operation
and performance of the DXi6902 may be degraded.
• High - A critical problem has occurred and needs to be resolved
immediately. The operation and performance of the DXi6902 are
degraded, and there is a risk of system failure or data loss.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 201

Chapter 8: DXi6902 Alerts
Service Tickets

Recommended Actions If appropriate, a service ticket includes recommended actions. The

recommended actions provide instructions for resolving the problem
that caused the system to generate the ticket.
Perform the recommended actions to try to resolve the problem before
contacting Quantum customer support. If you are able to resolve the
problem, you can close the service ticket.

Note: The recommended actions should be performed by a user who

is familiar with operating the DXi6902.

Working With Service The Service Tickets page allows you to view and work with service
Tickets tickets.
To access the Service Tickets page, click the Alerts menu, and then click
the Service Tickets tab (see Figure 114).

Figure 114 Service Tickets

Page

The Service Tickets page displays the following information about open
service tickets:
• Ticket - The service ticket number.
• Request ID - The Request ID of the ticket.
• State - The current status of the service ticket (Open or Closed).

202 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 8: DXi6902 Alerts
Service Tickets

• Priority - The priority level of the service ticket (Low, Middle, or

High).
• Last Update - The date when the service ticket was last updated by
the system.
• Details - A brief description of the service ticket.
• Close All - Click to close all open service tickets.
• Show Tickets - Select an option to display Open tickets, Closed
tickets, or All tickets.
• Get individual ticket - To display a specific ticket in the list, enter a
ticket number and click Apply.

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Use the Service Tickets page to perform the following tasks:

• View details for a service ticket, including recommended actions
(see Viewing a Service Ticket on page 203).
• Add information to a service ticket (see Modifying a Service Ticket
on page 205).
• Send a service ticket to an e-mail address (see Sending a Service
Ticket on page 206).
• Close a service ticket that has been resolved (see Closing a Service
Ticket on page 207).

Viewing a Service Ticket

View a service ticket to see detailed information about the problem that
caused the system to generate the ticket and to view recommended
actions.
To view a service ticket:
1 In the list of service tickets, click the ticket number.
The Ticket Details section at the bottom of the page displays
information about the service ticket, including the time the ticket
was opened and closed, the ticket status, and detailed information
about the problem (see Figure 115).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 203

Chapter 8: DXi6902 Alerts
Service Tickets

Note: The time indicated in the service ticket may not match the
DXi6902 system time.

Figure 115 Ticket Details

Ticket Details

View Recommended
Actions

2 (Optional) Click View Recommended Actions to view instructions

for resolving the problem.
The recommended actions display in a new Web browser window
(see Figure 116). Follow the instructions to resolve the problem.
When you are finished, click the close button [x] on the upper right
corner of the window.

204 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 8: DXi6902 Alerts
Service Tickets

Figure 116 Recommended

Actions

Modifying a Service Ticket

Modify a service ticket to add additional information to the ticket, for
example, troubleshooting steps you have taken or a record of calls made
to Quantum customer support. The additional information is saved with
the service ticket and remains associated with the ticket even after it is
closed.
To modify a service ticket:
1 In the list of service tickets, click the ticket number.
2 Click Analysis at the bottom of the page.
The Ticket Analysis section displays at the bottom of the page (see
Figure 117).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 205

Chapter 8: DXi6902 Alerts
Service Tickets

Figure 117 Ticket Analysis

Ticket Analysis

3 In the Analysis Information box, enter all relevant information

about actions taken to resolve the issue.
4 Click Apply.

Sending a Service Ticket

Send a service ticket to send the ticket details to an e-mail address. You
can also add optional comments to the e-mail.

Note: To enable the DXi6902 to send e-mail, you must specify an

outgoing e-mail server (see Server on page 357).

To send a service ticket:

1 In the list of service tickets, click the ticket number.
2 Click Email at the bottom of the page.
The Email Ticket Information section displays at the bottom of the
page (see Figure 118).

206 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 8: DXi6902 Alerts
Service Tickets

Figure 118 Email Ticket

Information

Email Ticket

3 In the Email Recipient box, enter the e-mail address where you
want to send the ticket details.
4 (Optional) In the Comment box, enter additional information to
send with the ticket.
5 Click Send.

Closing a Service Ticket

Close a service ticket if the problem the caused the system to generate
the ticket is resolved. You can also close all service tickets that are
currently open.

Note: You can still view and modify a ticket after it has been closed.

To close all service tickets that are currently open, below the list of
service tickets, click Close All.
To close a single service ticket:
1 In the list of service tickets, click the ticket number.
2 Click Analysis at the bottom of the page.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 207

Chapter 8: DXi6902 Alerts
Service Tickets

The Ticket Analysis section displays at the bottom of the page (see
Figure 117).
3 Select the Close Ticket check box.
4 Click Apply.

208 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9
DXi6902 Configuration

The Configuration page allows you to configure the features of the

DXi6902, including storage presentation, data replication, path to tape,
system settings, and notifications.
To access the Configuration page, click the Configuration menu.
The Configuration page contains the following tabs:
• NAS
• VTL
• Replication Configuration
• OST (including DXi Accent with OST)
• PTT
• Scheduler
• System
• Notifications
• Contacts

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 209

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

NAS
The NAS page allows you to configure the DXi6902 to present its
storage capacity as NAS (network attached storage) shares that are
compatible with standard backup applications. You can create NAS
shares for use with Windows or Linux networks. You can also join the
DXi6902 to a Windows domain or workgroup and manage users.

Note:

Note: The NAS wizard provides guided assistance for configuring

NAS shares (see DXi6902 Configuration Wizards on page 61).

Caution: Filenames on NAS shares are limited to a length of 256

bytes. If a filename uses Japanese characters, the filename
can be no longer than 85 characters. This is because each
Japanese character is represented by 3 bytes.

To access the NAS page, click the Configuration menu, and then click
the NAS tab.
The NAS page contains the following tabs:
• NAS Summary
• Windows Domain
• Share Access
• Advanced Setting

NAS Summary The NAS Summary page allows you to manage NAS shares on the
DXi6902. You can view information about existing shares, add or edit
shares, and delete shares.
To access the NAS Summary page, on the NAS page, click the
Summary tab (see Figure 119).

210 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

Figure 119 NAS Summary

Page

Use the NAS page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about existing NAS shares (see NAS Shares List on
page 211).
• Add a new NAS share to the system (see Adding a NAS Share on
page 213).
• Edit properties for an existing NAS share (see Editing a NAS Share
on page 214).
• Delete a NAS share from the system (see Deleting a NAS Share on
page 216).

NAS Shares List

The NAS Shares List section displays the following information for all
NAS shares on the DXi6902:
• Shares - The number of shares that have been added to the system.
• Maximum - The maximum number of shares that can be added to
the system.
• NFS - The number of existing shares configured to use the NFS
protocol (for Linux networks).
• CIFS - The number of existing shares configured to use the CIFS
protocol (for Windows networks).
• Share Name - The name of the share.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 211

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

• Protocol - The protocol (CIFS or NFS) the share is configured to use.

For NFS shares, the Protocol column displays the commit type of
the share (sync for synchronous or async for asynchronous). For
information about changing the commit type of NFS shares, see the
DXi-Series Command Line Interface (CLI) Guide (6-67081).
• Export Path - The export path of the share (different for CIFS and
NFS shares).
• Permissions - The permissions in use on the share (Read & Write or
Read Only).
• Access - The access type of the share (all hosts or specific users).
• Deduplication - The data deduplication state of the share (Enabled
or Disabled).
• Replication - The current state of replication for the share:
• Enabled - Replication is enabled.
• Send/Receive Sync ID - Directory/File Based Replication is
enabled.
• Configure - Click to configure replication for the share (see
Editing a NAS Share on page 214)
• Scheduled - Replication is scheduled for the share. Click to view
or modify the schedule (see Scheduling a Share or Partition for
Replication on page 309).
• Targets - The targets the share is configured to replicate to.
• Description - A brief description of the NAS share (if available).

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Note: Click the Information button [i] next to a share to display

detailed information about the share and recent replication
activity.

212 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

Adding a NAS Share

Add a NAS share to present the storage capacity of the DXi6902 as a
NAS share that is compatible with standard backup applications. You
can add up to 128 shares. When you add a share, you must specify
whether it uses the NFS protocol (for Linux networks) or the CIFS
protocol (for Windows networks).

Note: If you are adding a CIFS share for use with a Windows network,
you must configure the Windows domain before adding the
new share (see Windows Domain on page 217).

To add a NAS share:

1 Click Add.
The Add NAS Share page displays (see Figure 120).

Figure 120 Add NAS Share

Page

2 Under NAS Share Settings, enter information about the share:

• Name - Enter the name of the NAS share.

Note: NAS share names are not case-sensitive. For example, if

you create a share named nas1, you cannot create
another share named NAS1 because the system
considers the names to be the same.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 213

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the share.

• Hide from network browsing - (CIFS shares only) Select the
check box to hide the share from network browsing. If selected,
you cannot see the share when browsing the network.
• Enable data deduplication - Select the check box to enable
data deduplication. Quantum recommends that you enable
data deduplication to optimize disk usage.

Note: Data deduplication is enabled by default. You cannot

enable or disable data deduplication after the share is
added. If data duplication is disabled, then data
compression is also disabled.

• Export Protocol - Select the export protocol for the share:

• CIFS - Select the CIFS option to use the share on a Windows
network.
• NFS - Select the NFS option to use the share on a UNIX or
Linux network.
3 (Optional) Under Replication Settings, specify replication settings.
For more information about configuring replication for a share, or
to set up replication for the share at a later time, see DXi6902
Replication on page 119.
4 Click Apply.

Note: When you create a CIFS share, the initial permissions are the
same as the default permissions for a Windows 2003 share
with the addition of an ACE (Access Control Entry) that permits
full access to the share for all authenticated users.
Administrators can choose to remove this full access ACE, set
up custom permissions, or leave the ACL (Access Control List)
as it is if the server is set up in a fully trusted environment.

Editing a NAS Share

Edit a NAS share to modify the settings for the share, for example, to
change the description of the share or to select different options.
To edit a NAS share:

214 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

1 Select the share and click Edit.

The Edit NAS Share & Replication Settings page displays (see
Figure 121).

Figure 121 Edit NAS Share &

Replication Settings Page

2 Under NAS Share Settings, enter information about the share:

Note: If you are editing a share, only the Description, Enforce

read-only access, Hide from network browsing, and
Allow all users to access this share options can be
changed.

• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the share.

• Enforce read-only access - Select the check box to make the
share read only. If selected, you cannot write to the share.
• Hide from network browsing - (CIFS shares only) Select the
check box to hide the share from network browsing. If selected,
you cannot see the share when browsing the network.
• Allow all users/hosts to access this share - Select this check
box to allow all users (CIFS shares) or hosts (NFS shares) to
access the share.
Or clear the check box to allow only specified users or hosts to
access the share. To add a user or host to the access list, click
Add. Specify the Workgroup User (CIFS shares) or the

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 215

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

Hostname or IP Address (NFS shares) and the associated

permissions (Read Only or Read & Write), and then click Apply.

Note: To modify the users that are available in the

Workgroup User list, see Share Access on page 220.

Note: After you add a user or host to the access list, you
cannot change their permissions. Instead, select the
user or host in the access list and click Delete to
remove them from the list. Then add the user or host
again with the correct permissions.

3 (Optional) Under Replication Settings, specify replication settings.

For more information about configuring replication for a share, or
to set up replication for the share at a later time, see DXi6902
Replication on page 119.
4 Click Apply.

Note: If you modify a NAS share that uses the CIFS protocol, you
must restart the CIFS service for the changes to take effect. To
restart the CIFS service, first disjoin the Windows workgroup,
then join it again (see Windows Domain on page 217).
Restarting the CIFS service will close all active connections to
the share. Most Windows workstations will automatically
reconnect, but some applications may be affected.

Deleting a NAS Share

Delete a NAS share if it is no longer needed. When you delete a share, all
data stored on the share is lost, and any schedules associated with the
share are deleted.

Note: If you delete a share configured for Directory/File Based

Replication on the source DXi, the share is not automatically
deleted on the target DXi. If you do not want to retain the
share on the target DXi, you can manually delete it.

To delete a NAS share:

1 Select the share and click Delete.

216 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

Note: You can select multiple shares to delete at once.

2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

Windows Domain The Windows Domain page allows you to join the DXi6902 to a
Windows workgroup or a Windows domain using SMB. To use a NAS
share configured for the CIFS protocol on a Windows network, you must
first join the DXi6902 to a workgroup or a domain. After you join the
DXi6902 to a workgroup or a domain, CIFS shares are available for use
on the Windows network.
To access the Windows Domain page, on the NAS page, click the
Windows Domain tab (see Figure 122).

Figure 122 Windows Domain

Page

Use the Windows Domain page to perform the following tasks:

• Join the DXi6902 to a Windows workgroup (see Joining a Windows
Workgroup on page 218).
• Join the DXi6902 to a Windows domain (see Joining a Windows
Domain on page 218).
• Remove the DXi6902 from a Windows workgroup or domain (see
Disjoining a Workgroup or Domain on page 219).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 217

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

Joining a Windows Workgroup

Join a Windows workgroup to add the DXi6902 to a workgroup on a
Windows network. After you join a workgroup, CIFS shares are available
for use on the Windows network.
To join a Windows workgroup:
1 Enter the following information about the Windows domain:
• Domain Type - Select Workgroup.
• Domain/Workgroup Name - Enter the workgroup name.
The workgroup name can be the name of an existing
workgroup or a new workgroup (for example, Workgroup or
Sales).
2 Click Apply.

Note: When an SMB server is joined to a workgroup, share security is

managed directly from the remote management console. For a
CIFS share, security is provided through the read only or read/
write access to the share. By default, when a CIFS share is
created, the default security setting allows access for all users.
Any access restrictions on individual users can be managed by
editing a share on the NAS Summary page (see Editing a NAS
Share on page 214).

Joining a Windows Domain

Join a Windows domain to add the DXi6902 to a Windows network
using Active Directory. After you join a domain, CIFS shares are available
for use on the Windows network.
Before joining a Windows domain, make sure the date and time on the
DXi6902 is correct and is synchronized with the Active Directory Services
(ADS) server (see Date & Time on page 331). The time difference
between the DXi6902 and the ADS server (domain controller) must be
less than 300 seconds. Quantum recommends using the same NTP
server for the DXi6902 and the ADS server to keep them synchronized.
To join a Windows domain:
1 Enter the following information about the Windows domain:
• Domain Type - Select Active Directory.

218 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

• Domain/Workgroup Name - Enter the domain name.

• Primary Domain Controller - Select an option for the Primary
Domain Controller (PDC):
• Use DNS Discovery - Discover the PDC automatically.
• Specify Address - Enter the fully qualified name or the IP
address of the PDC.
• Organization Unit - (Optional) Enter the name of the
organizational unit in the domain.
The DXi6902 will become a member of this organization.
• Administrator Name - Enter Administrator or any user that
has the right to join the domain.
By default, any user belonging to the Administrators group or
the Domain Admins group has the right to join the domain. In
addition, any user can join the domain if they are specifically
delegated this right by a member of the Administrators group.
• Administrator Password - Enter the password for the user
entered above.
2 Click Apply.

Note: When the system is joined to the Active Directory domain,

share security is managed by the MMC (Microsoft Management
Console) that is running on the domain controller. By default,
when a CIFS share is created, the default security setting allows
access for all users. Any access restrictions on individual users
must be managed from the MMC.

Disjoining a Workgroup or Domain

Disjoin a workgroup or a domain to remove the DXi6902 from a
Windows workgroup or domain. After you disjoin the workgroup or
domain, CIFS shares are no longer available for use on the Windows
network
To disjoin a workgroup or domain, click Disjoin.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 219

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

Share Access The Share Access page allows you to manage workgroup users when
the DXi6902 is joined to a Windows workgroup, or manage share
administrators when the DXi6902 is joined to a Windows domain using
Active Directory. You can add users or administrators, change user
privileges, and delete users or administrators. Available users or
administrators can be granted access to NAS shares configured for the
CIFS protocol.

Note: You must join a Windows workgroup or domain before you can
add workgroup users or share administrators (see Windows
Domain on page 217). The Share Access page is different
depending on whether the DXi is joined to a workgroup or
domain.

To access the Share Access page, on the NAS page, click the Share
Access tab (see Figure 123 and Figure 124).

Figure 123 Share Access Page

(Windows Workgroup)

220 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

Figure 124 Share Access Page

(Active Directory)

Use the Share Access page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about workgroup users or share administrators
(see Workgroup Users or Share Administrators on page 221).
• Add a workgroup user or a share administrator (see Adding a
Workgroup User or Share Administrator on page 222).
• Edit a workgroup user (see Editing a Workgroup User on page 223).
• Delete a workgroup user or a share administrator (see Deleting a
Workgroup User or Share Administrator on page 225).

Workgroup Users or Share Administrators

If the DXi6902 is joined to a Windows workgroup, the Workgroup
Users section displays the following information about workgroup
users:
• Username - The name of the workgroup user.
• Administrator Privileges - The privileges of the workgroup user
(Yes if the user has administrator privileges, No if they do not.)
• Description - A brief description of the workgroup user (if
available).
If the DXi6902 is joined to a Windows domain using Active Directory,
the Share Administrators section displays the following information
about share administrators:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 221

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

• User or Group Name - The fully qualified name of the user or

group.

Adding a Workgroup User or Share Administrator

Add a workgroup user or share administrator to be able to grant that
user or administrator access to CIFS shares.

Windows Workgroup
To add a workgroup user for a Windows workgroup:
1 Click Add.
The Add Workgroup User page displays (see Figure 125).

Figure 125 Add Workgroup

User Page

2 Enter information about the workgroup user:

• User Name - Enter the name of the workgroup user.
• Password - Enter the password for the workgroup user.
• Confirm Password - Enter the password again to confirm it.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the
workgroup user.
• Grant Administrator Privileges - Select the check box to add
the workgroup user to the Windows Administrators group.

222 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

This allows the workgroup user to override certain permissions

settings and prevents the workgroup user from being locked
out of shares or directories.
3 Click Apply.
After you create a workgroup user, you can grant the user access to a
NAS share (see Editing a NAS Share on page 214).

Windows Domain
To add a share administrator for a Windows domain:
1 Click Add.
The Add Share Administrator page displays (see Figure 126).

Figure 126 Add Share

Administrator Page

2 Enter the Fully Qualified User or Group Name of the share

administrator.
3 Click Apply.
Use the MMC (Microsoft Management Console) to manage users (see
ADS Share Permissions on page 225).

Editing a Workgroup User

Edit a workgroup user to change the user's password or description, or
to change the user's administrator privileges.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 223

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

Note: You cannot edit a share administrator. Instead, delete the share
administrator, then add a new share administrator.

To edit a workgroup user:

1 Select the user and click Edit.
The Edit Workgroup User page displays (see Figure 127).

Figure 127 Edit Workgroup

User Page

2 Enter information about the workgroup user:

Note: If you are editing a workgroup user, you cannot change the
User Name.

• User Name - (Optional) Select a different workgroup user to

edit.
• Password - Enter the password for the workgroup user.
• Confirm Password - Enter the password again to confirm it.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the
workgroup user.
• Grant Administrator Privileges - Select the check box to add
the workgroup user to the Windows Administrators group.

224 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

This allows the workgroup user to override certain permissions

settings and prevents the workgroup user from being locked
out of shares or directories.
3 Click Apply.

Deleting a Workgroup User or Share Administrator

Delete a workgroup user or share administrator if the user or
administrator no longer needs to access CIFS shares.
To delete a workgroup user or share administrator, select the user or
administrator and click Delete.

Note: You can select multiple users or administrators to delete at

once.

ADS Share Permissions

To manage user access to CIFS shares when the DXi6902 is joined to a
Windows domain, use the MMC (Microsoft Management Console). Log
onto the MMC on the domain controller and access a share's properties
to set share permissions for users.

Note: In some cases, when you view file permissions on a Windows

system, you will not see the user and group information.
Instead you will see the SID (security ID) which appears as a
series of numbers. This occurs when you move files (for
example, using a backup utility or DOS xcopy) from one system
to another system, and the user and group from the source
system do not exist on the target system.

Often users and groups are unique to a particular scope, such

as a Windows system or an ADS domain. As a result, some
assigned permissions might not be available on the target
system because the associated user and group do not exist
there. However, common groups (for example,
Administrators, Users, and Everyone) are recognized on most
Windows systems and domains.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 225

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
NAS

Advanced Setting The Advanced Setting page allows you to enable or disable advanced
SMB settings.
To access the Advanced Setting page, on the NAS page, click the
Advanced Setting tab (see Figure 128).

Figure 128 Advanced Setting

Page

To enable or disable advanced SMB settings:

1 Select the check box to enable, or clear the check box to disable, the
following settings:
• Enable Opportunistic Locking - (Enabled by default)
Opportunistic locking lets clients lock files and locally cache
information without the risk of another user changing the file.
This increases performance for many file operations, but it may
decrease performance in other operations because the server
that grants the opportunistic lock must manage the breaking of
that lock when another user requests access to the file.

Note: System performance may decrease if Opportunistic

Locking is disabled.

• Enable SMB Server signing - (Disabled by default) SMB server

signing improves security on Windows networks by requiring
clients to provide a security signature to connect to a server. If
the DXi is joined to a Windows domain that is configured to
require signing, you should enable SMB server signing.

226 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

2 Click Apply.

VTL
The VTL page allows you to configure the DXi6902 to present its storage
capacity as VTL (virtual tape library) partitions that are compatible with
standard backup applications. You can add virtual tape drives and
storage slots to VTL partitions, as well as create and work with virtual
tape cartridges. You can also map partitions to hosts.

Note:

Note: The VTL wizard provides guided assistance for configuring VTL
partitions (see DXi6902 Configuration Wizards on page 61).

To access the VTL page, click the Configuration menu, and then click
the VTL tab.
The VTL page contains the following tabs:
• Partitions
• Media
• Remote Host Access

Partitions The Partitions page allows you to manage VTL partitions on the
DXi6902. Use partitions to allocate the DXi6902 virtual tape drives and
storage elements to separate partitions that can be accessed by
different host systems.
To access the Partitions page, on the VTL page, click the Partitions tab.
The Partitions page contains the following tabs:
• Partitions Summary
• Partitions General

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 227

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Partitions Summary
The Partitions Summary page allows you to view information about
existing partitions. You can also add or edit partitions, and delete
partitions.
To access the Partitions Summary page, on the Partitions page, click
the Summary tab (see Figure 129).

Figure 129 Partitions Summary

Page

Use the Partitions Summary page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about existing VTL partitions (see Partition List on
page 229).
• Add a new VTL partition to the system (see Adding a VTL Partition
on page 230).
• Edit properties for an existing VTL partition (see Editing a VTL
Partition on page 233).
• Delete a VTL partition from the system (see Deleting a VTL Partition
on page 235).
• Change the mode of a partition (see Changing Partition Mode on
page 236).

228 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Partition List
The Partition List section displays the following information for all VTL
partitions on the DXi6902:
• Available Partitions - The number of partitions that have been
added to the system and the maximum number of partitions that
can be added.
• Available Virtual Tape Drives - The number of virtual tape drives
that have been added to the system and the maximum number of
drives that can be added.
• Name - The name of the partition.
• Mode - The current mode of the partition (Online or Offline).
• Model - The library model emulated by the partition.
• Drive Model - The tape drive model emulated by the virtual drives
in the partition.
• Drives - The number of virtual tape drives in the partition.
• Host Mapping - The current state of host mapping for the partition
(Yes or No). If no hosts have been mapped, click Map to map hosts
to partitions (see Remote Host Mapping on page 246).
• Media - The number of virtual tape cartridges in the partition. If no
cartridges have been created, click Create to add media (see Media
Add on page 238).
• Slots - The number of storage slots in the partition.
• Deduplication - The data deduplication state of the partition
(Enabled or Disabled).
• Replication - The current state of replication for the partition:
• Enabled - Replication is enabled.
• Send/Receive Sync ID - Cartridge Based Replication is enabled.
• Configure - Click to configure replication for the partition (see
Editing a VTL Partition on page 233)
• Scheduled - Replication is scheduled for the partition. Click to
view or modify the schedule (see Scheduling a Share or Partition
for Replication on page 309).
• Targets - The targets the partition is configured to replicate to.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 229

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Note: Click the Information button [i] next to a partition to display

detailed information about the partition and recent replication
activity.

Adding a VTL Partition

Add a VTL partition to present the storage capacity of the DXi6902 as a
VTL partition that is compatible with standard backup applications. You
can add up to 64 partitions. When you add a partition, you must specify
the type of physical library to emulate and configure virtual tape drives
and storage slots.
The number of virtual tape drives (VTDs) totaled across all configured
partitions must not exceed a maximum value. The maximum number of
VTDs allowed varies depending on the system configuration:
• DXi6902 - 512 VTDs (no more than 160 VTDs active at any one
time)

Note: The maximum number of virtual tape drives allowed per VTL
partition is 80 VTDs.

Note: A license key for 160 VTDs is pre-installed on all DXi6902

models. To obtain a license for additional VTDs, contact your
Quantum Sales Representative.

A virtual tape drive is considered active if a cartridge is loaded in the

VTD. Make sure to configure the backup application software so that
the maximum number of active VTDs is not exceeded at any time.
Exceeding the maximum number of active VTDs may cause backup jobs
to time out.

Caution: Make sure the backup application on the host is configured

for the correct number of tape drives and storage slots
emulated by the VTL partition. If you do not, the backup
application might not operate correctly.

230 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Note: If you plan to replicate partitions to another DXi, make sure

that every partition name and barcode number on each DXi is
unique. There cannot be duplicate partition names or barcode
numbers on the DXi6902 or on a DXi receiving a replicated
partition.

To add a VTL partition:

1 Click Add.
The Add VTL Partition & Replication Settings page displays (see
Figure 130).

Figure 130 Add VTL Partition &

Replication Settings Page

2 Under Partition Settings, enter information about the partition:

• Name - Enter the name of the VTL partition.
• Library Model - Select the library model emulated by the
partition. The library model determines the inquiry string
returned to the host by the DXi6902. (The library model does
not restrict the number of slots or drives in a partition because
library emulation is not a representation of a physical library.)
The following library models are available:
• Quantum DXi7500

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 231

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

• ADIC Scalar 100, ADIC Scalar i2000, or ADIC Scalar i500

• ADIC Pathlight VX
• Quantum Scalar i40/i80 or Quantum Scalar i6000
• Quantum DXi6700, Quantum DXi6902, Quantum DXi6800,
Quantum DXi4700, Quantum DXi4601, QuantumDXi4500,
or Quantum DXi8500
• Quantum DX3000 or Quantum DX5000
• Quantum PX500 or Quantum PX720
• ATL M2500, ATL P1000, or ATL P7000
If you select a library such as the ATL P1000 or ATL P7000, the
DXi6902 appears as the selected library to the host and backup
application. If you select Quantum DXi6902, the host and
backup application recognize the device as a Quantum
DXi6902.

Note: Quantum recommends that you set the library model

to Quantum DXi6902 for best compatibility. If your
backup application does not support the Quantum
DXi6902 inquiry string, select a different library model.
Check your software compatibility guide to verify what
library models are supported.

• Number of Storage Slots - Enter the number of storage slots in

the partition (up to 9,000).

Note: One I/E slot is created for each storage slot up to a

maximum of 240 I/E slots.

• Virtual Tape Drive Model - Select the tape drive model

emulated by the virtual drives in the partition. All virtual tape
drives in a partition must be the same model.
The following tape drive models are available:
• Quantum DLT-S4, SDLT600, SDLT320, or DLT7000
• Certance LTO-2 and LTO-3
• IBM LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, or LTO-5
• HP LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, or LTO-5

232 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

• Number of Virtual Tape Drives - Enter the number of virtual

tape drives in the partition.

Note: If all tape drives are currently assigned to other

partitions, you must remove one or more tape drives
from an existing partition to make them available for
use in a new partition.

• Enable deduplication - Select the check box to enable data

deduplication. Quantum recommends that you enable data
deduplication to optimize disk usage.

Note: Data deduplication is enabled by default. You cannot

enable or disable data deduplication after the partition
is added. If data duplication is disabled, then data
compression is also disabled.

3 (Optional) Under Replication Settings, specify replication settings.

For more information about configuring replication for a partition,
or to set up replication for the partition at a later time, see DXi6902
Replication on page 119.
4 Click Apply.
After you add a partition, you must add media and map drives to a host
before the partition can be used for backups (see Media Add on
page 238 and Remote Host Mapping on page 246).

Editing a VTL Partition

Edit a VTL partition to modify the settings for the partition, for example,
to change the emulated library model or the number of storage slots
and virtual tape drives.
To edit a VTL partition:
1 Select the partition and click Edit.
The Edit VTL Partition & Replication Settings page displays (see
Figure 131).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 233

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Figure 131 Edit VTL Partition &

Replication Settings Page

2 If the partition is online, click Offline to take the partition offline. To

edit a partition, it must be offline.
3 Under Partition Settings, enter information about the partition:

Note: If you are editing a partition, only the Library Model,

Number of Storage Slots, and Number of Virtual Tape
Drives options can be changed.

• Library Model - Select the library model emulated by the

partition. The library model determines the inquiry string
returned to the host by the DXi6902.
The following library models are available:
• Quantum DXi7500
• ADIC Scalar 100, ADIC Scalar i2000, or ADIC Scalar i500
• ADIC Pathlight VX
• Quantum Scalar i40/i80 or Quantum Scalar i6000
• Quantum DXi6700, Quantum DXi6902, Quantum DXi6800,
Quantum DXi4700, Quantum DXi4601, QuantumDXi4500,
or Quantum DXi8500
• Quantum DX3000 or Quantum DX5000

234 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

• Quantum PX500 or Quantum PX720

• ATL M2500, ATL P1000, or ATL P7000
If you select a library such as the ATL P1000 or ATL P7000, the
DXi6902 appears as the selected library to the host and backup
application. If you select Quantum DXi6902, the host and
backup application recognize the device as a Quantum
DXi6902.

Note: Quantum recommends that you set the library model

to Quantum DXi6902 for best compatibility. If your
backup application does not support the Quantum
DXi6902 inquiry string, select a different library model.
Check your software compatibility guide to verify what
library models are supported.

• Number of Storage Slots - Enter the number of storage slots in

the partition (up to 9,000).

Note: One I/E slot is created for each storage slot up to a

maximum of 240 I/E slots.

• Number of Virtual Tape Drives - Enter the number of virtual

tape drives in the partition.

Note: If all tape drives are currently assigned to other

partitions, you must remove one or more tape drives
from an existing partition to make them available for
use in a new partition.

4 (Optional) Under Replication Settings, specify replication settings.

For more information about configuring replication for a partition,
or to set up replication for the partition at a later time, see DXi6902
Replication on page 119.
5 Click Apply.
6 Click Online to return the partition to an online state.

Deleting a VTL Partition

Delete a VTL partition if it is no longer needed. When you delete a
partition, all data stored on the partition is lost.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 235

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Note: If you delete a partition configured for Cartridge Based

Replication on the source DXi, the partition is not automatically
deleted on the target DXi. If you do not want to retain the
partition on the target DXi, you can manually delete it.

To delete a VTL partition:

1 If the partition is online, select the partition and click Offline to take
the partition offline. To delete a partition, it must be offline.
2 If there are tape cartridges in any of the tape drives in the partition,
move the cartridges to storage slots (see Media Move on page 242).
To delete a partition, all drives must be empty.
3 Select the partition and click Delete.

Note: You can select multiple partitions to delete at once.

4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

If the partition contains tape cartridges, they are exported from the
partition before it is deleted.

Changing Partition Mode

Change the mode of a VTL partition to take it online or offline. To make
backups to a partition, it must be online. To edit or delete a partition, it
must be offline.
• To change the partition mode to online, select the partition and click
Online.
• To change the partition mode to offline, select the partition and
click Offline.

Note: Taking a partition offline might disrupt backup operations.

Partitions General
Use the Partitions General page to configure the Auto Export feature.
When a tape is exported by the backup application, it is placed in a
virtual I/E slot. After this, one of the following actions occurs:
• (Default) If Auto Export is enabled, the media is removed from the
virtual I/E slot.

236 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

• If Auto Export is disabled, the media remains in the virtual I/E slot.
To access the Partitions General page, on the Partitions page, click the
General tab (see Figure 132).

Figure 132 Partitions General

Page

To configure Auto Export:

1 Select the Enable Auto Export check box to enable Auto Export.
Or clear the Enable Auto Export check box to disable Auto Export.
2 Click Apply.

Media The Media page allows you to manage virtual tape cartridges in VTL
partitions on the DXi6902. Backup applications can write data to virtual
tape cartridges just as they would to physical media.
To access the Media page, on the VTL page, click the Media tab.
The Media page contains the following tabs:
• Media Add
• Media Actions
• Media Move
• Media Unload

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 237

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Media Add
Use the Media Add page to add a contiguous range of virtual tape
cartridges to a VTL partition. You can specify the initial location, starting
barcode, media type, and media capacity. After the cartridges are
created, they are available for backing up data.

Note: It is possible to oversubscribe space on the DXi6902. In this

case, the total capacity of all media is more than the capacity
of the DXi. For guidance on selecting media quantity and size,
see Virtual Media—How Many and What Size? on page 23.

To access the Media Add page, on the Media page, click the Add tab
(see Figure 133).

Figure 133 Media Add Page

To add virtual tape cartridges to a partition:

1 In the Partition drop-down box, select the partition where the
media will be created.
2 Under Add Contiguous Media, enter information about the media:
• Initial Location - The initial location for cartridges after they are
created (Storage Slot or I/E Slot).

238 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Note: You cannot create more cartridges than the number of

available slots in the initial location. For example, if 50
I/E slots are available, you cannot create more than 50
cartridges if the initial location is set to I/E Slot.

• Number of Media - The number of cartridges to create in the

partition.
• Starting Barcode - The first barcode number in the cartridge
sequence.
You can enter any alpha-numeric string for the starting barcode
(uppercase letters only). Subsequent barcodes are incremented
accordingly. For example, if you enter AA, the cartridges are
numbered AA0000, AA0001, AA0002, and so on. If you enter a
starting barcode with less than 6 characters, zeroes are
appended to the barcode to make it 6 characters long.
• Media Type - The media type of the cartridges.

Note: The available media type options are determined by the

type of tape drive selected when the partition was
created (see Adding a VTL Partition on page 230).

• Media Capacity - The capacity of the cartridges. Select an

option:
• Native Size - The capacity is determined by the selected
media type.
• Custom Size - The capacity is a custom value. Enter the
custom cartridge capacity in the box. Make sure the value is
within the acceptable range displayed next to the box.
3 Click Apply.

Media Actions
Use the Media Actions page to perform actions on virtual tape
cartridges. You can import, export, and remove cartridges from VTL
partitions. You can also configure cartridges to be write protected to
prevent access.
To access the Media Actions page, on the Media page, click the
Actions tab (see Figure 134).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 239

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Figure 134 Media Actions

Page

To perform actions on virtual tape cartridges:

1 In the Partition drop-down box, select the partition that contains
the cartridges to work with.

Note: Select UNASSIGNED to work with cartridges that are not

assigned to any partition.

The table displays the following information for all virtual tape
cartridges in the partition:
• Barcode - The barcode number of the cartridge.
• Type - The cartridge type (LTO or SDLT).
• Partition - The partition where the cartridge is located.
• WP - The write protect status of the cartridge (Write Enabled or
Write Protected).
• State - The state of the cartridge:
• Scratch - Scratch newly created virtual media or virtual
media that has been recycled with no data on it.
• Virtual - Virtual media with data on it.
• Virtual, Mounted - Virtual media with data that is mounted
in a tape drive.

240 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

• Vaulted - Virtual media with data that has been exported

from a partition. Data is still intact on the virtual media.
• Exported - Virtual media with no data that has been
exported from a partition. Media has to be in this state
before it can be deleted from the DXi6902.
• Pool - The type of cartridge pool such as application,
cleaning, service, or unknown.
• Used (%) - The percentage of the tape cartridge that is used.

Caution: The Used (%) value is not updated while the media
is mounted. Because of this, the displayed
Used (%) value may be different from the real
value for mounted media.

• Capacity - The total capacity of the tape cartridge.

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Note: Click the Information button [i] next to a cartridge to

display detailed information about the cartridge.

2 In the Action drop-down box, select the action to perform:

• Delete - Deletes a cartridge from the *UNASSIGNED partition.
The cartridge must be in the exported state.
• Export - Removes a cartridge from the virtual media changer
and places it in an exported state. Perform this action if an
export cannot be performed from the backup application. The
cartridge must be in the vaulted, scratch, or virtual state.
• Recycle - Recycles (erases) a cartridge so it can be reused by the
partition.
• Write Protect (WP) - Enables or disables write protection for
the cartridge.
• Import Media - Imports cartridges into the currently selected
partition. Cartridges that are in the exported or vaulted state
can be imported from another partition with the same media
type and data deduplication settings.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 241

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

After you select an action, the table is updated to show only the
cartridges that support the selected action. Select Show All Media
in the Action drop-down box to see all cartridges.
3 (Optional) To reduce the number of cartridges displayed in the table,
enter a barcode or barcode range in the Barcode Filter box and
click Apply Filter.
Use a hyphen (-) to indicate a range, and use an asterisk (*) to
indicate a wildcard. Separate multiple entries with commas, and do
not use spaces.
For example, enter AAA* to display all cartridge barcodes beginning
with AAA. Or enter AAA010-AAA020 to display all barcodes in the
specified range. Click the Quick Tip icon [?] for additional examples.
4 Select the cartridges to perform the action on. The action is
performed only for selected cartridges on the current page.
Or select the check box in the table heading row to perform the
action on all cartridges in the partition.

Note: If necessary, use the controls at the bottom of the table to

navigate between multiple pages of results. Select the
number of rows to display in the Show drop-down box.

5 Click Apply.

Media Move
Use the Media Move page to move a virtual tape cartridge from a
source location (drive, storage slot, or I/E slot) to a destination location
(drive, storage slot, or I/E slot). The location and destination must be in
the same partition.

Note: If you do not create and associate a host access group with a
partition, the virtual devices are not visible from the host, and
drives cannot be destinations for move operations (see Remote
Host Access on page 246).

Caution: Moving a virtual tape cartridge might disrupt backup jobs.

To access the Media Move page, on the Media page, click the Move
tab (see Figure 135).

242 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Figure 135 Media Move Page

To move a virtual tape cartridge:

1 In the Partition drop-down box, select the partition that contains
the cartridge to move.
2 If the partition is online, click Offline to take the partition offline. To
move media, the partition must be offline.
3 In the Source Location drop-down box, select the type of location
you want to move a cartridge from (Drive, Storage Slot, I/E Slot).
4 (Optional) If you are moving a cartridge from a drive, select the
Force Unload (Virtual Tape Drives) check box to force the drive to
unload the cartridge before ejecting it.
5 (Optional) To reduce the number of cartridges displayed in the table,
enter a barcode or barcode range in the Barcode Filter box and
click Apply Filter.
Use a hyphen (-) to indicate a range, and use an asterisk (*) to
indicate a wildcard. Separate multiple entries with commas, and do
not use spaces.
For example, enter AAA* to display all cartridge barcodes beginning
with AAA. Or enter AAA010-AAA020 to display all barcodes in the
specified range. Click the Quick Tip icon [?] for additional examples.
6 Select the cartridge to move from the source location.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 243

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Note: If necessary, use the controls at the bottom of the table to

navigate between multiple pages of results. Select the
number of rows to display in the Show drop-down box.

7 In the Destination Location drop-down box, select the type of

location you want to move the cartridge to (Drive, Storage Slot, I/E
Slot).
8 Select the destination location to move the cartridge to.

Note: The destination section displays empty drives, storage slots,

and I/E slots. Offline drives are not displayed. A drive might
be offline if it has not been mapped to a host (see Remote
Host Access on page 246).

9 Click Apply.
10 Return the partition to an online state (see Changing Partition Mode
on page 236).

Media Unload
Use the Media Unload page to perform a bulk unload of virtual tape
cartridges from drives or I/E slots.

Note: If you do not create and associate a host access group with a
partition, the virtual devices are not visible from the host, and
drives cannot be destinations for move operations (see Remote
Host Access on page 246).

Caution: If you unload a virtual tape cartridge from a drive while a

backup to that drive is in progress, the backup job will fail.

To access the Media Unload page, on the Media page, click the Unload
tab (see Figure 136).

244 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Figure 136 Media Unload Page

To unload virtual tape cartridges:

1 In the Partition drop-down box, select the partition that contains
the cartridges to unload.
2 If the partition is online, click Offline to take the partition offline. To
unload media, the partition must be offline.
3 In the Show Location drop-down box, select the type of location
you want to unload cartridges from (Drive, I/E Slot).
4 (Optional) If you are unloading cartridges from a drive, select the
Force Unload (Virtual Tape Drives) check box to force drives to
unload the cartridges before ejecting them.
5 (Optional) To reduce the number of cartridges displayed in the table,
enter a barcode or barcode range in the Barcode Filter box and
click Apply Filter.
Use a hyphen (-) to indicate a range, and use an asterisk (*) to
indicate a wildcard. Separate multiple entries with commas, and do
not use spaces.
For example, enter AAA* to display all cartridge barcodes beginning
with AAA. Or enter AAA010-AAA020 to display all barcodes in the
specified range. Click the Quick Tip icon [?] for additional examples.
6 Select the cartridges to unload.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 245

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Note: If necessary, use the controls at the bottom of the table to

navigate between multiple pages of results. Select the
number of rows to display in the Show drop-down box.

7 Click Apply.
Cartridges are moved to a previous storage slot if available.
Otherwise, they are moved to the first available storage slot.
8 Return the partition to an online state (see Changing Partition Mode
on page 236).

Remote Host Access The Remote Host Access page allows you to configure virtual media
changers and tape drives on the DXi6902 to communicate with Fibre
Channel hosts (initiators). You can add, edit, and delete hosts as well as
view Fibre Channel target ports on the DXi.

Note: If you do not create and associate a host access group with a
partition, the virtual devices are not visible from the host, and
drives cannot be destinations for move operations.

To access the Remote Host Access page, on the VTL page, click the
Remote Host Access tab.
The Remote Host Access page contains the following tabs:
• Remote Host Mapping
• Remote Hosts
• Targets
• Target Usage

Remote Host Mapping

The Remote Host Mapping page allows you to view information about
existing host access groups. You can also add or edit groups, and delete
groups.
Host access groups allow backup hosts to access virtual devices on a
DXi6902. A host access group is associated with a partition, a host (a
Fibre Channel initiator on the SAN), and a target (a Fibre Channel port
on the DXi6902). This association allows the host to access one or more

246 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

devices in the partition using different host LUNs on the port. To allow
multiple hosts to access devices that belong to the same partition, you
must create separate host access groups for each host.
To access the Remote Host Mapping page, on the Remote Host Access
page, click the Remote Host Mapping tab (see Figure 137).

Figure 137 Remote Host

Mapping Page

Use the Remote Host Mapping page to perform the following tasks:
• View information about existing host access groups (see Remote
Host Mapping And Groups on page 247).
• Add a new host access group to a partition (see Adding a Remote
Host Access Group on page 248).
• Edit properties for an existing host access group (see Editing a
Remote Host Access Group on page 250).
• Delete a host access group from a partition (see Deleting a Remote
Host Access Group on page 252).

Remote Host Mapping And Groups

The Remote Host Mapping And Groups section displays the following
information for all host access groups on the DXi6902:
• Group Name - The name of the group.
• Remote Host - The host (initiator) associated with the group.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 247

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

• Target Port - The Fibre Channel port (target) associated with the
group.
• Partition Name - The VTL partition associated with the group.
• Devices - The number of virtual media changers (VMCs) and virtual
tape drives (VTDs) associated with the group.

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Adding a Remote Host Access Group

Add a host access group to associate a VTL partition with a host (a Fibre
Channel initiator on the SAN) and a target (a Fibre Channel port on the
DXi6902).
To add a host access group:
1 Click Add.
The Map Remote Hosts, Define Groups page displays (see
Figure 138).

248 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Figure 138 Map Remote

Hosts, Define Groups Page

2 Enter information about the host access group:

• Group Name - Enter a name for the group.
• Partition - Select the partition to associate with the group.
• Remote Host - Select the host (initiator) to associate with the
group.

Note: You must configure a host before it is available in the

Host drop-down box (see Remote Hosts on page 252).

• Target - Select the target (port) to associate with the group.

The Backpanel Locations section displays a graphical
representation of the Fibre Channel and Ethernet ports as they

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 249

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

appear on the rear of the system. A dark border displays around

the currently selected target.

Note: If a target is directly connected to the DXi, only the

directly connected ports are displayed. Otherwise, all
ports are displayed.

3 (Optional) Select the Use CCL check box to use the Command and
Control LUN.

Note: The CCL (Command and Control LUN) is not used in most
environments. This option is recommended for host access
groups that contain an HP-UX host. It can also be used if
hosts that are not assigned to any host access group exist
in the SAN. The CCL is accessible to hosts only through LUN
0.

Caution: If you are not sure if you should use CCL, contact
Quantum Customer Support before you enable this
option.

4 Select the check boxes for the media changer and tape drives to add
to the host access group.
The LUN assignment displays next to the device.
5 Click Apply.

Editing a Remote Host Access Group

Edit a host access group to change the CCL setting. You can also add or
remove virtual media changers or tape drives.
To edit a host access group:
1 Select the group and click Edit.
The Edit Remote Host Mapping page displays (see Figure 139).

Note: If you are editing a host access group, you cannot change
the Group Name, Partition, Host, or Target.

250 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Figure 139 Edit Remote Host

Mapping Page

2 (Optional) Select the Use CCL check box to use the Command and
Control LUN.

Note: The CCL (Command and Control LUN) is not used in most
environments. This option is recommended for host access
groups that contain an HP-UX host. It can also be used if
hosts that are not assigned to any host access group exist
in the SAN. The CCL is accessible to hosts only through LUN
0.

Caution: If you are not sure if you should use CCL, contact
Quantum Customer Support before you enable this
option.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 251

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

3 Select the check boxes for the media changer and tape drives to add
to the host access group.
The LUN assignment displays next to the device.
4 Click Apply.

Deleting a Remote Host Access Group

Delete a host access group if it is no longer needed.
To delete a host access group:
1 Select the group and click Delete.

Note: You can select multiple groups to delete at once.

2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

Remote Hosts
Use the Remote Hosts page to discover and add Fibre Channel hosts to
the available host list for the DXi6902.

Note: You must configure a host before you can assign it to a new
host access group (see Adding a Remote Host Access Group on
page 248).

Caution: If you are connecting the DXi6902 directly to a host

without using a Fibre Channel switch, you must know the
WWPN connecting to each DXi6902 port. If you do not
specify this information, the virtual medium changer and
tape drives will not display on the device manager.

To access the Remote Hosts page, on the Remote Host Access page,
click the Remote Hosts tab (see Figure 140).

252 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Figure 140 Remote Hosts Page

To add a host:
1 Click Discover Remote Hosts to list all hosts that are known to the
DXi6902.
A host is made known to the DXi6902 if you enter the host ID on
this page, or if the host logs on to one or more Fibre Channel target
ports.
If you do not see the world wide name (WWN) of the host, make
sure the host is connected to a Fibre Channel port on the DXi6902
and click Discover Hosts again.
The Backpanel Locations section displays a graphical
representation of the Fibre Channel and Ethernet ports as they
appear on the rear of the system.

Note: A mapped (green) status indicates the host is currently

logged on to one or more Fibre Channel target ports.

2 Enter information about the host:

• Remote Host WWPN - Enter the World Wide Port Name
(WWPN) of the host. (This value is entered automatically by the
system.)
• Alias - (Optional) Enter a descriptive alias for the host.
3 Click Apply.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 253

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Note: To delete a host that is no longer needed, click Delete next to

the host. You cannot delete a host of it is currently assigned to
a host access group.

Targets
Use the Targets page to view the current target (Fibre Channel)
configuration.
To access the Targets page, on the Host Access page, click the Targets
tab (see Figure 141).

Figure 141 Targets Page

The Targets page displays the Target Port and WWPN for the currently
configured targets. The Backpanel Locations section displays a
graphical representation of the Fibre Channel and Ethernet ports as they
appear on the rear of the system.

Note: A mapped (green) status indicates the host is currently logged

on to one or more Fibre Channel target ports.

Select one or more targets and click Reset Target(s) to initiate a Fibre
Channel reset on the selected ports. A reset causes the ports to go
through LIP (Loop Initialization Protocol).

254 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
VTL

Target Usage
Use the Target Usage page to view current target and device mappings
for the DXi6902.
To access the Target Usage page, on the Host Access page, click the
Target Usage tab (see Figure 142).

Figure 142 Target Usage Page

The Backpanel Locations section displays a graphical representation of

the Fibre Channel and Ethernet ports as they appear on the rear of the
system.

Note: A mapped (green) status indicates the host is currently logged

on to one or more Fibre Channel target ports.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 255

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

Each target Fibre Channel port is displayed, along with the partition and
virtual media changer and tape drives (VMC and VTDs) mapped to the
port.

Replication Configuration
The Replication Configuration page allows you to configure and
manage replication targets and allowed replication sources on the
DXi6902. A source sends replicated data to 1 or 2 targets, and a target
receives replicated data from up to 10 sources. A DXi6902 can act as
both a source and a target.

Note: For more information about data replication, or to perform

data replication, see DXi6902 Replication on page 119.

Note: If the DXi is configured as a replication target and replication is

performed across a public network, with the source and target
located behind NAT-enabled routers, you must specify a NAT IP
address for the DXi on the Network page (see Configuring
Interface IP Addresses on page 321).

To access the Replication Configuration page, click the Configuration

menu, and then click the Replication tab (see Figure 143).

256 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

Figure 143 Replication

Configuration Page

Use the Replication Configuration page to perform the following

tasks:
• View information about configured replication target systems (see
Target DXis List on page 258).
• Add, edit, or delete a replication target (see Adding a Replication
Target on page 259, Editing a Replication Target on page 261, or
Deleting a Replication Target on page 263).
• Pause or resume replication to a target (see Pausing or Resuming
Replication to a Target on page 263).
• Configure a constant replication throttle (see Enabling System
Throttling on page 263).
• View information about allowed replication source systems (see
Source DXis List on page 265).
• Add or delete an allowed replication source (see Adding a
Replication Source on page 265 or Deleting a Replication Source on
page 266).
• Specify the maximum number of received snapshots to retain for
each source (see Changing the Maximum Number of Snapshots on
page 267).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 257

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

Target DXis List The Target DXis list displays the following information for each target
DXi:
• Target - The IP address of the target system that the DXi6902 is
configured to send data to.
• Status - The replication status of the DXi6902. For a detailed
description of all possible replication statuses, see Replication
Overview on page 112.
• Source IP - The IP address that is used to uniquely identify the
source DXi to the target.
• Encryption - The type of encryption used when sending replicated
data to the target system (None, 128-bit, or 256-bit).
• Original Data Size - The original, native size of data sent during
replication or failback. This value does not represent the amount of
data actually sent over the network during replication or failback
because data is deduplicated and compressed before being sent.
• Actual Data Sent - The amount of data actually sent over the
network during replication or failback. This value is usually much
less than the Original Data Size due to the benefits of data
deduplication and compression.
• Average Send Rate - The average send rate (in B/s) of data sent
over the network during replication or failback (Actual Data Sent
divided by the amount of time required to complete replication or
failback).
You can customize the appearance of the Target DXis list in the
following ways:
• Click the top banner row of the list to collapse or expand the list.
• Click the arrow to the right of a column heading and select Sort
Ascending or Sort Descending to sort the rows in the table by that
column.
• To show or hide a column, click the arrow to the right of a column
heading, and then click Columns. Select the check box to show a
column, or clear the check box to hide a column.

Note: The statistics in the Target DXis list are for each target DXi
rather than a cumulative total for all targets as is displayed on
the Home page.

258 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

Adding a Replication Add a replication target to configure the DXi6902 to send replicated
Target data to that target. You can add up to two targets. After you add a
target, you can enable replication to that target for a NAS share or VTL
partition. When replication is enabled for a share or partition, replicated
data is sent to the target system during scheduled or manual
replication.

Note: Before you can add a replication target, you must add the DXi
to the list of allowed replication sources on the target DXi (see
Adding a Replication Source on page 265).

Note: To add a new target when two targets are already configured,
first delete one target (see Deleting a Replication Target on
page 263). Then add the new target.

Note: For more information about enabling and scheduling

replication for a share or partition, see Replication Send on
page 128.

To add a replication target:

1 Under Target DXis, click Add.
The Add Target Host window displays (see Figure 144).

Figure 144 Add Target Host

2 In the Target Hostname or IP box, enter the hostname or IP address

of the system that will receive the replicated data.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 259

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

Note: When entering IP addresses, never use an address that is in

a reserved IP address range. To see a list of reserved IP
address ranges, click the quick tip icon [?] located near the
IP address field.

Note: To use hostname format, you must specify at least one DNS
IP address on the Network page (see Network on
page 315).

3 In the Encryption drop-down box, select the type of encryption to

use when sending replication data to the target system (None,
128-bit, or 256-bit).

Caution: For encryption, select None or 128-bit if you are

sending data to a DXi running a system software
version prior to DXi 2.1 Software.

Note: AES encryption options are available only if the Data-in-

Flight license is installed (see License Keys on page 393).

4 In the Source IP box, enter the IP address that is used to uniquely

identify the source DXi to the target. This may be different than the
actual network IP address of the source DXi.
If the target system is at DXi 2.1 Software or higher, the Source IP
field is not required. If the target system is at DXi 2.0.1.x Software
or below, then you must enter the IP address by which the target
system recognizes the source system. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

Note: The Source IP field does not accept fully qualified domain
names. You must enter a valid IP address. Make sure this IP
address is configured in the allowable sources list on the
target DXi.

260 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

Note: When configuring segmented network interfaces, if the

source DXi replication, data, and management interfaces
are on the same subnet, you must add a host route on the
source DXi to make sure the replication interface is
correctly selected when replicating data to the target DXi
(see Understanding Interface Routing on page 327).

5 Click Apply.

Note: The new target is not automatically added to existing

replication schedules. You must add or edit scheduled events to
schedule replication to the new target (see Scheduler on
page 304).

Editing a Replication Edit a replication target to change encryption options or the source IP
Target address.
To edit a replication target:
1 Under Target DXis, select the target and click Pause to pause
replication.
2 Select the target again and click Edit.
The Edit Target Host window displays (see Figure 145).

Note: If you are editing a target, you cannot change the Target
Hostname or IP.

Figure 145 Edit Target Host

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 261

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

3 In the Encryption drop-down box, select the type of encryption to

use when sending replication data to the target system (None,
128-bit, or 256-bit).

Caution: For encryption, select None or 128-bit if you are

sending data to a DXi running a system software
version prior to DXi 2.1 Software.

Note: AES encryption options are available only if the Data-in-

Flight license is installed (see License Keys on page 393).

4 In the Source IP Address box, enter the IP address that is used to

uniquely identify the source DXi to the target. This may be different
than the actual network IP address of the source DXi.
If the target system is at DXi 2.1 Software or higher, the Source IP
Address field is not required. If the target system is at DXi 2.0.1.x
Software or below, then you must enter the IP address by which the
target system recognizes the source system. The default value is
0.0.0.0.

Note: The Source IP Address field does not accept fully qualified
domain names. You must enter a valid IP address. Make
sure this IP address is configured in the allowable sources
list on the target DXi.

Note: When configuring segmented network interfaces, if the

source DXi replication, data, and management interfaces
are on the same subnet, you must add a host route on the
source DXi to make sure the replication interface is
correctly selected when replicating data to the target DXi
(see Understanding Interface Routing on page 327).

5 Click Apply.
6 Under Target DXis, select the target and click Resume to pause
replication.

262 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

Deleting a Replication Delete a replication target if the DXi6902 no longer needs to send
Target replicated data to that target. After the target system is deleted, the
DXi6902 will no longer send replicated data to that system.
When a target is deleted:
• All replication jobs to that target that are in progress or queued will
transition to failed.
• All replication job history for that combination of target and share
or partition is removed.
• All shares or partitions will be reconfigured to no longer replicate to
that target.
To delete a replication target:
1 Under Target DXis, select one or more targets to delete.
2 Click Pause to pause replication to the target.
3 Click Delete.

Note: The deleted target is not automatically removed from existing

replication schedules. You must edit scheduled events to
remove the deleted target (see Scheduler on page 304).

Pausing or Resuming The source DXi controls the replication pause behavior.
Replication to a Target • To pause replication, select a target under Target DXis and click
Pause. The DXi temporarily stops sending replicated data to the
selected target.
• To resume replication, select a target under Target DXis and click
Resume. The DXi resumes sending replicated data to the selected
target.

Enabling System Enable system throttling to limit the network bandwidth used for
Throttling replication to all targets. When a constant throttle is enabled, the DXi
limits the amount of data it sends during source replication so that it
does not exceed the specified bandwidth.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 263

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

Note: If multiple targets are configured, replication to all targets

counts against the same bandwidth limit.

Note: To vary the replication throttle rate over time, use the
Configuration > Scheduler page (see Scheduler on
page 304). Do not enable a constant throttle if a throttle
schedule is configured. The scheduled replication throttling
bandwidth settings take precedence over the constant throttle
value. (The currently active replication throttle rate appears on
the Home page under Current Activity.)

To enable system replication throttling:

1 Under Target DXis, click the box next to Throttling.
The Replication Throttle window displays (see Figure 144).

Figure 146 Replication

Throttle

2 Select the Enable system throttling check box.

Or clear the check box to disable system throttling.
3 In the Throttle box, enter the maximum allowed bandwidth, and
select the units you want to use to specify the constant throttle
(KB/s or MB/s). The lowest value you can set is 32 KB/s. The lowest
value you can set is 32 KB/s. The highest value you can set is 125
MB/s for 1GbE and 500 MB/s for 10GbE.
4 Click Apply.

264 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

Caution: Do not set the maximum allowed bandwidth to a value

that is lower than necessary. If the maximum allowed
bandwidth is set to the lowest value, large replication
jobs may fail.

Source DXis List The Source DXis list displays the following information for each source
DXi:
• Source - The IP address of the source system that is allowed to send
data to the DXi6902.
• Actual Data Received - The amount of data actually received over
the network during replication or failback.
• Average Receive Rate - The average receive rate (in MB/s) of data
received over the network during replication or failback (Actual
Data Received divided by the amount of time required to complete
replication or failback).
You can customize the appearance of the Source DXis list in the
following ways:
• Click the top banner row of the list to collapse or expand the list.
• Click the arrow to the right of a column heading and select Sort
Ascending or Sort Descending to sort the rows in the table by that
column.
• To show or hide a column, click the arrow to the right of a column
heading, and then click Columns. Select the check box to show a
column, or clear the check box to hide a column.

Note: The statistics in the Source DXis list are for each source DXi
rather than a cumulative total for all sources as is displayed on
the Home page.

Adding a Replication Add a system to the list of replication sources to allow it to send
Source replicated data to the DXi6902. You must add a source system to the list
of allowed replication sources on the target DXi before you configure
the source DXi to send replicated data to the target. The DXi can receive
replicated data fromup to 10 sources.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 265

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Replication Configuration

Note: For more information about working with received snapshots,

see Receive NAS on page 140.

Note: It is typical for the target DXi to require additional disk space
for replication data compared to the source DXi. This is because
complete replication data is sent to the target before old data
is deleted. For optimal performance, if the DXi is a replication
target, Quantum recommends keeping the amount of free
space at 20% or more (see Disk Usage on page 186).

To add a replication source:

1 Under Source DXis, click Add.
The Add Allowed Source window displays (see Figure 144).

Figure 147 Add Allowed

Source

2 In the Source Hostname or IP box, enter the hostname or IP

address of the system that will send the replicated data to the
DXi6902.

Note: To use hostname format, you must specify at least one DNS
IP address on the Network page (see Network on
page 315).

3 Click Apply.

Deleting a Replication Delete a system from the list of replication sources if it will no longer
Source send replicated data to the DXi6902. After the source system is deleted,
the DXi6902 will no longer accept replicated data from that system.

266 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

To delete a replication source:

1 Under Source DXis, select one or more sources to delete.
2 Click Delete.

Note: If a source DXi is deleted from the list, its contribution to the
cumulative totals on the Home page are not removed until you
clear Receive statistics (see Replication Performance on
page 169).

Changing the During scheduled or manual data replication, the DXi6902 receives a
Maximum Number of snapshot from the source system. A snapshot contains all of the data
Snapshots necessary to fully recover or failback a NAS share or VTL partition to the
point in time when the snapshot was saved.
The DXi6902 can retain up to 32 snapshots for each replicated share or
partition. Once the maximum number of snapshots have been saved,
the oldest snapshot is deleted to make room for each new snapshot
that is received.
To change the maximum number of received snapshots:
• Under Source DXis, in the Maximum Snapshots drop-down box,
select the number of snapshots to retain for each replicated share or
partition.
• The default value is 10. The maximum value is 32.

Note: Retaining more than the default number of snapshots will use
additional disk space on the target DXi. This can cause the
target DXi to fill up more quickly.

OST
The OST page allows you to configure the DXi6902 to present its
storage capacity as storage servers using OpenStorage (OST)
technology. You can add one or more Logical Storage Units (LSUs) to a
storage server. Storage servers and LSUs are compatible with backup

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 267

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

applications that support OST, such as Symantec NetBackup and

Symantec Backup Exec. In addition, OST data can be duplicated
(replicated) between DXi systems using NetBackup (see Replicating OST
Data on page 268).
To authenticate OST devices on a media server, you must create OST user
credentials. After you create the OST user credentials, enter them in the
backup application to authenticate OST devices on the media server.
To access the OST page, click the Configuration menu, and then click
the OST tab.
The OST page contains the following tabs:
• Storage Servers
• LSU
• Manage Users
• Manage Remote Users
• Target IP Mapping
• DXi Accent
• OST Client Plug-In

Replicating OST Data The DXi6902 can replicate (duplicate) OST data to another DXi using the
following methods:
• Optimized Duplication - With optimized duplication, backup
images on a storage server can be replicated to another storage
server on a DXi that resides in the same NetBackup domain. The
duplication occurs when it is initiated in NetBackup. With optimized
duplication can specify up to two replication targets.
• Automatic Image Replication (AIR) - If you are using Symantec
NetBackup 7.1 or higher, you can configure an LSU for Automatic
Image Replication (see Task Overview: Setting Up Automatic Image
Replication on page 269). If enabled, data on an LSU is
automatically replicated to a remote LSU that resides on a DXi in a
different NetBackup domain. The timing of the duplication, as well
as the backup images that are duplicated, are determined by the
storage lifecycle policies (SLPs) configured in NetBackup. With AIR,
you can specify a single replication target.

268 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

• Concurrent Optimized Duplication - For both optimized

duplication and Automatic Image Replication, you can optionally
enable Concurrent Optimized Duplication. If enabled, as data is
written to the storage server, it is simultaneously replicated to the
target DXi. When optimized duplication or Automatic Image
Replication subsequently occurs, the operation is more efficient
because a portion of the required data has already been replicated
to the target storage server.
It is important to remember that, with Automatic Image Replication, the
local and remote LSUs reside in different NetBackup domains. This
differs from optimized duplication, which occurs between two LSUs
residing within the same NetBackup domain.

Note: For more information about configuring the DXi6902 for

optimized duplication or Automatic Image Replication, see the
DXi-Series NetBackup and Backup Exec OST Configuration
Guide (6-67079).

Note: For information about configuring NetBackup for optimized

duplication or Automatic Image Replication (also referred to as
duplicating images to a remote master server domain), see the
Symantec NetBackup Administrator's Guide.

Task Overview: Setting Up Automatic Image Replication

Setting up Automatic Image Replication (AIR) requires that you first
configure the target (remote) DXi and then the source DXi (see
Figure 148). In addition, you must create storage lifecycle policies (SLPs)
in NetBackup that define when the automatic replication occurs and
which backup images are duplicated.
To automatically replicate (duplicate) all data on an LSU to a remote LSU
that resides on a DXi in a different NetBackup domain:
1 On the target system, add the source system to the list of allowed
replication sources (see Adding a Replication Source on page 265).
2 On the target system, create a local OST user (see Manage Users on
page 286).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 269

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Caution: On the target system, make sure to create a local user

on the Configuration > OST > Manage Users page.

3 On the target system, create a storage server and LSU to receive the
replicated OST data (see Adding a Storage Server on page 273).

Note: Quantum recommends selecting the Available Capacity

option when creating an LSU for use with Automatic Image
Replication.

4 On the source system, specify the target system that will receive the
replicated data (see Adding a Replication Target on page 259).
5 On the source system, create a remote OST user with the same user
name and password that you used in step 2 above (see Manage
Remote Users on page 290).

Caution: On the source system, make sure to create a remote

user on the Configuration > OST > Manage Remote
Users page.

6 On the source system, create a storage server and LSU, and enable
the LSU for Automatic Image Replication (see Adding a Storage
Server on page 273).
For Remote Storage Server and Remote LSU, make sure to specify
the storage server and LSU created in step 3 above. Also, for
Remote User, make sure to select the remote user created in step 5
above.
7 Configure storage lifecycle policies in NetBackup to control when
automatic replication of the LSU occurs (see the Symantec
NetBackup Administrator's Guide).

270 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Figure 148 Setting Up OST

Automatic Image Replication

1 Configure target DXi:

• Add allowed replication source.
• Create local OST user.
• Create storage server and LSU.

2 Configure source DXi:

• Specify replication target.
• Create remote OST user.
• Create storage server and LSU 3 Create storage lifecycle policies
with AIR enabled. (SLPs) on the NetBackup server in
each domain to control when
duplication occurs and images are
imported.

Storage Servers The Storage Servers page allows you to manage OST storage servers on
the DXi6902. You can view information about existing storage servers,
add or edit storage servers, and delete storage servers.
To access the Storage Servers page, on the OST page, click the Storage
Servers tab (see Figure 149).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 271

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Figure 149 Storage Servers

Page

Use the Storage Servers page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about existing storage servers (see Storage Server
List on page 272).
• Add a new storage server to the system (see Adding a Storage
Server on page 273).
• Edit properties for an existing storage server (see Editing a Storage
Server on page 277).
• Delete a storage server from the system (see Deleting a Storage
Server on page 279).

Storage Server List

The Storage Server List displays the following information for all
storage servers on the DXi6902:
• Storage Servers - The number of storage servers that have been
added to the system.
• Maximum Storage Servers - The maximum number of storage
servers that can be added to the system.
• LSUs - The number of logical storage units (LSUs) that have been
added to the system (see LSU on page 280).

272 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

• OST Service - The status of the OST service. OST settings can be
configured in Ready, Stopped, or Verifying state. The OST server is
available for backup only in Ready state.
• Name - The name of the storage server.
• LSUs - The number of LSUs that have been added to the storage
server.
• Max Connections - The maximum number of connections allowed
to the storage server.
• Active Connections - The number of currently active connections to
the storage server.
• Backup Images - The number of backup images on the storage
server.
• Optimized Duplication - The status of Concurrent Optimized
Duplication for the storage server (Enabled or Disabled), as well as
the configured targets (if any).
• Description - A brief description of the storage server (if available).

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Note: The connections of a storage server that are used equals the
data streams plus one for each LSU polling. A backup job may
generate more than one data stream if the data can be read in
parallel. For example, a policy that is backing up A, B, C, and D
drives of a Windows system can generate four data streams in
parallel.

Adding a Storage Server

Add a storage server to present the storage capacity of the DXi6902 as
LSUs that are compatible with backup applications that support OST.
You can add up to 100 storage servers. When adding a storage server,
you must also add an LSU to the storage server. (For more information
about LSUs, see LSU on page 280.)

Note: Data on storage servers is always deduplicated.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 273

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

To add a storage server:

1 Click Add.
The Add Storage Server page displays (see Figure 150).

Figure 150 Add Storage Server

Page

2 Under Add Storage Server, enter information about the storage

server:
• Name - Enter the name of the storage server.

Caution: Do not use an underscore ( _ ) in the name of the

storage server.

274 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Note: OST storage server names are not case-sensitive. For

example, if you create a storage server named ost1,
you cannot create another storage server named OST1
because the system considers the names to be the
same.

• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the storage

server.
• Max Connections - Enter the maximum number of connections
allowed to the storage server (3 to 65536).

Note: Quantum recommends setting Max Connections to

300.

• Enable Concurrent Optimized Duplication - Select the check

box to enable optimized duplication during OST ingest.
Concurrent Optimized Duplication is disabled by default. If
enabled, as data is written to the storage server, it is
simultaneously replicated to the target DXi. When optimized
duplication or Automatic Image Replication subsequently
occurs, the operation is more efficient because a portion of the
required data has already been replicated to the target storage
server.

Note: To configure the target DXi, see Adding a Replication

Target on page 259.

Note: When Concurrent Optimized Duplication is enabled, all

data on the storage server is duplicated, not just the
specified images.

3 Select the check box for each optimized duplication target you want
to duplicate the storage server to. When the storage server is
duplicated, its data will be sent to all selected targets.
4 Under Logical Storage Unit, select the type of LSU to add to the
new storage server:
• Available Capacity - (Recommended for best performance)
Select this option to add an LSU that uses the available capacity
on the system.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 275

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

You cannot add an available capacity LSU to a storage server

that already contains an LSU. Also, if you add an available
capacity LSU to a storage server, you cannot add additional LSUs
to that same storage server.

Note: After you add an LSU that uses the Available Capacity
option, you cannot change the LSU to use the Specific
Capacity option. Instead, you must delete the LSU,
then add a new LSU and choose the Specific Capacity
option (see Deleting an LSU on page 286).

• Specific Capacity - Select this option to specify the physical

capacity of the LSU, and then enter the following information.
• LSU Name - Enter the name of the LSU.
• Physical Capacity - Enter the physical capacity of the LSU (1
to 1048576 GB).

Note: Quantum recommends setting LSUs to maximum

size (1048576 GB) because spanning them on a
backup is not possible.

5 (Optional) In the Description box, enter a brief description of the

LSU.
6 (Optional) Select the Enable Automatic Image Replication check
box to automatically replicate (duplicate) data on the LSU to a
remote LSU on another DXi.
Automatic Image Replication (AIR) is disabled by default. If enabled,
data on an LSU is automatically replicated to a remote LSU that
resides on a DXi in a different NetBackup domain. The timing of the
duplication, as well as the backup images that are duplicated, are
determined by the storage lifecycle policies (SLPs) configured in
NetBackup.
OST AIR requires NetBackup 7.1 or higher. For information about
configuring NetBackup for Automatic Image Replication, see the
DXi-Series NetBackup and Backup Exec OST Configuration Guide (6-
67079).

Note: You must configure at least one remote user before you
can enable Automatic Image Replication (see Manage
Remote Users on page 290).

276 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

7 If Automatic Image Replication is enabled, select the replication

target you want to replicate images to. (You can select only a single
target.) When images are replicated, data will be sent to the
selected target.
8 If Automatic Image Replication is enabled, specify the following
information:
• Remote Storage Server Name - The name of the remote
storage server (on the target DXi) to replicate data to. The
source DXi and target DXi must reside in different NetBackup
domains.

Note: To configure the target DXi, see Adding a Replication

Target on page 259.

• Remote LSU Name - The name of the LSU in the remote storage
server that will receive the replicated data.
• Remote User - The OST user credentials to use for
authentication on the remote (target) DXi. The selected remote
user must match a local user on the Configuration > OST >
Manage Users page on the target DXi (see Manage Users on
page 286).
9 Click Apply.

Editing a Storage Server

Edit a storage server to change the description of the storage server or
the maximum number of allowed connections.
To edit a storage server:
1 Select the storage server and click Edit.
The Edit Storage Server page displays (see Figure 151).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 277

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Figure 151 Edit Storage Server

Page

2 Enter information about the storage server:

Note: If you are editing a storage server, the Name option cannot
be changed.

• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the storage

server.
• Max Connections - Enter the maximum number of connections
allowed to the storage server (3 to 65536).
The maximum number of connections cannot be changed if the
storage server has more than zero currently active connections.
The number of active connections is displayed on the OST page
(see Storage Server List on page 272).

Note: Quantum recommends setting Max Connections to

300.

• Enable Concurrent Optimized Duplication - Select the check

box to enable optimized duplication during OST ingest.
Concurrent Optimized Duplication is disabled by default. If
enabled, as data is written to the storage server, it is
simultaneously replicated to the target DXi. When optimized
duplication or Automatic Image Replication subsequently
occurs, the operation is more efficient because a portion of the

278 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

required data has already been replicated to the target storage

server.

Note: To configure the target DXi, see Adding a Replication

Target on page 259.

Note: When Concurrent Optimized Duplication is enabled, all

data on the storage server is duplicated, not just the
specified images.

3 Select the check box for each optimized duplication target you want
to duplicate the storage server to. When the storage server is
duplicated, its data will be sent to all selected targets.
4 Click Apply.

Deleting a Storage Server

Delete a storage server if it is no longer needed. When you delete a
storage server, all data stored on the storage server is lost.

Note: If you deleted the storage server from Symantec NetBackup or

Symantec Backup Exec, you must wait several minutes before
deleting the storage server from the DXi6902.

To delete a storage server:

1 Select the storage server in the Storage Server List.
You cannot delete a storage server if it has more than zero currently
active connections. The number of active connections is displayed
on the OST page (see Storage Server List on page 272). Also, you
cannot delete a storage server if it contains LSUs. Before deleting
the storage server, you must first delete any LSUs it contains (see
Deleting an LSU on page 286).

Note: You can select multiple storage servers to delete at once.

2 Click Delete.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 279

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

LSU The LSU page allows you to manage the logical storage units (LSUs)
contained on OST storage servers on the DXi6902. You can view
information about existing LSUs, add or edit LSUs, and delete LSUs.
To access the LSU page, on the OST page, click the LSU tab (see
Figure 152).

Figure 152 LSU Page

Use the LSU page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about existing LSUs (see Logical Storage Unit List
on page 280).
• Add a new LSU to the system (see Adding an LSU on page 281).
• Edit properties for an existing LSU (see Editing an LSU on page 284).
• Delete an LSU from the system (see Deleting an LSU on page 286).

Logical Storage Unit List

The Logical Storage Unit List displays the following information for all
LSUs on the DXi6902:
• OST Service - The status of the OST service. OST settings can be
configured in Ready, Stopped, or Verifying state. The OST server is
available for backup only in Ready state.
• LSU Name - The name of the LSU.

280 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

• Storage Server - The storage server that contains the LSU.

• Physical Capacity - The physical storage capacity of the LSU.
• Automatic Image Replication - The status of Automatic Image
Replication (AIR) for the LSU (Enabled or Disabled), as well as the
configured targets (if any).

Note: To view details about the remote LSU if AIR is enabled, use
the Edit Logical Storage Unit page (see Editing an LSU on
page 284).

• Active Connections - The number of currently active connections to

the LSU.
• Backup Images - The number of backup images on the LSU.
• Description - A brief description of the LSU (if available).

Note: Click a column heading to sort the rows in the table by that
column. Click the column heading again to reverse the sort
order.

Adding an LSU
Add an LSU to a storage server to present the storage capacity of the
DXi6902 as an LSU that is compatible with backup applications that
support OST. You can add an LSU with a specific capacity, or you can
add an LSU that uses the available capacity of the DXi6902.

Note: You must create a storage server before you can add an LSU
(see Adding a Storage Server on page 273).

To add an LSU to a storage server:

1 Click Add.
The Add Logical Storage Unit page displays (see Figure 153).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 281

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Figure 153 Add Logical

Storage Unit Page

2 Enter information about the LSU.

• Storage Server - Select the storage server that will contain the
new LSU.
• Available Capacity - (Recommended for best performance)
Select this option to add an LSU that uses the available capacity
on the system.
You cannot add an available capacity LSU to a storage server
that already contains an LSU. Also, if you add an available
capacity LSU to a storage server, you cannot add additional LSUs
to that same storage server.

Note: After you add an LSU that uses the Available Capacity
option, you cannot change the LSU to use the Specific
Capacity option. Instead, you must delete the LSU,
then add a new LSU and choose the Specific Capacity
option (see Deleting an LSU on page 286).

• Specific Capacity - Select this option to specify the physical

capacity of the LSU, and then enter the following information.
• LSU Name - Enter the name of the LSU.
• Physical Capacity - Enter the physical capacity of the LSU (1
to 1048576 GB).

282 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Note: Quantum recommends setting LSUs to maximum

size (1048576 GB) because spanning them on a
backup is not possible.

3 (Optional) In the Description box, enter a brief description of the

LSU.
4 (Optional) Select the Enable Automatic Image Replication check
box to automatically replicate (duplicate) data on the LSU to a
remote LSU on another DXi.
Automatic Image Replication (AIR) is disabled by default. If enabled,
data on an LSU is automatically replicated to a remote LSU that
resides on a DXi in a different NetBackup domain. The timing of the
duplication, as well as the backup images that are duplicated, are
determined by the storage lifecycle policies (SLPs) configured in
NetBackup.
OST AIR requires NetBackup 7.1 or higher. For information about
configuring NetBackup for Automatic Image Replication, see the
DXi-Series NetBackup and Backup Exec OST Configuration Guide (6-
67079).

Note: You must configure at least one remote user before you
can enable Automatic Image Replication (see Manage
Remote Users on page 290).

5 If Automatic Image Replication is enabled, select the replication

target you want to replicate images to. (You can select only a single
target.) When images are replicated, data will be sent to the
selected target.
6 If Automatic Image Replication is enabled, specify the following
information:
• Remote Storage Server Name - The name of the remote
storage server (on the target DXi) to replicate data to. The
source DXi and target DXi must reside in different NetBackup
domains.

Note: To configure the target DXi, see Adding a Replication

Target on page 259.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 283

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

• Remote LSU Name - The name of the LSU in the remote storage
server that will receive the replicated data.
• Remote User - The OST user credentials to use for
authentication on the remote (target) DXi. The selected remote
user must match a local user on the Configuration > OST >
Manage Users page on the target DXi (see Manage Users on
page 286).
7 Click Apply.

Editing an LSU
Edit an LSU to change its capacity, description, or automatic image
replication settings.
To edit an LSU:
1 Select the LSU and click Edit.
The Edit Logical Storage Unit page displays (see Figure 154).

Figure 154 Edit Logical

Storage Unit Page

2 Enter information about the LSU:

Note: If you are editing an LSU, the Name option cannot be

changed.

284 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

• Physical Capacity - (Specific capacity LSUs only) Enter the

physical capacity of the LSU (1 to 1048576 GB).
The physical capacity cannot be changed if the LSU has more
than zero currently active connections. The number of active
connections is displayed on the LSU page (see Logical Storage
Unit List on page 280).
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the LSU.
3 (Optional) Select the Enable Automatic Image Replication check
box to automatically replicate (duplicate) data on the LSU to a
remote LSU on another DXi.
Automatic Image Replication (AIR) is disabled by default. If enabled,
data on an LSU is automatically replicated to a remote LSU that
resides on a DXi in a different NetBackup domain. The timing of the
duplication, as well as the backup images that are duplicated, are
determined by the storage lifecycle policies (SLPs) configured in
NetBackup.
OST AIR requires NetBackup 7.1 or higher. For information about
configuring NetBackup for Automatic Image Replication, see the
DXi-Series NetBackup and Backup Exec OST Configuration Guide (6-
67079).

Note: You must configure at least one remote user before you
can enable Automatic Image Replication (see Manage
Remote Users on page 290).

4 If Automatic Image Replication is enabled, select the replication

target you want to replicate images to. (You can select only a single
target.) When images are replicated, data will be sent to the
selected target.
5 If Automatic Image Replication is enabled, specify the following
information:
• Remote Storage Server Name - The name of the remote
storage server (on the target DXi) to replicate data to. The
source DXi and target DXi must reside in different NetBackup
domains.

Note: To configure the target DXi, see Adding a Replication

Target on page 259.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 285

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

• Remote LSU Name - The name of the LSU in the remote storage
server that will receive the replicated data.
• Remote User - The OST user credentials to use for
authentication on the remote (target) DXi. The selected remote
user must match a local user on the Configuration > OST >
Manage Users page on the target DXi (see Manage Users on
page 286).
6 Click Apply.

Deleting an LSU
Delete an LSU if it is no longer needed. When you delete an LSU, all data
stored on the LSU is lost.

Note: If you deleted the LSU from Symantec NetBackup or Symantec

Backup Exec, you must wait several minutes before deleting the
LSU from the DXi6902.

To delete an LSU:
1 Select the LSU in the Logical Storage Unit List.
You cannot delete an LSU if it has more than zero currently active
connections. The number of active connections is displayed on the
LSU page (see Logical Storage Unit List on page 280).

Note: You can select multiple LSUs to delete at once.

2 (Optional) Select the Force Delete LSU check box to delete LSUs
that are not empty.
Normally, you cannot delete an LSU if it contains existing backup
images. If for some reason you cannot remove files from the LSU,
selecting the Force Delete LSU check box allows you to delete the
LSU even though it is not empty.
3 Click Delete.

Manage Users The Manage Users page allows you to create and manage local
authenticated users for use with OST. After you create the OST user
credentials, enter them in the backup application to authenticate OST
devices on the media server. When using OST Automatic Image

286 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Replication (AIR), the remote user credentials specified on the source

DXi must match the local user credentials on the target (remote) DXi.
To access the Manage Users page, on the OST page, click the Manage
Users tab (see Figure 155).

Figure 155 Manage Users Page

Use the Manage Users page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about local authenticated users (see Manage
Local Users List on page 287).
• Add a local authenticated user (see Adding an Authenticated User
on page 288).
• Edit a local authenticated user (see Editing an Authenticated User
on page 288).
• Delete a local authenticated user (see Deleting an Authenticated
User on page 289).

Manage Local Users List

The Manage Local Users list displays the following information for all
local authenticated users:
• Name - The name of the local authenticated user.
• Description - A brief description of the local authenticated user (if
available).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 287

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Note: To update the list with the latest information, click Refresh.

Adding an Authenticated User

Add an authenticated user to create local OST user credentials. The OST
user credentials are required to authenticate OST devices on a media
server, or to enable the DXi to receive duplicated data using OST AIR.
To add an authenticated user:
1 Click Add.
The Add User Credential window displays (see Figure 156).

Figure 156 Add User

Credential

2 Enter information about the authenticated user:

• User name - Enter the name of the authenticated user.
• New Password - Enter the password for the authenticated user.
• Confirm New Password - Enter the password again to confirm
it.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the
authenticated user.
3 Click Apply.

Editing an Authenticated User

Edit an authenticated user to change the user's password or description.

288 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

To edit an authenticated user:

1 Select the user and click Edit.
The Edit User Credentials window displays (see Figure 157).

Figure 157 Edit User

Credentials

2 Enter information about the authenticated user:

Note: If you are editing an authenticated user, you cannot change

the User name.

• New Password - Enter the password for the authenticated user.

• Confirm New Password - Enter the password again to confirm
it.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the
authenticated user.
3 Click Apply.

Deleting an Authenticated User

Delete an authenticated user if the OST user credentials are no longer
needed to authenticate OST devices on a media server.
To delete an authenticated user, select the user and click Delete.

Note: You can select multiple users to delete at once.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 289

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Manage Remote Users The Manage Remote Users page allows you to create and manage
remote users for use with OST Automatic Image Replication (AIR). You
must configure at least one remote user before you can enable
Automatic Image Replication for an LSU (see Adding an LSU on
page 281). When using OST Automatic Image Replication (AIR), the
remote user credentials specified on the source DXi must match the
local user credentials on the target (remote) DXi.
To access the Manage Remote Users page, on the OST page, click the
Manage Remote Users tab (see Figure 158).

Figure 158 Manage Remote

Users Page

Use the Manage Users page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about remote users (see Manage Remote Users
List on page 290).
• Add a remote user (see Adding a Remote User on page 291).
• Edit a remote user (see Editing a Remote User on page 292).
• Delete a remote user (see Deleting a Remote User on page 292).

Manage Remote Users List

The Manage Remote Users list displays the following information for
all remote users:
• Name - The name of the remote user.

290 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

• Description - A brief description of the remote user (if available).

Note: To update the list with the latest information, click Refresh.

Adding a Remote User

Add a remote user to create OST user credentials for use with OST AIR.
When you enable Automatic Image Replication for an LSU, you specify a
remote user. The remote user credentials on the source DXi must match
the local user credentials on the target (remote) DXi.
To add a remote user:
1 Click Add.
The Add Remote AIR Credential window displays (see Figure 159).

Figure 159 Add Remote AIR

Credential

2 Enter information about the remote user:

• User name - Enter the name of the remote user.
• New Password - Enter the password for the remote user.
• Confirm New Password - Enter the password again to confirm
it.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the remote
user.
3 Click Apply.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 291

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Editing a Remote User

Edit a remote user to change the user's password or description.
To edit a remote user:
1 Select the user and click Edit.
The Edit Remote Credentials window displays (see Figure 160).

Figure 160 Edit Remote

Credentials

2 Enter information about the remote user:

Note: If you are editing a remote user, you cannot change the
User name.

• New Password - Enter the password for the remote user.

• Confirm New Password - Enter the password again to confirm
it.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the remote
user.
3 Click Apply.

Deleting a Remote User

Delete a remote user if the OST user credentials are no longer needed to
authenticate an LSU for Automatic Image Replication.
To delete a remote user, select the user and click Delete.

292 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Note: You can select multiple users to delete at once.

Target IP Mapping The Target IP Mapping page allows you to map a target data IP address
to route all network traffic sent to the data IP address to the specified
replication IP address instead. This can be necessary if the target DXi is
configured with different network interfaces (and therefore different IP
addresses) for data and replication traffic (see Network on page 315).
Generally, OST traffic is routed to the data network segment. However,
the OST Automatic Image Replication (AIR) and Concurrent Optimized
Duplication features use the replication network segment to transmit
data to the target system. (Optimized duplication can optionally use the
replication channel.) When a data IP address is mapped to a replication
IP address, OST traffic that is sent to one of the IP addresses is routed to
the other IP address as necessary.

Note: You must add target IP mapping information if you are

performing optimized duplication on a segmented network
and replication is not configured between the source DXi and
target DXi.

Note: Quantum does not recommend mapping multiple data IP

addresses to a single replication IP address. If you have mapped
multiple data IP addresses and the routing is not working, try
removing the additional data IP addresses, and map only a
single data IP address.

To access the Target IP Mapping page, on the OST page, click the
Target IP Mapping tab (see Figure 161).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 293

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Figure 161 Target IP Mapping

Page

Use the Target IP Mapping page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about mapped data and replication IP addresses
(see Target IP Mapping List on page 294).
• Map a target data IP address to a replication IP address (see
Mapping a Target IP Address on page 295).
• Edit the mapping for a target data IP address (see Editing a Mapped
IP Address on page 295).
• Delete the mapping for a target data IP address (see Deleting a
Mapped IP Address on page 296).

Target IP Mapping List

The Target IP Mapping list displays the following information for all
mapped IP addresses:
• Target Data IP - The mapped target data IP address.
• Target Replication IP - The replication IP address to which the data
IP address is mapped.
By default, items in the list are grouped by target replication IP address.
To turn off grouping, click the arrow to the right of a column heading
and clear the Show in groups check box.

Note: To update the list with the latest information, click Refresh.

294 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Mapping a Target IP Address

Add mapping for a target data IP address to route all network traffic
sent to the address to the specified replication IP address instead.
To map a target IP address:
1 Click Add.
The Add Target Data IP Mapping window displays (see
Figure 162).

Figure 162 Add Target Data IP

Mapping

2 Enter information about the mapping:

• Target Data IP - The target data IP address to map.
• Target Replication IP - The replication IP address to map the
data IP address to.
3 Click Apply.

Editing a Mapped IP Address

Edit a mapped IP address to route traffic sent to the target data IP
address to a different replication IP address.
To edit a mapped IP address:
1 Select the mapped IP address and click Edit.
The Edit Target Data IP Mapping window displays (see Figure 163).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 295

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Figure 163 Edit Target Data IP

Mapping

2 In the Target Replication IP box, enter the replication IP address to

map the data IP address to.

Note: If you are editing a mapped IP address, you cannot change

the target data IP address.

3 Click Apply.

Deleting a Mapped IP Address

Delete a mapped IP address if traffic sent to the target data IP address
no longer needs to be routed to a replication IP address
To delete a mapped IP address, select the IP address and click Delete.

Note: You can select multiple mapped IP addresses to delete at once.

DXi Accent Use the Accent page to enable or disable DXi Accent. Quantum’s DXi
Accent software accelerates backups and reduces network bandwidth
requirements by distributing deduplication between the backup server
and the DXi. OST data sent from the media server to the DXi can be
encrypted using AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption
methods.
To access the Accent page, on the OST page, click the Accent tab (see
Figure 164).

296 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
OST

Figure 164 Accent Page

To configure DXi Accent:

1 To enable DXi Accent, select the Enable Deduplication with
Accent check box.
Or to disable DXi Accent, clear the Enable Deduplication with
Accent check box.

Note: You cannot use DXi Accent if you are currently using
NetBackup Accelerator or Optimized Synthetic Backups. If
you are using Accelerator, please make sure that Accent is
not enabled. For more information on using NetBackup
Accelerator, see the DXi-Series Configuration and Best
Practices Guide for NetBackup from Symantec (6-67850).

2 Click Apply.

Note: Click the Change Encryption Type link to change the OST data
encryption type (see Data Encryption on page 339).

Note: To use DXi Accent, you must install the Quantum OST Client
Plug-in on the media server. For information about installing
the OST Plug-in and using DXi Accent, see the DXi-Series
NetBackup and Backup Exec OST Configuration Guide (6-
67079).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 297

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
PTT

OST Client Plug-In Use the OST Client Plug-In page to download the Quantum OST Plug-
in.
OST (OpenStorage) technology allows Symantec NetBackup and Backup
Exec to seamlessly integrate with the DXi6902. Using OST, NetBackup
and Backup Exec can manage backups through the DXi6902 and can
take advantage of the system's capabilities, such as data deduplication
and replication. To use OST, you must first download the OST Plug-in
and install it on the NetBackup or Backup Exec media server.
To download the OST Plug-in, click Client Plug-in Download. On the
download page, download the correct OST Plug-in for your backup
application and operating system. Also on the download page, click
Installation Instructions, to download the OST Plug-in Installation
Instructions. Follow the included instructions to install the OST Plug-in
on your media server.

Note: For information about configuring and using OST with the
DXi6902, see the DXi-Series NetBackup and Backup Exec OST
Configuration Guide (6-67079).

PTT
The PTT page allows you to configure the path to tape (PTT) feature of
the DXi6902. There are two types of path to tape:
• Backup application specific path to tape allows you to move data
from the DXi to physical tape cartridges in an attached physical tape
library using an NDMP (Network Data Management Protocol)
connection. The DXi supports NDMP V4.
• OST path to tape (also called Direct To Tape) allows you to use
Symantec NetBackup to copy LSUs from a storage server on the DXi
to a physical tape library.
For information about working with storage servers and LSUs, see
OST on page 267. For detailed information about configuring and
using OST path to tape, see the DXi-Series NetBackup and Backup
Exec OST Configuration Guide (6-67079).

298 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
PTT

To access the PTT page, click the Configuration menu, and then click
the PTT tab.
The PTT page contains the following tabs:
• Physical Device Discovery
• Backup Application Specific

Physical Device The Physical Device Discovery page allows you to discover attached
Discovery physical tape libraries and tape drives. After you discover the libraries
and drives, you can use them for path to tape data movement.
To access the Physical Device Discovery page, on the PTT page, click
the Physical Device Discovery tab (see Figure 165).

Figure 165 Physical Device

Discovery Page

The Physical Device Discovery page displays the following information

for all discovered physical libraries and tape drives:
• Last scan time - The date and time a scan for attached libraries was
last performed.
• Serial Number - The serial number of the library or drive.
• Vendor - The vendor of the library or drive.
• Product ID - The product ID (name) of the library or drive.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 299

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
PTT

• State - The state of the library or drive (Enabled or Disabled).

• Drive Type - (Tape drives only) The drive type of the drive.
Use the Physical Device Discovery page to perform the following tasks:
• To discover an attached physical tape library and tape drives, click
Scan. Attached physical libraries display in the list.
• To enable or disable a physical library, select it in the list, and then
click Enable or Disable. (You can also right-click a library to enable
or disable it.)

Note: To use a physical library, it must be enabled. If you enable

or disable a library, all tape drives in the library are also
enabled or disabled.

• To view the drives in an attached library, select the library in the list.
All drives in the selected library display below.
• To enable or disable tape drives, select one or more drives in the list,
and then click Enable or Disable. (You can also right-click a drive to
enable or disable it.)

Note: To use a tape drive, it must be enabled. To enable a drive,

the parent library must be enabled.

• To remove a physical library from the list, first disconnect the Fibre
Channel cables that connect the library to the DXi6902, and then
click Scan.
• To update the libraries or drives list with the latest information, click
Refresh.

Backup Application The Backup Application Specific page allows you to create and
Specific manage authenticated users for use with the path to tape capability.
The following applications are supported for backup application specific
path to tape:
• Symantec NetBackup
• Symantec Backup Exec
• EMC Networker

300 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
PTT

• Oracle Secure Backup

• ASG-Time Navigator

Note: You must dedicate a partition within the DXi6902 for use with
NetBackup Direct to Tape (Path to Tape). The partition cannot
be shared with another backup application.

Caution: The virtual media changer and tape drives must be

assigned to the backup server (on the SAN) being used for
Backup Application Specific path to tape functionality.

To access the Backup Application Specific page, on the PTT page, click
the Backup Application Specific tab (see Figure 166).

Figure 166 Backup Application

Specific Page

Use the Backup Application Specific page to perform the following

tasks:
• View information about backup application specific users (see
Backup Application Specific User List on page 302).
• Add a backup application specific user (see Adding a Backup
Application Specific User on page 302).
• Edit a backup application specific user (see Editing a Backup
Application Specific User on page 303).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 301

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
PTT

• Delete a backup application specific user (see Deleting a Backup

Application Specific User on page 304).

Backup Application Specific User List

The Backup Application Specific User section displays the following
information for all backup application specific users:
• Username - The name of the backup application specific user.
• Description - A brief description of the backup application specific
user (if available).

Note: To update the list with the latest information, click Refresh.

Adding a Backup Application Specific User

Add a backup application specific user to create user credentials. The
user credentials are required to authenticate devices on a media server.
To add a backup application specific user:
1 Click Add.
The Add Backup Application Specific User page displays (see
Figure 167).

Figure 167 Add Backup

Application Specific User Page

2 Enter information about the backup application specific user:

• Username - Enter the name of the backup application specific
user.

302 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
PTT

• New Password - Enter the password for the backup application

specific user.
• Confirm Password - Enter the password again to confirm it.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the backup
application specific user.
3 Click Apply.

Editing a Backup Application Specific User

Edit a backup application specific user to change the user's password or
description.
To edit a backup application specific user:
1 Select the user and click Edit.
The Edit Backup Application Specific User page displays (see
Figure 168).

Figure 168 Edit Backup

Application Specific User Page

2 Enter information about the backup application specific user:

Note: If you are editing a backup application specific user, you

cannot change the Username.

• Username - (Optional) Select a different backup application

specific user to edit.
• New Password - Enter the password for the backup application
specific user.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 303

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

• Confirm New Password - Enter the password again to confirm

it.
• Description - (Optional) Enter a brief description of the backup
application specific user.
3 Click Apply.

Deleting a Backup Application Specific User

Delete a backup application specific user if the user credentials are no
longer needed to authenticate devices on a media server.
To delete a backup application specific user, select the user and click
Delete.

Note: You can select multiple users to delete at once.

Scheduler
The Scheduler page allows you to manage scheduled events on the
DXi6902, including replication and replication throttling, e-mail reports,
healthchecks, and space reclamation. With schedules, you specify when
certain events should occur, and the system automatically performs
those events at the specified time. Events can be one-time only, or they
can reoccur at defined intervals.
To access the Scheduler page, click the Configuration menu, and then
click the Scheduler tab (see Figure 169).

304 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

Figure 169 Scheduler Page

Use the Scheduler page to perform the following tasks:

• View currently scheduled events (see Viewing Scheduled Events on
page 306).
• Add a new scheduled event or edit an existing event (see ).
• Configure NAS shares or VTL partitions for scheduled replication
(see Scheduling a Share or Partition for Replication on page 309).
• Configure replication throttle events (see Scheduling Replication
Throttling on page 310).
• Configure the DXi6902 to send status and configuration reports
(see Scheduling E-mail Reports on page 312).
• Configure the DXi6902 to run healthchecks (see Scheduling
Healthchecks on page 312).
• Configure the DXi6902 to run space reclamation (see Scheduling
Space Reclamation on page 313).
• Specify when and how often an event reoccurs (see Setting
Recurrence for a Scheduled Event on page 313).
• Remove an event occurrence or event series from the schedule (see
Deleting a Scheduled Event on page 314).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 305

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

Viewing Scheduled Events

The Scheduler page displays all replication, replication throttle, e-mail
report, healthchecks, and space reclamation events scheduled to occur
in a selected time period. To view scheduled replication events for NAS
shares or VTL partitions, click the arrow next to the folder to display all
shares or partitions.
Use the following toolbar controls to adjust the schedule view (see
Figure 169):
• To show or hide all shares or partitions, click the plus [ + ] or minus
[ - ] icons.
• To filter shares or partitions based on name, begin typing in the
Filter box. Click the x to clear the filter.
• To view the schedule for a specific day, select it in the Goto pop-up
calendar.
• To view the schedule for today, click Now.
• To update the schedule view with the latest data, click the Refresh
icon.
• To move the view backward or forward in time, click the arrows.
• To change the number of days displayed at a time, click Daily,
Weekly, or Monthly.

Note: The thickness of the bars on the schedule view varies based on
the type of event and the selected time frame. Healthcheck
events have an estimated span of 6 hours. Space Reclamation
events have an estimated span of 16 hours. All other open-
ended events have a default span of 2 hours.

306 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

Figure 170 Scheduler Toolbar

Select a view

Show or hide all shares or partitions Refresh the display

Filter shares or partitions

Go to a specified day Go back

Go to today Go forward

Adding or Editing a Scheduled Event

To add or edit a scheduled event:
1 On the Scheduler page, adjust the schedule view to display the time
period when the event will occur (see Viewing Scheduled Events on
page 306). Then do one of the following actions (see Figure 171):
• To add a new event, click and drag on the schedule in the row
for the type of event to add. A new event is added where you
dragged the cursor.
To schedule replication for NAS shares or VTL partitions, click the
arrow next to the folder to display all shares or partitions. Then
click and drag in the row for the share or partition to schedule.

Note: The new event must begin after the current time,
which is indicated by the dotted vertical line.

• To edit an existing event, double-click the event. If the event is

recurring, select Open this occurrence to edit only the one
instance of the event, or select Open the series to edit the
entire recurring series, and then click OK.

Note: You cannot edit an event that occurred in the past.

Note: You can also right-click an existing event to see options for
editing an event.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 307

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

Figure 171 Adding a New

Event

Click and drag to

add a new event

Double-click to
edit an existing
event

2 Define the start and, if applicable, the end of the event.

• Specify the Start Date and Start Time using the pop-up
calendar and drop-down box.
• (Replication throttle events only) Specify the End Date and End
Time. The end date and time must occur after the start date and
time.

Note: For a new event, you can click and drag to adjust the start
and end time. For an existing event, you can drag the event
to change when it occurs. You can also drag the left or
right edge of the event to adjust the start or end time.

3 Enter a brief description of the event in the Description box. (This

description will display on the schedule view.)
4 Specify options specific to the type of event. See the following
sections:
• Scheduling a Share or Partition for Replication on page 309
• Scheduling Replication Throttling on page 310
• Scheduling E-mail Reports on page 312
• Scheduling Healthchecks on page 312

308 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

• Scheduling Space Reclamation on page 313

5 (Required for healthchecks and space reclamation) Specify when
and how often the event reoccurs (see Setting Recurrence for a
Scheduled Event on page 313).
6 Click Apply.
7 Refresh the browser window to make sure the event settings are
applied.

Caution: When adding multiple events of the same type, make sure
the events do not overlap. If two events of the same type
overlap, the later event takes precedence over the earlier
event.

Note: After a system reboot, all open-ended events (for example,

replication) will restart at their next scheduled time. Events
with end times (for example, replication throttle) that are past
their start time will have their end action occur.

Scheduling a Share or Partition for Replication

Configure a replication schedule for a NAS share or VTL partition to
automatically replicate the share or partition data to the target system
at regular intervals. Disable scheduled replication if you do not want to
automatically replicate the share or partition data to the target.

Note: Note: To schedule a share or partition for replication, you must

first add one or more replication targets (see Replication
Configuration on page 256). In addition, you must add one or
more shares or partitions with deduplication enabled and at
least one target selected (see NAS Summary on page 210 or
Partitions on page 227).

Note: Disabling replication for a share or partition, or deleting a share

or partition, does not delete any scheduled replication events
for that share or partition. If you no longer want to schedule
the share or partition for replication, manually delete the
schedule (see Deleting a Scheduled Event on page 314).

To configure a replication schedule for a share or partition:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 309

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

1 On the Scheduler page, add or edit an event in the NAS

Replication or VTL Replication row (see Adding or Editing a
Scheduled Event on page 307).
2 In the Share or Partition drop-down box, select the share or
partition to schedule for replication.
Only shares or partitions that are enabled for deduplication appear
in the drop-down box.

Note: Scheduling a share or partition that has replication

disabled will automatically enable replication.

3 In the Target drop-down box, select the replication target you want
to replicate the share or partition to.
4 Click OK.
5 (Optional) Specify when and how often the event reoccurs (see
Setting Recurrence for a Scheduled Event on page 313).
6 Click Apply.

Scheduling Replication Throttling

During replication throttling, the DXi6902 limits the amount of source
replication data it sends to not exceed a specified maximum bandwidth.
Schedule replication throttling to control the amount of network
bandwidth used by source replication at certain times. For example, you
might configure replication throttling to occur during planned backup
times to avoid network contention.

Note: For more information about configuring the DXi6902 for

replication, see DXi6902 Replication on page 119.

To schedule replication throttling:

1 On the Scheduler page, add or edit an event in the Replication
Throttle row (see Adding or Editing a Scheduled Event on
page 307).
2 Specify the maximum allowed bandwidth by entering a value in the
Bandwidth box and selecting the units in the drop-down box (KB/s
or MB/s). The lowest value you can set is 32 KB/s. The highest value
you can set is 125 MB/s.

310 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

Caution: Do not set the maximum allowed bandwidth to a value

that is lower than necessary. If the maximum allowed
bandwidth is set to the lowest value, large replication
jobs may fail.

During the replication throttle event, the DXi will limit the amount
of data it sends during source replication so that it does not exceed
the specified bandwidth. After the replication throttle event ends,
the DXi will no longer throttle the sending of source replication data
(until the next replication throttle event occurs).
Do not configure a throttle schedule if a constant throttle is enabled
(see Enabling System Throttling on page 263). The scheduled
replication throttling bandwidth settings take precedence over the
constant throttle value. (The currently active replication throttle rate
appears on the Home page under Current Activity.)
3 (Optional) Specify when and how often the event reoccurs (see
Setting Recurrence for a Scheduled Event on page 313).
4 Click Apply.

About Replication Throttling Statistics

Keep in mind the following information when observing actual network
bandwidth usage during a replication throttle event:
• During a replication throttle event, only outgoing replication data
traffic is throttled, not other outgoing traffic. Because of this, you
may observe network usage to be higher than the specified
maximum bandwidth. Differences in the sampling time period may
also cause discrepancies between the specified maximum
bandwidth and observed traffic.
• If the DXi is configured to use a bonded network interface for
replication traffic, load balancing is determined independently by
the bonding mode selected for the interface (see Network on
page 315). Because of this, you may need to sum the values for all
slave devices in the bonded interface to calculate the overall
outgoing traffic rate.
• The replication throttle bandwidth maximum is specified in KB/s or
MB/s, so depending on the statistic or report you are observing, you
may need to convert the bandwidth maximum to Kb/s or Mb/s in
order to correctly compare it to the observed values.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 311

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

Scheduling E-mail Reports

The DXi6902 can automatically generate a report with system status
data or with configuration data and send it to all configured e-mail
recipients.

Note: To enable the DXi6902 to send e-mail, you must specify an

outgoing e-mail server (see Server on page 357). In addition,
you must specify one or more recipients (see Email Reports on
page 360).

To configure a schedule for e-mail reports:

1 On the Scheduler page, add or edit an event in the Email Reports
row (see Adding or Editing a Scheduled Event on page 307).
2 In the Report Type drop-down box, select the type of e-mail report
to schedule (Status or Configuration).
3 (Optional) Specify when and how often the event reoccurs (see
Setting Recurrence for a Scheduled Event on page 313).
4 Click Apply.

Scheduling Healthchecks
During healthchecks, the DXi6902 performs tests to verify the health
and integrity of the data deduplication blockpool. Schedule
healthchecks regularly to make sure the system is healthy and operating
correctly. When you schedule healthchecks, only the healthchecks that
are currently enabled are run.

Note: For more information about enabling healthchecks, see

Healthchecks on page 382.

To configure a schedule for healthchecks:

1 On the Scheduler page, add or edit an event in the Healthchecks
row (see Adding or Editing a Scheduled Event on page 307).
2 Specify when and how often the event reoccurs (see Setting
Recurrence for a Scheduled Event on page 313).

312 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

Caution: For correct system operation, healthchecks must be run

at regular intervals (at least once a week).You can
schedule healthchecks to occur daily or weekly but not
monthly or yearly. Also, recurrence is required.

3 Click Apply.

Scheduling Space Reclamation

During space reclamation, the DXi6902 deletes unneeded tags from the
blockpool to free up disk space. Schedule space reclamation regularly to
make sure there is enough disk space to store data.

Caution: Because space reclamation can affect system performance,

avoid running space reclamation during known backup
periods.

Note: For more information about space reclamation, see Space

Reclamation on page 389.

To configure a schedule for space reclamation:

1 On the Scheduler page, add or edit an event in the Space
Reclamation row (see Adding or Editing a Scheduled Event on
page 307).
2 Specify when and how often the event reoccurs (see Setting
Recurrence for a Scheduled Event on page 313).

Caution: For correct system operation, space reclamation must

be run at regular intervals (at least once a week).You
can schedule space reclamation to occur daily or
weekly but not monthly or yearly. Also, recurrence is
required.

3 Click Apply.

Setting Recurrence for a Scheduled Event

To specify when and how often the event reoccurs:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 313

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Scheduler

1 On the Scheduler page, add or edit an event (see Adding or Editing

a Scheduled Event on page 307).
2 In the Repeats drop-down box, select Does not repeat to disable
recurrence. Or to enable recurrence, select how often the event
reoccurs:

Note: Healthchecks and space reclamation must occur at least

every seven days or once a week.

• Daily - Specify the recurrence interval in days.

• Weekly - Specify the recurrence interval in weeks, and select the
days the event occurs on.
3 For recurring events, specify how long the recurrence continues
(forever, for a certain number of occurrences, or until a specific
date).

Note: For healthchecks and space reclamation, recurrence is

always forever.

4 Click Apply.

Deleting a Scheduled Event

To delete an event occurrence or event series.
1 On the Scheduler page, right-click an event.
2 On the pop-up menu, select an option:
• Delete this occurrence - Remove the selected occurrence in an
event series from the schedule.
• Delete all occurrences - Remove the entire event series from
the schedule.
The event or series is deleted from the schedule and will no longer
occur.

314 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

System
The System page allows you to configure system settings for the
DXi6902, including network settings, system date and time, and security
settings. You can also change Fibre Channel port settings.
To access the System page, click the Configuration menu, and then
click the System tab.
The System page contains the following tabs:
• Network
• Date & Time
• Security
• FC Initiators and Targets

Network The Network page allows you to view and change network
configuration information for the DXi6902. The DXi6902 uses this
information to connect to the network.
Network configuration information is entered during initial setup
DXi6902. You should consult your network administrator before making
any changes to the network settings.

Caution: Changing the network configuration requires a system

reboot to allow all system services to function correctly.
Changing the network configuration requires a system
reboot immediately after the changes are applied.

Note: Rebooting the system can take several minutes. After the new
network configuration is saved, close your Web browser and
wait 15 minutes before logging in again. If you change the IP
address that you use to log in to the system, you will
temporarily lose your connection to the remote management
console. Because of this, you might not see a confirmation
page informing you that the new settings have been saved.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 315

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

To access the Network page, on the System page, click the Network
tab (see Figure 172).

Figure 172 Network

Configuration

Configuring the Network

Using the Network page, each Ethernet port in the DXi can be
configured as a separate device. In addition, you can create bonded
devices (logical ports) consisting of two or more ports of the same link
speed (1GbE or 10GbE). For each port or device, you can specify the
MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) frame size.
After you define devices (single port or bonded), you can create up to
ten network interfaces for each device. Each interface has its own IP
address information. In addition, you can configure the following
options for each interface:
• Assign the interface to a VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network).
• Indicate whether the interface IP address will be used to externally
identify the system (external host IP address).
• Specify the types of traffic allowed on the interface (management,
replication, or data).
• Specify the NAT address that the interface is mapped to if it is used
for replication through a NAT firewall.

316 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

• Add routing information for an interface to enable connectivity with

devices on different subnets.

Note: You can choose to allow any traffic type (management,

replication, or data) on an interface. In this case, the routing of
different traffic types, as well as firewall capability, must be
controlled using the network infrastructure (routers and
switches) that the DXi is connected to.

Configuring the network includes the following major steps:

Note: Before configuring the network, work with your network

administrator to determine the network settings that will be
required to properly integrate the DXi6902 with your
company’s network.

1 Configuring General Network Settings on page 317

2 Configuring Bonding Details on page 319
3 Configuring Interface Details on page 321
4 Configuring Interface IP Addresses on page 321
5 Configuring Interface Routing on page 325
6 Applying Network Settings on page 326

Configuring General Network Settings

Under General, enter the following network information as provided by
your network administrator (see Figure 173):

Figure 173 Network Page:

General

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 317

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Note: When entering IP addresses, never use an address that is in a

reserved IP address range. To see a list of reserved IP address
ranges, click the quick tip icon [?] located near the IP address
field.

• Hostname - The hostname of the DXi6902.

The Hostname cannot be blank and must contain only letters
[ A–Z, a–z ], numbers [ 0–9 ], and hyphens [ - ].
• Default Gateway - The default gateway IP address.
Specifying a default gateway is optional if all access is local to a
particular subnet. For example, if the DXi6902 and all of its clients
are on the same subnet, you do not need to specify a default
gateway.

Caution: Specifying a default gateway is required to enable

connectivity with all subnets other than those that the
DXi6902 is directly connected to. For example, if the
DXi6902 and its clients are on different subnets, or you
are using an external NTP server, you must specify a
default gateway.

• DNS Suffix Search List - (Optional) The domain list to search when
resolving domain names.
The list may be either a single domain name or a comma-separated
list of up to 6 domain names. The first domain name listed is used
as the local domain. Domain names must contain only letters [ A–Z,
a–z ], numbers [ 0–9 ], dots [ . ], and hyphens [ - ].
• Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary DNS IP Address - (Optional) The
IP addresses of up to three DNS servers used to resolve domain
names and translate them into IP addresses.

Note: You must specify a DNS IP address if you plan to use

hostname format when configuring an NTP time server,
outgoing e-mail server, replication sources and targets, and
other information.

318 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Note: The DNS Suffix Search List and DNS IP Addresses cannot be
modified if the DXi6902 is currently joined to a Windows
domain. To disjoin a Windows domain, see Windows Domain
on page 217.

Configuring Bonding Details

Under IP Address Configuration > Bonding Details, configure bonded
devices (see Figure 174):

Figure 174 Network Page:

Bonding Details

1 If necessary, click the Show link to show the bonding details table.
2 For each available bonded device (bond0, bond1, and so on), select
two or more Ethernet ports with the same link speed to assign to
the bond. Or select Not Bonded to leave a port unassigned to any
bond.
If no ports are assigned to a bond, the bond cannot be configured.
That is, settings cannot be entered for the bond in the Interface
Details or IP Address tables because no Ethernet ports are assigned
to the device.
All ports assigned to the same device are bonded together into a
single logical port. For example, if you select bond0 for port eth0
and port eth1, both ports are bonded together in the bond0
device. A bonded device can contain two or more ports.

Note: All ports associated with a bond must have the same link
speed (1GbE or 10GbE).

3 For each bonded device, specify the bonding mode:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 319

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Note: To maintain network connectivity, the switch connected to

the DXi6902 must be configured to use the same bonding
mode. The best time to change the bonding mode on the
switch is during the next reboot of your system, after
saving the new network settings. Changing the bonding
mode on the switch before saving these settings and
rebooting may result in the loss of network connectivity to
the system.

• Round Robin (Mode 0) - This option sends Ethernet frames

using the bonded Ethernet ports with a valid MII link. Frames
are sent in a round-robin fashion, starting with the first slave
device and then the rest of the devices. This only applies to the
traffic sent from the DXi6902. The Ethernet switch needs to
aggregate the ports, so the connected ports are treated as a
logical port. The DXi frame reception is completely dependent
on the transmission algorithm of the Ethernet switch. The
bonding mechanism does not balance the frame reception.
• LACP (Mode 4) - This option (Link Aggregation Control
Protocol) is based on the 802.3ad IEEE standard for aggregating
Ethernet ports. If the bonding algorithm is set to LACP, the
Ethernet switch ports must be configured in a 802.3ad based
Link Aggregation group (LAG) in LACP mode. The DXi frame
reception and transmission is controlled by the LACP between
the bonded ports and the Ethernet switch ports.
• Active Backup (Mode 1) - This option does not require switch
configuration but may not provide the same level of load
balancing and performance as other bonding modes. Only one
port in the bond is active at a time. If the active port fails,
another port becomes active to take its place. Because only the
MAC address of the active port is visible to the Ethernet switch,
the switch does not require additional configuration.
4 Click Update to save the changes you made to the Bonding Details
table. (Clicking Update does not yet apply the new network settings
to the DXi6902.)
Click Undo to revert to all current Bonding Details changes to the
last update.

320 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Configuring Interface Details

Under IP Address Configuration > Interface Details, configure jumbo
Ethernet frame settings for each port or device (see Figure 175):

Figure 175 Network Page:

Interface Details

1 If necessary, click the Show link to show the interface details table.
2 For each device, select the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) frame
size in the Jumbo Frame MTU Size drop-down box.
• 1500 MTU - (Default) The standard (STD) MTU frame size of
1,500 bytes is used.
• 9000 MTU - The jumbo MTU frame size of 9,000 bytes is used.
(For best performance, make sure the entire network path to
the DXi is configured to use 9000 MTU.)
3 Click Update to save the changes you made to the Interface Details
table. (Clicking Update does not yet apply the new network settings
to the DXi6902.)
Click Undo to revert to all current Interface Details changes to the
last update.

Configuring Interface IP Addresses

Under IP Address Configuration > IP Address Table, configure one or
more network interfaces for each port or device (Ethernet port or
bonded device) (see Figure 176):

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 321

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Figure 176 Network Page: IP

Address Table

1 Click Add IP to add a network interface to a device.

Or select an interface to edit the IP address, netmask, gateway and
traffic type. (To select an interface, click the radio button next to the
interface index name, for example, bond0:2.)

Note: A maximum of 10 IP addresses are allowed per device. All

IP addresses in the IP Address Table (added or modified)
must be valid and unique, and must have a valid gateway
and netmask.

2 In the VLAN ID column, select the check box to enable VLAN

tagging for the interface. (Or clear the check box to disable VLAN
tagging for the interface.)
VLAN tagging allows you to assign an interface to a virtual local
area network (VLAN). With VLAN tagging, you can route different
traffic types (management, data, and replication) over different
VLANs, making sure traffic types do not mix.
If VLAN tagging is enabled, enter the VLAN Tag ID for the interface.
(Valid values are 2 to 4094. You can assign only one tag ID to an
interface.)

Note: The maximum allowed number of VLAN tag IDs is 64. If you
attempt to add more than 64 VLAN tag IDs, an error
displays.

322 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Note: To maintain connectivity, the switch ports connected to the

DXi must be configured to accept the correct VLAN tag ID.

Caution: If VLAN tagging is enabled for an interface, DXi

Advanced Reporting is unable to collect and record
statistics for traffic moving over the VLAN interface (for
example, eth1.400). Statistics are still collected for the
base device (for example, eth1.)

3 In the External Host IP column, select the check box to designate

the interface as an external host IP. This associates the interface IP
address with the host name of the DXi, and the DXi is externally
identified by the host IP. The following restrictions apply:
• You can designate only one external host IP for the network
configuration.
• You must specify a traffic type of Mgmt (management) or Any
for the external host IP interface.
• You must specify a valid Default Gateway in the General
section. In addition, the external host IP must be on the same
subnet as the Default Gateway to ensure external
communication.
4 Enter the following network information as provided by your
network administrator (all fields are required):
• IP Address - The IP address of the interface.
• Netmask - The network mask of the interface.
• Gateway - The gateway of the DXi6902. (This is usually not the
same as the default gateway.)
5 If necessary, specify NAT (Network Address Translation) settings for
the interface:

Note: If the DXi6902 is a replication target and is behind a NAT

router, you must configure a NAT IP Address

• NATed - Select the check box if the IP address of the DXi is

translated by a firewall to a NAT IP address when the DXi
communicates to the outside world.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 323

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

• NAT IP Address - The IP address used to access the DXi from the
public network. The router that connects the DXi to the Internet
performs Network Address Translation that maps the IP address
of the DXi to the NAT IP address, providing a valid replication
interface for a source DXi.
6 Select the check box for each type of network traffic allowed on the
interface (segmentation):

Note: At least one interface must allow management traffic.

Note: If the DXi is configured for source or target replication, you

should configure at least one interface to allow replication
traffic (select Repl or Any) before applying changes to
network settings.

Note: If you configure segmentation for non-bonded interfaces

(Ethernet ports) that are on the same subnet, all traffic will
use the lowest numbered Ethernet port first, no matter
how segmentation is configured. To avoid this issue, create
bonded interfaces, and then select the desired traffic type
for each bonded interface.

• Mgmt - Select to allow management traffic.

• Repl - Select to allow replication traffic.
• Data - Select to allow data traffic.
• Any - Select to allow all types of traffic (management,
replication, and data).
7 Click Update to save the changes you made to the IP Address table.
(Clicking Update does not yet apply the new network settings to
the DXi6902.)
Click Delete to remove IP address information for the selected
interface. Or click Undo to revert all current IP Address Table
changes to the last update.

324 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Note: When you add a network interface, a default route (via the
default gateway) is automatically created for the interface after
network settings are applied and the DXi reboots. For example,
if you add an interface with IP address 10.20.185.172, a route
with the destination IP address 10.20.185.0 is automatically
added. If you delete the default route, it is automatically added
again the next time network settings are applied and the DXi
reboots. For more information about interface routing, see
Understanding Interface Routing on page 327.

Configuring Interface Routing

Some network configurations require that you specify routing details for
an interface. You need to specify routing details if the host or client the
interface connects to is on a different subnet that is not reachable using
the default gateway. You also need to specify routing details if you have
configured multiple network segments (replication, data, or
management) on the same subnet. For more information and examples,
see Understanding Interface Routing on page 327.
Under IP Address Configuration > Routing Details, enter routing
information for one or more interfaces (see Figure 177):

Figure 177 Network Page:

Routing Details

1 In the IP Address Table (above routing details), select an interface

to add or modify routing data. (To select an interface, click the radio
button next to the interface index name, for example, bond0:2.)
After selecting an interface in the IP Address Table, the Routing
Details table below expands to display available routes (if any).

Note: A maximum of 8 routes per interface are allowed.

2 If necessary, click the Show link to show the routing details table.
3 Click Add Route to add a route to the selected interface.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 325

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Or select a route to edit its settings.

4 Enter the following network information as provided by your
network administrator:
• Destination - The destination network for the route.
• Dest Netmask - The network mask for the route.
• Dest Gateway - The gateway IP address used for outgoing
traffic sent from the interface to a host or client. (This is usually
not the same as the default gateway.)

Note: The destination gateway of each route must match the

subnet of at least one configured IP address listed in the IP
Address Table. If no match is found, an error displays
stating that the route’s destination gateway is not
reachable.

Note: In the example shown in Figure 178, to reach a host on the

10.50.50.x subnet, you would enter 10.50.50.0 for
destination network, 255.255.255.0 for the destination
netmask, and 10.20.20.1 as the destination gateway.

5 Click Update to save the changes you made to the Routing Details
table. (Clicking Update does not yet apply the new network settings
to the DXi6902.)
Click Delete to remove IP routing information for the selected
interface. Or click Undo to revert all current Routing Details changes
to the last update.

Applying Network Settings

For network changes to take effect, you must apply the changes, finalize
the confirmation, and reboot the system. To apply all changed settings
on the Network page to the DXi6902, click Apply at the bottom of the
page. Follow the prompts to confirm the changes and reboot the
system.

Note: To revert all network settings to the initial state and undo all
changes, click the Reset button.

326 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Understanding Interface Routing

For a network on the interface to communicate with a host located on a
different subnet, you must specify routing information in the Routing
Details section. Routing is used to direct outgoing traffic from a
network interface on the DXi to an IP address in another subnet by
means of a destination gateway. Responses from the destination are
routed back to the DXi using the gateway specified for the interface in
the IP Address Table section.
In addition, when configuring segmented network interfaces, if the
source DXi replication, data, and management interfaces are on the
same subnet, you must add a host route on the source DXi to make sure
the replication interface is correctly selected when replicating data to
the target DXi.
See the following examples for details:
• Example 1: Segments and Target on Different Subnets
• Example 2: Segments and Target on the Same Subnet
• Example 3: Segments on the Same Subnet and Target on a Different
Subnet

Example 1: Segments and Target on Different Subnets

In the example below (see Figure 178), the DXi has two segmented
interfaces, one for management traffic and one for data traffic:
• The management interface is assigned to the 10.30.24.x subnet in
the IP Address Table section. This subnet connects to the corporate
network by mean of the default gateway (10.30.24.1).
• The data interface is assigned to the 10.20.20.x subnet in the IP
Address Table section. This subnet connects to a gateway at
10.20.20.1.
• Using the data interface, the DXi needs to connect to a backup host
that is on the 10.50.50.x subnet. Because this host is not on the
same subnet as the data interface, the DXi cannot communicate
with the host unless you specify routing information in the Routing
Details section.
In this example, you would specify 10.50.50.0 for destination
network, 255.255.255.0 for the destination netmask, and
10.20.20.1 as the destination gateway.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 327

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Note: The gateway specified in the IP Address Table section is for

incoming traffic to the interface. The gateway specified in the
Routing Details section is for outgoing traffic from the
interface.

Figure 178 Interface Routing:

Example 1

Host or Client

Corporate Network

10.50.50.x subnet
10.50.50.1 gateway

10.20.20.x subnet
10.30.24.x subnet 10.20.20.1 gateway

Default Gateway
10.30.24.1 Management IP: 10.30.24.100
Data IP: 10.20.20.100 10.40.40.x subnet
10.40.40.1 gateway

Host or Client

Example 2: Segments and Target on the Same Subnet

In the example below (see Figure 179), the DXi has two segmented
interfaces, one for data and management traffic, and one for replication
traffic:

328 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

• The source DXi management/data IP address, the source DXi

replication IP address, and the target DXi IP address are all on the
same subnet (192.168.10.x).
• To make sure the replication segment is used when communicating
with the target DXi, you must add a host route in the Routing
Details section on the source DXi.
In this example, you would specify the following routing details for
the replication interface on the source DXi:
• Destination - Use the IP address of the target DXi
(192.168.10.200).
• Dest Netmask - Use 255.255.255.255.
• Dest Gateway - Use the replication IP address of the source DXi
(192.168.10.100).

Figure 179 Interface Routing:

Example 2

Source DXi Target DXi

192.168.10.x subnet

Replication IP: IP: 192.168.10.200

192.168.10.100
Management/Data IP:
192.168.10.101

Example 3: Segments on the Same Subnet and Target on a Different

Subnet
In the example below (see Figure 180), the DXi has two segmented
interfaces, one for data and management traffic, and one for replication
traffic:
• The source DXi management/data IP address and the source DXi
replication IP address are on the same subnet (192.168.10.x). The
target DXi IP address is on a different subnet (192.168.20.x)

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 329

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

• To make sure the replication segment is used when communicating

with the target DXi, you must add a network route in the Routing
Details section on the source DXi.
In this example, you would specify the following routing details for
the replication interface on the source DXi:
• Destination - Use the subnet of the target DXi (192.168.20.0).
• Dest Netmask - Use 255.255.255.0.
• Dest Gateway - Use the IP address of the gateway
(192.168.10.1).
• In addition, to enable communication with the target DXi by means
of the gateway, you must add a second host route in the Routing
Details section on the source DXi.
In this example, you would specify a second set of routing details
for the replication interface on the source DXi:
• Destination - Use the IP address of the gateway (192.168.10.1).
• Dest Netmask - Use 255.255.255.255.
• Dest Gateway - Use the replication IP address of the source DXi
(192.168.10.100).

Figure 180 Interface Routing:

Example 3

Source DXi Target DXi

192.168.10.x subnet 192.168.20.x subnet

Replication IP: Gateway IP: IP: 192.168.20.200

192.168.10.100 192.168.10.1
Management/Data IP:
192.168.10.101

330 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Backpanel Locations
The Backpanel Locations section at the bottom of the Network page
displays a graphical representation of the Ethernet ports as they appear
on the rear of the system (see Figure 181).
The diagram indicates the current bonding configuration and
connectivity status for all Ethernet ports.
• Ports that are bonded together in an interface are shaded the same
color.
• A green border indicates a port is connected to a network.
• A red border indicates a port is configured but is not connected to a
network.
• Click Update Port View to update the information on the diagram.

Figure 181 Network Page:

Backpanel Locations

Date & Time The Date & Time page allows you to set the system date and time of the
DXi6902. You can specify a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server to
synchronize the system time with, or you can manually enter the date
and time.

Caution: Changing the date and time settings requires a system

reboot immediately after the changes are applied. Wait for
at least 15 minutes before logging back in.

Note: If you intend to join the DXi6902 to a Windows network using

Active Directory for NAS storage, Quantum recommends using
an NTP Server to set the system date and time (see Windows
Domain on page 217).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 331

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

To access the Date & Time page, on the System page, click the Date &
Time tab (see Figure 182).

Figure 182 Date & Time Page

To set the system date and time:

1 Select one of the following options:
• Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server - (Recommended) Select
this option to synchronize the DXi6902 with an NTP timeserver
or pool. Then select or specify a timeserver or pool.
• Select a Timeserver Pool - (Recommended) Select one of
the well-known, geographically-based NTP timeserver pools
in the drop-down box.

Note: To select a timeserver pool, you must first specify at

least one DNS IP address on the Network page (see
Network on page 315). Otherwise, you must
specify the IP address of the timeserver pool.

• Specify a Timeserver or Pool - Type the name or IP address

of the NTP server or pool. (See http://support.ntp.org for
information about publicly available NTP servers)
To verify that the DXi6902 can communicate with the NTP server
or pool, click Test NTP.

332 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

• Manual Date & Time Settings - Select this option to manually

set the system date and time.
Specify the New System Date by clicking the calendar icon.
Specify the New System Time using the drop-down boxes.
2 In the Timezone drop-down box, select the time zone where the
DXi6902 is located.
3 Next to Time Format, select the format to use when displaying
times (24 hours or 12 hours).
4 Click Apply.

Security The Security page allows you to configure security settings for the
DXi6902, including access passwords, SSL settings, and the inactivity
timeout.
To access the Security page, click the Configuration menu, and then
click the Security tab.
The Security page contains the following tabs:
• Web & CLI Passwords
• SSL
• Data Encryption
• Login Session
• Security Notice
• Data-at-Rest Encryption

Web & CLI Passwords

The Web & CLI Passwords page allows you to change the account
passwords for the remote management console (Web) and the
command line interface (CLI). You can also enable or disable the CLI
account.
The DXi6902 has two access levels for logging onto the remote
management console or the CLI:
• Monitor - Allowed to view information on the DXi6902 remote
management console or the CLI but cannot make changes.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 333

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

• Administrator - Allowed to view and change information on the

DXi6902 remote management console or the CLI.
To access the Web & CLI Passwords page, on the Security page, click
the Web & CLI Passwords tab (see Figure 183).

Figure 183 Web & CLI

Passwords Page

Use the Web & CLI Passwords page to perform the following tasks:
• Change the administrator or monitor password for Web access (see
Changing Web Passwords on page 334).
• Enable or disable CLI access for the administrator or monitor
account (see Enabling CLI Accounts on page 335).
• Change the administrator or monitor password for CLI access (see
Changing CLI Passwords on page 335).
• Reset the CLI administrator or monitor password to the factory
default (see Resetting CLI Passwords on page 336).

Changing Web Passwords

Use the Web passwords when logging onto the remote management
console as an administrator or monitor (see Accessing Remote
Management on page 50).

334 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

To change the Web passwords:

1 Under Web Administrator Password or under Web Monitor
Password, enter the following information:
• Old Password - Enter the old password.
• New Password - Enter the new password.
• Confirm New Password - Enter the new password again to
confirm it.

Note: The default password is password.

Note: Passwords are limited to 15 characters. Alphanumeric

characters and special characters are allowed.

2 Click Apply.

Enabling CLI Accounts

The CLI accounts provide access to the DXi6902 command line interface
as an administrator or monitor.

Note: For more information about using the CLI, see the DXi6902
Command Line Interface (CLI) Guide.

To enable or disable the CLI accounts:

1 Under CLI Administrator Login Settings or under CLI Monitor
Login Settings, do one of the following steps:
• Select the Enable CLI Login check box to enable the CLI
account.
• Clear the Enable CLI Login check box to disable the CLI
account.
2 Click Apply.

Changing CLI Passwords

Use the CLI passwords when logging onto the command line interface
as an administrator or monitor.
To change the CLI passwords:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 335

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

1 Under CLI Administrator Login Settings or under CLI Monitor

Login Settings, select the Change password option.
2 Enter the following information:
• Old Password - Enter the old password.
• New Password - Enter the new password.
• Confirm New Password - Enter the new password again to
confirm it.

Note: The default password for the CLI Administrator account is

cliadmin. The default password for the CLI Monitor
account is cliviewer.

Note: Passwords are limited to 15 characters. Alphanumeric

characters and special characters are allowed.

3 Click Apply.

Resetting CLI Passwords

The default password for the CLI Administrator account is cliadmin. The
default password for the CLI Monitor account is cliviewer.
To reset the CLI account passwords to their default values:
1 Under CLI Administrator Login Settings or under CLI Monitor
Login Settings, select the Reset password to factory default
option.
2 Click Apply.

SSL
The SSL page allows you to enable or disable SSL on the DXi6902. You
can also install a new SSL certificate to replace the Quantum default SSL
certificate.
To access the SSL page, on the Security page, click the SSL tab (see
Figure 184).

336 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Figure 184 SSL Page

Use the SSL page to perform the following tasks:

• Enable or disable SSL on the DXi6902 (see Enabling SSL on
page 337).

Note: If you enable SSL, see Server Authentication Warnings on

page 338 for important information about Web browser
settings.

• Install a new SSL certificate (see Installing an SSL Certificate on

page 338).

Enabling SSL
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) is a protocol that provides security and
privacy over the Internet by negotiating encryption keys before
transmitting data between a client and a server.
To establish a secure connection, the DXi6902 must have an encryption
key assigned to it by a Certification Authority in the form of a certificate
file, private key file, and pass phrase. After you install these
components, you can establish a secure connection using the SSL
protocol. The DXi6902 comes with a Quantum default SSL certificate.
To enable or disable SSL:
1 Under SSL Properties, select the Enable SSL option to enable SSL.
Or select the Disable SSL option to disable SSL.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 337

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Note: The default setting is disabled.

2 Click Apply.

Server Authentication Warnings

Enabling SSL with the default Quantum certificate allows you to
securely communicate with the DXi6902 Web-based interface using SSL
encryption. However, you may receive a warning from your Web
browser and network security scanners stating that the server you are
attempting to connect to does not match the server embedded within
the certificate.
This is expected behavior because the default certificate can only be
used for encryption and not server authentication. Quantum
recommends the default Quantum certificate be replaced with your
own official certificate specific to your DXi system. You can install your
own custom certificate in order to take advantage of server
authentication in addition to encrypted communication.
To suppress server authentication warnings for the default certificate:
• Internet Explorer - If a dialog box displays warning you of a
possible certificate error, add the IP address for the DXi6902 to the
Trusted Sites list (Tools > Internet Options > Security > Trusted
Sites). If subsequent warning pages display along with an option to
close your Web browser or continue to the Web site, click Continue.
This suppresses the warnings until you restart your Web browser.
• Firefox - If the Secure Connection Failed dialog box displays, click
the link at the bottom of the dialog box and follow the instructions
to add an exception for your DXi6902.

Installing an SSL Certificate

You can purchase and install your own custom SSL certificate in order to
take advantage of server authentication in addition to encrypted
communication on the DXi6902.
To install an SSL certificate:
1 Under Certificate, click New.
The Install New Certificate page displays (see Figure 185).

338 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Figure 185 Install New

Certificate Page

2 In the Certificate File box, type the location and filename of the
new SSL certificate file.
Or click Browse to browse the system and locate the SSL certificate
file. The SSL certificate file must be named server.crt.
3 Click Upload.
4 Type your SSL private key and press <Enter>.
5 Type your SSL passphrase and press <Enter>.
A Successful Upload page displays stating that the SSL certificate
file has been installed on the system.
6 Click OK.
The certificate displays in the Certificate section.

Data Encryption
The Data Encryption page allows you to select the type of encryption
to use for OST data transfers. OST data sent from the media server to
the DXi can be encrypted using AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
encryption methods.
This setting does not apply to data transfers during replication. For
replication, specify encryption settings when configuring the replication
or failback targets (see DXi6902 Replication on page 119).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 339

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

To access the Data Encryption page, on the Security page, click the
Data Encrypton tab (see Figure 186).

Figure 186 Data Encryption

Page

To enable or disable data encryption:

1 Select an option in the Encryption drop-down box:
• None - OST data is not encrypted.
• Default AES 128 - OST data is encrypted using AES 128-bit
encryption.
• Default AES 256 - OST data is encrypted using AES 256-bit
encryption.
• TLS with AES 256 - OST data is encrypted using AES 256-bit
encryption with Transport Layer Security (TLS).

Note: AES encryption options are available only if the Data-

in-Flight license is installed (see License Keys on
page 393).

2 If you selected the TLS with AES 256 encryption option, you must
install the required certificate and key files on the DXi:
• Certificate File
• Private Key File
• Certificate Authority File

340 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

• Rejection List File

To install a file, click the Browse button to browse the system and
locate the file, and then click Open.

Caution: Installing certificate files requires a system reboot

immediately after the changes are applied. Wait for at
least 15 minutes before logging back in.

Note: You can install new certificate and key files at any time, as
long as there are no active network connections between
the OST media server and the DXi.

3 Click Apply.

Note: To clear all changes without saving them, click Reset. To

remove user installed certificate and key files, click Restore
Factory Defaults.

Login Session
The Login Session page allows you to specify the inactivity timeout for
the DXi6902 remote management console. The default timeout is 30
minutes.
When the remote management console is inactive for the specified
period of time, the user is automatically logged off and must log back
on to continue (see Accessing Remote Management on page 50).
To access the Login Session page, on the Security page, click Login
Session (see Figure 187).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 341

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Figure 187 Login Session Page

To specify the inactivity timeout:

1 In the Inactivity Timeout box, enter the number of minutes of
inactivity before a user is automatically logged off (1–60 minutes).
2 Click Apply.

Security Notice
The Security Notice page allows you to specify a message that will
appear to all users when logging on to the remote management console
or the CLI (command line interface).
If a security notice message has been specified, the user must accept the
message in order to begin using the system. If no security notice has
been specified, the user can use the system immediately after logging
on.
To access the Security Notice page, on the Security page, click Security
Notice (see Figure 188).

342 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Figure 188 Security Notice

Page

To add or update a security notice message, enter the message in the

box and click Apply.

Data-at-Rest Encryption
The Data-at-Rest page allows you to enable Data-at-Rest Encryption on
the DXi6902 and manage security keys.
Data-at-Rest Encryption uses Self Encrypting Drive (SED) technology to
secure all data stored on the DXi6902. This includes file data and
metadata, configuration files, and the DXi software and operating
system. To enable Data-at-Rest Encryption, you must supply a
passphrase. The passphrase ensures that all physical disks are paired
with their respective controllers, and that data can only be read back
from the disk by the same controller that wrote it. If a controller must
be replaced, the passphrase is needed to enable the new controller to
access the data on the physical disks.
To enable Data-at-Rest Encryption, the feature must be licensed, and all
of the drive controllers and hard drives (active and hot spares) in the DXi
must support Self Encrypting Drive (SED) technology (not available in all
regions). A DXi6902 configuration with all 4TB SED hard drives meets
the requirements for Data-at-Rest Encryption.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 343

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Note: The Data-at-Rest page displays only if the Data-at-Rest

Encryption feature is supported on the DXi6902 and is licensed
for use. For information about installing the Data-at-Rest
Encryption license, see Licensing Data-at-Rest Encryption and
Obtaining Premium Feature Keys on page 397.

Caution: After you enable Data-at-Rest Encryption, you cannot

disable it or turn it off. Make sure to back up your
passphrase and recovery files, as they may be required for
future capacity expansion or in certain, rare hardware
failure scenarios (see Managing Recovery Files on
page 347).

To access the Data-at-Rest page, on the Security page, click the Data-
at-Rest tab (see Figure 189).

Figure 189 Data-at-Rest Page

Use the Data-at-Rest page to perform the following tasks:

344 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

• Check the current status of Data-at-Rest Encryption (see Checking

Data-at-Rest Encryption Status on page 345).
• Enable Data-at-Rest Encryption for all hard drives in the DXi6902
(see Enabling Data-at-Rest Encryption on page 345).
• Save or e-mail a Data-at-Rest Recovery file to back up your
encryption keys (see Managing Recovery Files on page 347).
• Upload a premium feature key (PFK) file to enable Data-at-Rest
Encryption on a supported Array module (see Uploading a PFK File
on page 348).

Checking Data-at-Rest Encryption Status

The current status of Data-at-Rest Encryption can be Disabled (default)
or Enabled. If it is enabled, all drives in the DXi6902 are securely
encrypted and cannot be read if removed from the system.
Click Check Status to view detailed information about the status of
Data-at-Rest Encryption and to see if the DXi6902 supports all
requirements for enabling the feature.

Enabling Data-at-Rest Encryption

When Data-at-Rest Encryption is enabled, all hard drives in the DXi6902
are paired to their respective RAID controllers using encryption keys.
These keys are generated using a passphrase that you supply.

Note: Before you can enable Data-at-Rest Encryption, you must install
the required license (see Licensing Data-at-Rest Encryption and
Obtaining Premium Feature Keys on page 397). You must also
upload a Premium Feature Key (PFK) file for each Array module
in the DXi6902 (see Uploading a PFK File on page 348).

Caution: Make sure you are certain you want to enable Data-at-Rest
Encryption before proceeding. After you enable Data-at-
Rest Encryption, you cannot disable it or turn it off.

To enable Data-at-Rest Encryption:

1 Verify that the system is in an optimal state:
• All hardware statuses on the system are Normal (see Hardware
on page 172).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 345

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Caution: All storage arrays must show Normal condition

(see Storage Arrays on page 177). If any storage
arrays are degraded, do not enable Data-at-Rest
Encryption.

• All outstanding administration alerts are deleted (see Admin

Alerts on page 199).
• All service tickets are closed (see Service Tickets on page 201).
2 Under Enable Data-at-Rest Encryption, type a security passphrase
in the Passphrase box.

Caution: If you are re-enabling Data-at-Rest Encryption, you

must enter the same passphrase that was used when
encryption was originally enabled.

The passphrase must meet all of the following requirements:

• Must be 8–32 characters long.
• Must contain at least 1 digit [0–9].
• Must contain at least 1 uppercase letter [A–Z].
• Must contain at least 1 lowercase letter [a–z].
• Must contain at least 1 non-alphanumerical character, for
example, ‘+’ or ‘@’.

Note: An underscore [ _ ] is considered an alphanumeric

character.

• Must not contain a space, tab, single quote [‘], double quote
[“], or dollar sign [$].
3 Enter the passphrase again in the Confirm Passphrase box.
4 Click Enable.
Data-at-Rest Encryption is now enabled, and all hard drives are secured
so that, if they are removed from the DXi6902, they cannot be read
using another system or device.

346 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Note: Be sure to record the passphrase in a safe location. You should

also save a backup copy of the Data-at-Rest Recovery file (see
Managing Recovery Files on page 347).

Managing Recovery Files

When Data-at-Rest Encryption is enabled, the system generates security
keys based on the supplied passphrase. The DXi6902 maintains a copy
of the security keys on the system, and they are accessed automatically
as needed.
There are a few, rare situations which may require manual entry of the
passphrase or security key, such as performing a capacity expansion, or
in the case of certain hardware failure scenarios. For this reason, you
should record the passphrase in a safe location. In addition, you should
back up the security keys by downloading or sending a Data-at-Rest
Recovery file.
To download or send a copy of the recovery file:
1 Under Download/Send Data-at-Rest Recovery File, select an
option:
• Download - Downloads a copy of the recovery file using the
Web browser.
• Email - Sends a copy of the recovery file using e-mail. If
selecting this option, type the e-mail address where you want to
send the recovery file in the Email Recipient box.

Note: For the DXi6902 to send an e-mail, you must specify an

outgoing e-mail server (see Server on page 357).

2 Type a security password in the Password box, and type it again in

the Confirm Password box.
This password is used to protect the recovery file. You will be
prompted for this password when opening the recovery file.
The password must meet all of the following requirements:
• Must be 8–32 characters long.
• Must contain at least 1 digit [0–9].
• Must contain at least 1 uppercase letter [A–Z].
• Must contain at least 1 lowercase letter [a–z].

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 347

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

• Must contain at least 1 non-alphanumerical character, for

example, ‘+’ or ‘@’.

Note: An underscore [ _ ] is considered an alphanumeric

character.

• Must not contain a space, tab, single quote [‘], double quote
[“], or dollar sign [$].
3 Click Apply.
For the download option, click OK or Save to save the recovery file to
your computer. For the e-mail option, the recovery file is automatically
sent to the e-mail address you specified.
Keep a copy of the recovery file in a safe location in case it is needed
later. The recovery file is a password-protected ZIP format file. To unzip
the file, you must enter the password specified in step 2 above. The
recovery file contains the passphrase used to enable Data-at-Rest
Encryption as well as the security keys.

Uploading a PFK File

To enable Data-at-Rest Encryption, a Premium Feature Key (PFK) file is
required for each Array module in the DXi6902. After you have
uploaded a PFK file to an Array module, it can be enabled for Data-at-
Rest Encryption.
Typically you will upload a PFK for each Array module prior to enabling
Data-at-Rest Encryption. A PFK file must also be uploaded when adding
an Array module to a DXi6902 that has Data-at-Rest Encryption
enabled, or else the module will not be encrypted.

Note: The Upload Premium Feature Key (PFK) File section displays
only if a PFK file is required. For instructions on how to obtain
the required PFK file for each Array module, see Licensing Data-
at-Rest Encryption and Obtaining Premium Feature Keys on
page 397.

Note: Before uploading a PFK file, make sure you are using a
supported Web browser (see Supported Browsers on page 50).

To upload a PFK file to an Array module:

348 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

1 Under Upload Premium Feature Key (PFK) File, select an Array

module in the Storage Array drop-down box. The PFK will be
uploaded to this module (Qarray1 or Qarray2).
The following information displays:
• Qarray ID - The identification number of the Array module.
• Feature ID - The feature identification number of the Array
module.
• PFK Installed - The PFK status (No for not installed, or Yes for
installed).

Note: The Qarray ID and Feature ID are required to initially obtain

the PFK file. If a PFK is already installed, there is no need to
upload a PFK file.

2 In the PFK File Upload box, type the location and filename of the
PFK file. Or click the button to browse the system and locate the PFK
file.

Caution: If you are uploading more than one PFK file, check the
file names carefully, and make sure to upload the
correct file to each Array module.

3 Click Upload.
The PFK file is uploaded to the selected Array module. The module can
now be enabled for Data-at-Rest Encryption.

FC Initiators and The FC Initiators & Targets page allows you to see all path to tape
Targets initiator and target ports and their associated World Wide Port Numbers
(WWPNs). You can also change a Fibre Channel port to initiator or target
mode.
To access the FC Initiators & Targets page, on the System page, click
the FC Initiators & Targets tab (see Figure 190).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 349

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

Figure 190 FC Initiators and

Targets Page

To change the port type, select

the port and click Edit

Use the FC Initiators & Targets page to perform the following tasks:
• View information about initiator and target Fibre Channel ports (see
Fibre Channel Initiators and Targets List on page 350).
• Change the mode of a Fibre Channel port (see Editing the Fibre
Channel Port Type on page 351).

Fibre Channel Initiators and Targets List

The Fibre Channel Initiators & Targets section displays the following
information for all Fibre Channel ports:
• Alias - The alias of the Fibre Channel port.
• WWPN - The World Wide Port Number of the Fibre Channel Port.
• Port Type - The current mode of the Fibre Channel port (Initiator or
Target).

Note: Click Refresh to update the list with the latest port
information.

The Backpanel Locations section displays a graphical representation of

the Fibre Channel ports as they appear on the rear of the system. The
diagram shows the status of each Fibre Channel port: Mapped Target

350 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
System

(green), Unmapped Target (yellow), Active Initiator (blue), or Inactive

Initiator (orange).

Editing the Fibre Channel Port Type

Edit the port type to change the mode of a Fibre Channel port to
initiator or target mode. You can change the port mode only on inactive
connections:
• Before changing a Fibre Channel port type from initiator to target,
unplug the Fibre Channel port wire connection.
• Before changing a Fibre Channel port type from target to initiator,
un-map any host mapping on the Fibre Channel port, and unplug
the Fibre Channel port wire connection.
To edit the Fibre Channel Port type:
1 Select the port in the list and click Edit.
2 Select the new port mode (Initiator or Target) in the drop-down
box (see Figure 190).
3 Click Update.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 351

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Notifications
The Notifications page allows you to manage the methods the DXi6902
uses to send notifications. The DXi6902 can send notifications by e-mail,
or using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol).
To access the Notifications page, click the Configuration menu, and
then click the Notifications tab.
The Notifications page contains the following tabs:
• Email
• SNMP

Email The Email page allows you to specify the recipients to notify by e-mail
when administration alerts or service tickets occur. You can specify e-
mail recipients, notification levels, and information about your e-mail
configuration. You can also configure the DXi6902 to generate and send
configuration and status reports.

Note: For more information about administration alerts and service

tickets, see DXi6902 Alerts on page 199.

To access the Email page, on the Notifications page, click the Email
tab.
The Email page contains the following tabs:
• Recipients
• Server
• Test
• Email Reports

Recipients
The Recipients page allows you to manage the e-mail recipients the
DXi6902 sends notifications to. You can add, edit, and delete e-mail
recipients, and you can specify the types of notifications to send.

352 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Note: To enable the DXi6902 to send e-mail, you must specify an

outgoing e-mail server (see Server on page 357).

To access the Recipients page, on the Email page, click the Recipients
tab (see Figure 191).

Figure 191 Recipients Page

Use the Recipients page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about e-mail recipients (see Email Recipient List
on page 353).
• Add an e-mail recipient (see Adding an E-mail Recipient on
page 354).
• Edit an e-mail recipient (see Editing an E-mail Recipient on
page 355).
• Delete an e-mail recipient (see Deleting an E-mail Recipient on
page 357).

Email Recipient List

The Email Recipient List displays the following information about e-
mail recipients:
• Name - The name of the recipient.
• Email Address - The e-mail address of the recipient.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 353

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

• Notification Type - The types of notifications sent to the recipient

(High, High and Medium, or All).
• Notification Status - The status of e-mail notifications for the
recipient (Enabled or Disabled).

Adding an E-mail Recipient

Add an e-mail recipient to send notifications about administration alerts
or service tickets to the recipient by e-mail.
To add an e-mail recipient:
1 Click Add.
The Add Email Recipient page displays (see Figure 192).

Figure 192 Add Email

Recipient Page

2 Enter information about the recipient:

• Name - The name of the recipient.
• Email Address - The e-mail address of the recipient.
• Notification Type - Select the types of notifications to send to
the recipient:
• High - Send e-mail notifications for High service tickets.
High service tickets indicate that a critical problem has
occurred and needs to be resolved immediately. The

354 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

operation and performance of the DXi6902 are degraded,

and there is a risk of system failure or data loss.
• High and Medium - Send e-mail notifications for High and
Medium service tickets.
Medium service tickets indicate that a serious problem
occurred and needs to be resolved, but it does not
necessarily need to be fixed immediately. The operation and
performance of the DXi6902 may be degraded.
• All - Send e-mail notifications for High, Middle, and Low
service tickets, as well as any administration alerts.
Low service tickets indicate that a minor problem occurred
and needs to be resolved, but the operation and
performance of the DXi6902 are not significantly affected.
3 Select the Enable notification check box to enable sending of
notifications to the recipient.
Or clear the Enable notification check box to disable sending of
notifications to the recipient.
4 Click Apply.

Editing an E-mail Recipient

Edit an e-mail recipient to change the recipient's e-mail address or the
types of notifications sent to the recipient. You can also enable or
disable sending of notifications to the recipient.
To edit an e-mail recipient:
1 Click Edit.
The Edit Email Recipient page displays (see Figure 193).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 355

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Figure 193 Edit Email

Recipient Page

2 Enter information about the recipient:

Note: If you are editing an e-mail recipient, you cannot change

the Name.

• Name - (Optional) Select a different e-mail recipient to edit.

• Email Address - The e-mail address of the recipient.
• Notification Type - Select the types of notifications to send to
the recipient:
• High - Send e-mail notifications for High service tickets.
High service tickets indicate that a critical problem has
occurred and needs to be resolved immediately. The
operation and performance of the DXi6902 are degraded,
and there is a risk of system failure or data loss.
• High and Medium - Send e-mail notifications for High and
Medium service tickets.
Medium service tickets indicate that a serious problem
occurred and needs to be resolved, but it does not
necessarily need to be fixed immediately. The operation and
performance of the DXi6902 may be degraded.
• All - Send e-mail notifications for High, Middle, and Low
service tickets, as well as any administration alerts.

356 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Low service tickets indicate that a minor problem occurred

and needs to be resolved, but the operation and
performance of the DXi6902 are not significantly affected.
3 Select the Enable notification check box to enable sending of
notifications to the recipient.
Or clear the Enable notification check box to disable sending of
notifications to the recipient.
4 Click Apply.

Deleting an E-mail Recipient

Delete an e-mail recipient if you no longer want the DXi6902 to send e-
mail notifications to the recipient.
To delete an e-mail recipient, select the recipient and click Delete.

Note: You can select multiple recipients to delete at once.

Server
The Server page allows you to specify the server for outgoing e-mail.
The DXi6902 cannot send e-mail notifications until you specify the
outgoing e-mail server.
To access the Server page, on the Email page, click the Server tab (see
Figure 194).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 357

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Figure 194 Server Page

To specify the outgoing e-mail server:

1 In the Hostname or IP Address box, enter the hostname or IP
address of the outgoing e-mail server.

Note: When entering IP addresses, never use an address that is in

a reserved IP address range. To see a list of reserved IP
address ranges, click the quick tip icon [?] located near the
IP address field.

Note: To use hostname format, you must specify at least one DNS
IP address on the Network page (see Network on
page 315).

2 In the From Email Address box, enter the return e-mail address
displayed in e-mails sent by the DXi6902.
Specify a return address that lets you easily identify the system that
generated the e-mail (for example, systemname@any-
domain.com). The return address must contain an @ symbol and a
valid domain name, including a period.
3 (Optional) Select the Enable Admin Alerts about Email Server not
configured check box to have system generate administration alerts
to notify you if an e-mail server is not configured.
4 (Recommended) Select the Enable automatic emails to Quantum
check box to periodically send system configuration and status

358 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

information to Quantum, including any software upgrades you have

installed using the Software Upgrade Utility. Quantum Support
can use this information to provide a better support experience in
the future.

Note: Automatic e-mails contain configuration and status

information only, and do not contain any customer data
stored on the system.

5 Click Apply.

Test
The Email Test page allows you to send a test e-mail to verify that e-mail
notifications are correctly configured on the DXi6902.
To access the Email Test page, on the Email page, click the Test tab (see
Figure 195).

Figure 195 Email Test Page

To send a test e-mail, select a recipient in the list and click Send. If the
recipient does not receive the e-mail, make sure that the recipient's
e-mail address is correct (see Editing an E-mail Recipient on page 355).
Also make sure that the outgoing e-mail server is correct (see Server on
page 357).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 359

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Email Reports
The Email Reports page allows you to specify the e-mail recipients for
automatically generated reports. You can also generate reports on
demand.
The system can generate a report with system status data or with
configuration data. Each report also includes the system serial number,
date and time, and a message that informs the recipient that the e-mail
is automated and they should not respond to it.

Note: To enable the DXi6902 to send e-mail, you must specify an

outgoing e-mail server (see Server on page 357).

To access the Email Reports page, on the Email page, click the Email
Reports tab.
The Email Reports page contains the following tabs:
• Recipients
• On Demand

Recipients
The Recipients page allows you to specify the e-mail recipients who will
receive all scheduled status data and configuration data reports.

Note: To configure the schedule when e-mail reports are sent, use the
Configuration > Scheduler page (see Scheduling E-mail
Reports on page 312).

To access the Recipients page, on the Email Reports page, click the
Recipients tab (see Figure 196).

360 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Figure 196 Recipients Page

Enter the e-mail addresses of up to four recipients in the boxes, and

then click Apply. When the DXi generates scheduled e-mail reports, they
will be sent to the specified addresses.

On Demand
The On Demand page allows you to manually generate a status data or
configuration data report. The report is immediately sent to the
specified e-mail recipient. You can also view configuration data.
To access the On Demand page, on the Email Reports page, click the
On Demand tab (see Figure 197).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 361

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Figure 197 On Demand Page

Use the On Demand page to perform the following tasks:

• Manually send a status data or configuration data report (see
Sending a Report on page 362).
• View a configuration data report (see Viewing Configuration Data
on page 362).

Sending a Report
To manually send a status data or configuration data report:
1 Under Email Type, select the type of report to send (Status data or
Configuration data).
2 In the Send To box, enter the e-mail address of the recipient.
3 Click Send.

Viewing Configuration Data

To view a configuration data report:
1 Under Email Type, select Configuration data.
2 Click View.
The System Configuration Report window displays.
3 (Optional) Click Save to save a local copy of the report in TXT
format.

362 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

SNMP The SNMP page allows you to configure the DXi6902 to send status
messages using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). The
DXi6902 supports SNMP v1 and v2c.
SNMP works by sending messages, called protocol data units (PDUs), to
different parts of a network, or communities. SNMP compliant devices,
called agents, store data about themselves in Management Information
Bases (MIBs) and return this data to the SNMP requesters.
You can configure the DXi6902 to act as an agent and send traps to a
specified destination. You can also add SNMP community information.
To access the SNMP page, on the Notifications page, click the SNMP
tab.
The SNMP page contains the following tabs:
• Destinations
• Community
• Test

Destinations
The Destinations page allows you to manage the destinations the
DXi6902 sends SNMP traps to. You can add, edit, and delete SNMP
destinations, and you can specify the types of traps to send.
To access the Destinations page, on the SNMP page, click the
Destinations tab (see Figure 198 on page 364).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 363

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Figure 198 Destinations Page

Use the Destinations page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about SNMP destinations (see Trap Destination
List on page 364).
• Add an SNMP destination (see Adding a Destination on page 364).
• Edit an SNMP destination (see Editing a Destination on page 366).
• Delete an SNMP destination (see Deleting a Destination on
page 367).

Trap Destination List

The Trap Destination List displays the following information about
SNMP destinations:
• IP Address - The IP address of the destination.
• Name - The name of the destination.
• Selected Traps - The traps the DXi6902 sends to the destination
(Failure, Warning, Informational, Available, or Unavailable).

Adding a Destination
Add an SNMP destination to send traps from the DXi6902 to the
destination.

Note: You can add up to 5 destinations.

364 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

To add a destination:
1 Click Add.
The Add Trap Destination page displays (see Figure 199).

Figure 199 Add Trap

Destination Page

2 Enter information about the destination:

• IP Address - Enter the IP address of the system that will receive
the traps generated by the DXi6902.

Note: When entering IP addresses, never use an address that

is in a reserved IP address range. To see a list of
reserved IP address ranges, click the quick tip icon [?]
located near the IP address field.

Note: To use hostname format, you must specify at least one

DNS IP address on the Network page (see Network on
page 315).

• Name - Enter the name of the destination.

3 Select one or more traps to send to the destination:
• Failure - Sends failure traps.
• Warning - Sends warning traps.
• Informational - Sends informational traps.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 365

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

• Available - Sends a trap when the system transitions from an

unavailable to an available state.
• Unavailable - Sends a trap when the system transitions from an
available to an unavailable state.
4 Click Apply.

Editing a Destination
Edit an SNMP destination to change the name of the destination or the
types of traps the DXi6902 sends to the destination.
To edit a destination:
1 Click Edit.
The Edit Trap Destination page displays (see Figure 200).

Figure 200 Edit Trap

Destination Page

2 Enter information about the destination:

Note: If you are editing a destination, you cannot change the IP

Address.

• IP Address - (Optional) Select a different destination to edit.

• Name - Enter the name of the destination.
3 Select one or more traps to send to the destination:

366 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

• Failure - Sends failure traps.

• Warning - Sends warning traps.
• Informational - Sends informational traps.
• Available - Sends a trap when the system transitions from an
unavailable to an available state.
• Unavailable - Sends a trap when the system transitions from an
available to an unavailable state.
4 Click Apply.

Deleting a Destination
Delete an SNMP destination if you no longer want the DXi6902 to send
traps to the destination.
To delete a destination, select the destination and click Delete.

Note: You can select multiple destinations to delete at once.

Community
The Community page allows you to manage SNMP community
information for the DXi6902. You can add, edit, and delete
communities, and you can specify the community access type.
To access the Community page, on the SNMP page, click the
Community tab (see Figure 201).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 367

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Figure 201 Community Page

Use the Community page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about SNMP communities (see SNMP Community
List on page 368).
• Add an SNMP community (see Adding a Community on page 368).
• Edit an SNMP community (see Editing a Community on page 370).
• Delete an SNMP community (see Deleting a Community on
page 372).

SNMP Community List

The SNMP Community List displays the following information about
SNMP communities:
• Name - The name of the community.
• IP Address - The IP address of the community.
• Network Mask - The network mask of the community.
• Access Type - The access type of the community (Get or Get/Set).
• Community Status - The status of the community (Enabled or
Disabled).

Adding a Community
Add an SNMP community to include the DXi6902 in a group of devices
that are monitored by a common management station.

368 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Note: If no communities are defined, the SNMP agent is not

accessible.

To add a community:
1 Click Add.
The Add SNMP Community page displays (see Figure 202).

Figure 202 Add SNMP

Community Page

2 In the Name box, enter a unique Name for the community (up to
20 characters).
Valid characters are letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores.
3 Enter a valid IP Address and Network Mask pair.
A pair is valid if performing a logical bitwise AND operation on the
IP address and the network mask results in the IP address. See the
table below for examples:

IP Address / Network Mask Result

10.40.166.87 Allows access only from

255.255.255.255 10.40.166.87

10.40.166.87 Allows access only from

10.40.166.87 10.40.166.87

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 369

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

IP Address / Network Mask Result

10.40.166.87 Invalid because the logical

10.40.166.0 bitwise operation (address
AND mask) is not equal to the
address

10.40.166.87 Invalid because the logical

255.255.0.0 bitwise operation (address
AND mask) is not equal to the
address

10.40.0.0 Allows access from any client

255.255.0.0 with address 10.40.xx.xx

Note: If you define a single community and set both the IP

address and network mask to 0.0.0.0 (or leave both blank),
then IP address-based access control is disabled. In this
case, the SNMP agent is accessible from any IP address.

Note: When entering IP addresses, never use an address that is in

a reserved IP address range. To see a list of reserved IP
address ranges, click the quick tip icon [?] located near the
IP address field.

4 In the Access Type drop-down box, select the access type for the
community:
• Get - Allows SNMP get operations.
• Get/Set - Allows both SNMP get and put operations.
5 Select the Community status check box to enable the community.
Or clear the Community status check box to disable the
community.
6 Click Apply.

Editing a Community
Edit an SNMP community to change the IP address or access type for the
community. You can also enable or disable the community.
To edit a community:

370 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

1 Click Edit.
The Edit SNMP Community page displays (see Figure 202).

Figure 203 Edit SNMP

Community Page

2 (Optional) In the Name box, select a different community to edit.

3 Enter a valid IP Address and Network Mask pair.
A pair is valid if performing a logical bitwise AND operation on the
IP address and the network mask results in the IP address. See the
table below for examples:

IP Address / Network Mask Result

10.40.166.87 Allows access only from

255.255.255.255 10.40.166.87

10.40.166.87 Allows access only from

10.40.166.87 10.40.166.87

10.40.166.87 Invalid because the logical

10.40.166.0 bitwise operation (address
AND mask) is not equal to the
address

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 371

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

IP Address / Network Mask Result

10.40.166.87 Invalid because the logical

255.255.0.0 bitwise operation (address
AND mask) is not equal to the
address

10.40.0.0 Allows access from any client

255.255.0.0 with address 10.40.xx.xx

Note: If you define a single community and set both the IP

address and network mask to 0.0.0.0 (or leave both blank),
then IP address-based access control is disabled. In this
case, the SNMP agent is accessible from any IP address.

Note: When entering IP addresses, never use an address that is in

a reserved IP address range. To see a list of reserved IP
address ranges, click the quick tip icon [?] located near the
IP address field.

4 In the Access Type drop-down box, select the access type for the
community:
• Get - Allows SNMP get operations.
• Get/Set - Allows both SNMP get and put operations.
5 Select the Community status check box to enable the community.
Or clear the Community status check box to disable the
community.
6 Click Apply.

Deleting a Community
Delete an SNMP community if you no longer want the DXi6902 to
belong to a group of devices that are monitored by a common
management station.
To delete a community, select the community and click Delete.

Note: You can select multiple communities to delete at once.

372 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Notifications

Test
The SNMP Test page allows you to send a test SNMP trap to verify that
SNMP is correctly configured on the DXi6902.
To access the SNMP Test page, on the SNMP page, click the Test tab
(see Figure 204).

Figure 204 SNMP Test Page

To send a test SNMP trap, select a destination in the list and click Send.
If the destination does not receive the SNMP trap, make sure that the
destination IP address is correct (see Editing a Destination on page 366).
Also make sure that the community information is correct (see
Community on page 367).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 373

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Contacts

Contacts
The Contacts page allows you to enter company information. You can
also enter individual contact information for primary and secondary
contacts.
To access the Contacts page, click the Configuration menu, and then
click the Contacts tab.
The Contacts page contains the following tabs:
• Company
• Primary and Secondary

Company The Company page allows you to enter information about the company
and location of the DXi6902.
To access the Company page, on the Contacts page, click the
Company tab (see Figure 205).

Figure 205 Company Page

To enter company information:

1 Enter the following information:

374 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Contacts

• Company Name - Enter the company name.

• Street - Enter the company street address.
• City - Enter the company city.
• State - Enter the company state.
• Postal Code - Enter the company postal code.
• Country - Enter the company country.
• DXi6902 Location - Enter the physical location of the DXi6902
(for example, data center).
• Support Contract - Enter the support contract number for the
DXi6902.
2 Click Apply.

Primary and Secondary The Primary and Secondary pages allow you to enter information
about the primary and secondary contacts for the DXi6902.
To access the Primary or Secondary page, on the Contacts page, click
the Primary or Secondary tab (see Figure 206).

Figure 206 Primary and

Secondary Pages

To enter primary or secondary contact information:

1 Enter the following information:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 375

Chapter 9: DXi6902 Configuration
Contacts

• Name - Enter the contact name.

• Email Address - (Required) Enter the contact e-mail address.
• Phone - Enter the contact phone number.
• Fax - Enter the contact fax number.
• Pager - Enter the contact pager number.
• Street - Enter the contact street address.
• City - Enter the contact city.
• State - Enter the contact state.
• Postal Code - Enter the contact postal code.
• Country - Enter the contact country.
2 Click Apply.

376 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10
DXi6902 Utilities

The Utilities pages to perform maintenance tasks on the DXi6902, such

as generating and downloading diagnostic files, analyzing disk and
network performance, managing space reclamation, and securely
erasing the system. You can also install license keys, upgrade the system
software, and reboot or shut down the DXi6902.
To access the Utilities pages, click the Utilities menu.
The Utilities pages contain the following tabs:
• Diagnostics
• Analyzer
• Space Reclamation
• Secure Shred
• License Keys
• Software Upgrades
• Storage
• Reboot & Shutdown

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 377

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Diagnostics

Diagnostics
The Diagnostics page allows you to generate and download diagnostic
files. You can also perform healthchecks to verify the health and
integrity of the data deduplication blockpool.
The diagnostic files are helpful when troubleshooting problems on the
DXi6902. Generate and download the diagnostic files before contacting
Quantum customer support.
To access the Diagnostics page, click the Utilities menu, and then click
the Diagnostics tab.
The Diagnostics page contains the following tabs:
• System Diag File
• Storage Array Diag File
• DSET
• Healthchecks
• Drive Replacement

System Diag File The System Diag File page allows you to generate and download a
system diagnostics file. This file contains the diagnostic logs for all of
the system components.
To access the System Diag File page, on the Diagnostics page, click the
System Diag File tab (see Figure 207).

378 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Diagnostics

Figure 207 System Diag File

Page

To generate and download a system diagnostics file:

1 Click Generate New to generate a new system diagnostics file.
The system generates a new diagnostics file. This can take several
minutes.
2 After the file finishes generating, click the link to enable the
Download Current button.
3 To download the generated diagnostics file, click Download
Current.
A dialog box displays asking if you want to open or save the file.
4 Click Save or OK to download the file.

Storage Array Diag File The Storage Array Diag File page allows you to generate and
download a storage array diagnostics file. This file contains the
diagnostic logs for the storage arrays.
To access the Storage Array Diag File page, on the Diagnostics page,
click the Storage Array Diag File tab (see Figure 208).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 379

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Diagnostics

Figure 208 Storage Array Diag

File Page

To generate and download a system diagnostics file:

1 Click Generate New to generate a new storage array diagnostics
file.
The system generates a new diagnostics file. This can take several
minutes.
2 After the file finishes generating, click the link to enable the
Download Current button.
3 To download the generated diagnostics file, click Download
Current.
A dialog box displays asking if you want to open or save the file.
4 Click Save or OK to download the file.

DSET The DSET page allows you to generate a DSET report. DSET is a
hardware diagnostic utility included with the DXi6902. A DSET report
contains an array of status information about the DXi6902 hardware. A
Quantum customer support representative can use this information to
help identify and diagnose problems.

Note: Generate a DSET report only if directed to do so by a Quantum

customer support representative.

380 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Diagnostics

To access the DSET page, on the Diagnostics page, click the DSET tab
(see Figure 209).

Figure 209 DSET Page

To generate a DSET report:

1 Click Generate Report.
Click OK to continue. The system generates a new DSET report. This
can take several minutes.

Note: You may see error or warning messages in the status text as
the DSET report is generated. This is expected and does not
indicate a problem with the report.

2 To download the newly generated DSET report, click Download

Report.
A dialog box displays asking if you want to open or save the file.
3 Click Save or OK to download the file.
The DSET report is saved as a compressed zip file to the specified
location.
4 Locate the DSET report you downloaded and send it to the e-mail or
FTP address provided by Quantum Customer Support.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 381

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Diagnostics

Healthchecks The Healthchecks page allows you to perform tests that verify the
health and integrity of the data deduplication blockpool. You can also
enable and disable healthchecks.

Note: To configure the DXi6902 to automatically run the

healthchecks at specified intervals, use the Configuration >
Scheduler page (see Scheduling Healthchecks on page 312).

To access the Healthchecks page, on the Diagnostics page, click the

Healthchecks tab.
The Healthchecks page contains the following tabs:
• General
• Status

General
The General page allows you to start running the healthchecks or stop
them if they are already running. When you start the healthchecks, only
the healthchecks that are currently enabled are run (see Status on
page 383).
To access the General page, on the Healthchecks page, click the
General tab (see Figure 210).

Figure 210 General Page

382 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Diagnostics

The General page displays the following information about the most
recently run healthchecks:
• Status - The status of the healthchecks (In Progress, Success,
Failed, or Interrupted).
• Progress - The percentage complete of the healthchecks.
• Start Time - The time the healthchecks started.
• End Time - The time the healthchecks ended.
Use the General page to perform the following tasks:
• To start all enabled healthchecks, click Start.
• To stop all healthchecks in progress, click Stop.

Status
The Status page allows you to view information about the most recent
test results for each healthcheck. You can also enable or disable a
healthcheck.
The following healthchecks are available:
• De-Duplication - Checks the overall health of the blockpool. This
healthcheck verifies that the metadata in the namespace file and the
data tags in the blockpool are correctly in sync.
• Integrity - Checks the integrity of data in the blockpool. This
healthcheck examines a sample of data tags in the blockpool and
verifies that the data has been properly stored without errors or
corruption.
To access the Status page, on the Healthchecks page, click the Status
tab (see Figure 211).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 383

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Diagnostics

Figure 211 Status Page

The Status page displays the following information about the most
recently run test for each healthcheck:
• Healthcheck Name - The name of the healthcheck.
• State - The state of the healthcheck (enabled or disabled).
• Started - The time the healthcheck started.
• Finished - The time the healthcheck ended.
• Status - The status of the healthcheck (Success or Failed).

Note: If running a healthcheck results in the Contact Support

status, contact Quantum Customer Support for further
assistance.

To enable or disable a healthcheck:

1 Select the healthcheck and click Edit.
The Edit Healthcheck page displays (see Figure 212).

384 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Diagnostics

Figure 212 Edit Healthcheck

Page

2 Select the check box to enable the healthcheck.

Or clear the check box to disable the healthcheck.
3 Click Apply.

Note: When healthchecks are run (manually or scheduled), only

enabled healthchecks are run.

Caution: If a healthcheck fails when it is run, there may be a

problem in the blockpool that could cause replication or
restore operations to fail. Contact Quantum customer
support if a healthcheck fails.

Drive Replacement The Drive Replacement page can guide you through the process of
replacing a failed drive in your DXi6902.
To access the Drive Replacement page, on the Diagnostics page, click
the Drive Replacement tab.
To begin replacing a drive, make sure you have the replacement drive
ready, then follow the onscreen instructions (see Figure 213).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 385

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Analyzer

Figure 213 Drive Replacement

Page

Analyzer
The Analyzer page allows you to analyze the network and disk
performance of the DXi6902.
To access the Analyzer page, click the Utilities menu, and then click the
Analyzer tab.
The Analyzer page contains the following tabs:
• Network
• Disk

Network The Network Analyzer page allows you to analyze network

performance by measuring network throughput between the DXi6902
and another system (such as another DXi system).

386 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Analyzer

To access the Network Analyzer page, on the Analyzer page, click the
Network tab.
The Network Analyzer page contains the following tabs:
• Performance
• Settings

Performance
The Performance page allows you to perform network analysis with
another system (the target). You can also view results from the most
recently run test
To access the Performance page, on the Network Analyzer page, click
the Performance tab (see Figure 214).

Figure 214 Performance Page

To perform network analysis:

1 In the Target IP Address box, enter the IP address of the system to
perform network analysis with.
The target system must have NetServer enabled (see Settings on
page 388).
2 Click Start.
The throughput result is displayed under Result From Last Run in
MB/s.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 387

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Analyzer

Note: It takes approximately 5 seconds to refresh the results.

Settings
The Settings page allows you to enable or disable NetServer on the
DXi6902. NetServer must be enabled on the target DXi system to
perform network analysis with the system (see Performance on
page 387).
To access the Settings page, on the Network Analyzer page, click the
Settings tab (see Figure 215).

Figure 215 Settings Page

To enable or disable NetServer on the target DXi6902:

1 Select Enable NetServer to enable NetServer.
Or select Disable NetServer to disable NetServer.
2 Click Apply.

Note: You should disable NetServer on the target system when you
are done analyzing network performance.

388 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Space Reclamation

Disk The Disk Analyzer page allows you to analyze disk performance by
measuring disk read and write throughput.
To access the Disk Analyzer page, on the Analyzer page, click the Disk
tab (see Figure 216).

Figure 216 Disk Analyzer Page

To perform disk analysis, click Start. The throughput result is displayed

under Result From Last Run in KB/s.

Note: It takes approximately 5 seconds to refresh the results.

Space Reclamation
The Space Reclamation page allows you to manage space reclamation
activity on the DXi6902. You can start or stop space reclamation. You
can also monitor the progress of space reclamation activity.
During space reclamation, the DXi6902 searches the blockpool for tags
that are no longer referenced and then deletes the unneeded tags to
free up space.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 389

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Space Reclamation

In addition, the DXi automatically compacts reclaimable space in the

following ways:
• During data ingest, reclaimable space is compacted as needed to
provide space for new, deduplicated data.
• If the DXi is not in Low Space state, compaction starts when used
disk space reaches a high level and there is sufficient reclaimable
space. Compaction stops when used disk space falls below the high
threshold state. The reclaimed space can be used to store new
deduplicated or non-deduplicated data.
• If the DXi is in Low Space state, compaction starts and continues to
run until the DXi exits Low Space state. The reclaimed space can be
used to store new deduplicated or non-deduplicated data.

Note: The current compaction status is displayed on the Home page

(see DXi6902 Home Page on page 107).

Caution: For correct system operation, space reclamation must be

run at regular intervals (at least once a week). Quantum
recommends creating a schedule to automatically run
space reclamation (see Scheduling Space Reclamation on
page 313). Because space reclamation can affect system
performance, avoid running space reclamation during
known backup periods.

The space reclamation process can include up to four stages (see Space
Reclamation Status on page 392).
• New or Normal Mode - To increase performance, when space
reclamation is initiated on the Space Reclamation page or as a
scheduled event, only Stage 2 (Calculating Deletion Candidates) and
Stage 3 (Deleting New Candidates) are run.
• Low Space or Legacy Mode - When disk capacity is low, space
reclamation is automatically started to free up disk space. In this
case, all four stages of space reclamation are run.
To access the Space Reclamation page, click the Utilities menu, and
then click the Space Reclamation tab (see Figure 217).

390 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Space Reclamation

Figure 217 Space Reclamation

Page

The Space Reclamation page displays the following information about

the current or most recent space reclamation activity:
• Status - The status of space reclamation (see Space Reclamation
Status on page 392).
• Stage Progress - The progress of the current space reclamation
stage.
• Total Progress - The overall progress of space reclamation activity.
• Start Time - The time space reclamation started.
• End Time - The time space reclamation ended.
• Reclaimable Space - The disk space that is occupied by outdated
deduplicated data and which will be automatically reused if
additional space for new deduplicated data is needed. Displays
Pending when space reclamation is running.

Note: Because the DXi can automatically use reclaimable space to

store new deduplicated data, space reclamation statistics
may be affected (appear lower) if ingest occurs at the same
time as space reclamation.

Use the Space Reclamation page to perform the following tasks:

• To start space reclamation, click Start.
• To stop space reclamation, click Stop.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 391

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Space Reclamation

• To update the display while space reclamation is running, click

Refresh.

Space Reclamation Status

Space reclamation can have one of the following statuses:
• Reclamation Completed - Space reclamation completed without
errors.
• Reclamation Started by User - Space reclamation was started
manually by a user.
• Reclamation Interrupted - Space reclamation was interrupted and
must be restarted.
• Reclamation Interrupted by User - Space reclamation was
interrupted by a user and must be restarted.
• Reclamation Interrupted - Error Encountered - Space reclamation
was interrupted because an error was encountered and must be
restarted.
• Reclamation Interrupt by User - Cannot be interrupted at this
time - Because the system is in a Low Space state, space reclamation
cannot be stopped. Wait for space reclamation to finish freeing up
disk space.
• Reclamation Completed - No Candidates To Delete - Space
reclamation completed, but there were no candidates for
reclamation.
• Reclaim Existing Blockpool Freed Space - The existing blockpool
space has been reclaimed for use.
• Stage 1 of 4 - Reclaim Disk Space (Initial).
• Stage 2 of 4 - Calculating Deletion Candidates.
• Stage 3 of 4 - Deleting New Candidates.
• Stage 4 of 4 - Reclaim Disk Space.

392 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
License Keys

License Keys
The License Keys page allows you to add a license key to the DXi6902
to enable new functionality. You can also see the licenses that are
installed on the system.
For all DXi6902 systems, you can add a storage capacity upgrade license
key to enable installed hardware capacity. For more information, see
Adding a License Key on page 395.
For DXi6902 systems configured with all 4TB hard drives that support
Self Encrypting Drive (SED) technology, you can add a license for Data-
at-Rest Encryption (not available in all regions). Adding this license also
requires uploading one or more Premium Feature Key (PFK) files to the
DXi. For more information, see Licensing Data-at-Rest Encryption and
Obtaining Premium Feature Keys on page 397.
To access the License Keys page, click the Utilities menu, and then click
the License Keys tab (see Figure 218).

Figure 218 License Keys Page

Use the License Keys page to perform the following tasks:

• View information about available and installed licenses (see License
Key Information on page 394).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 393

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
License Keys

• Add a license key (see Adding a License Key on page 395).

• License the Data-at-Rest Encryption feature (Licensing Data-at-Rest
Encryption and Obtaining Premium Feature Keys on page 397).

License Key Information The License Key List displays the following information about licenses
that are available for the DXi6902:
• Name - The name of the license.
To display details for a license, click the license name. For a
description of the licenses that are available on the DXi6902, see
Available Licenses on page 394.
• Installed - The state of the license (Yes if the license is installed, No
if the license is not installed).
• Date Installed - If installed, the date the license was installed.
• Description - A brief description of the license.

Available Licenses
The following licenses are available from Quantum:
• VTL - Enables the VTL interface to hosts. Additional virtual tape
drives licenses are added through the VTL license area. (License key
for 160 VTDs is pre-installed on all DXi6902 models.)
• NAS - Enables NAS (NFS, CIFS) connectivity. (License key is pre-
installed on all DXi6902 models.)
• Backup Application Specific - Enables the backup application
specific path to tape capability. (License key is pre-installed on all
DXi6902 models.)
• Data Deduplication - Enables data deduplication and compression.
(License key is pre-installed on all DXi6902 models.)
• Replication - Enables replication to other DXi systems. (License key
is pre-installed on all DXi6902 models.)
• Storage Capacity - Enables the purchased storage capacity for the
system. (License key for 17 TB storage capacity is pre-installed on all
DXi6902 configurations.)

394 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
License Keys

For configurations larger than 17 TB, a license for the total

purchased storage capacity ships with the system. In addition,
usable storage capacity can be upgraded at any time after purchase
by adding a storage capacity upgrade license to enable installed
hardware capacity, up to a total of 510 TB.

Note: If you purchase a storage capacity upgrade, you will receive

a License Certificate you can use to enable the additional
capacity (see Adding a License Key on page 395).

• OST - Enables OpenStorage backup with Symantec OST. (License key

is pre-installed on all DXi6902 models.)
• Data-at-Rest Encryption - Enables the use of the Data-at-Rest
Encryption capability to secure all data stored on the DXi6902.
For more information, see Licensing Data-at-Rest Encryption and
Obtaining Premium Feature Keys on page 397.
• Data-in-Flight Encryption - Enables use of AES encryption (128-bit
or 256-bit) when sending data to another system using DXi
replication or OST Accent. (Not available in all regions.)

Adding a License Key Add a license key to enable additional storage capacity on the DXi6902.
To add a license key, you must first obtain a License Certificate
containing an authorization code.
To purchase a storage capacity upgrade license, contact your Quantum
sales representative. You will receive a License Certificate containing an
authorization code.
To add a license key, locate the License Certificate, and then perform the
following steps:
1 Open a Web browser on a computer with Internet access.
2 Enter http://www.quantum.com/licensekeys in the browser address
box.
The License Key Management page displays (see Figure 219).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 395

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
License Keys

Figure 219 License Key

Management Page

3 Enter the DXi system serial number in the Serial Number box and
click Submit.
The Licensed Feature page displays.

Note: The serial number displays on the License Keys page,

above the New Key box.

4 Enter the authorization code (printed on the License Certificate) and

click Get License Key.
The Licensed Feature page returns a license key. Print out or write
down the license key, or save it to a text file.
5 Access the DXi remote management console (see Accessing Remote
Management on page 50).
6 Click the Utilities menu, and then click the License Keys tab.
The License Keys page displays (see Figure 218).
7 Enter the license key in the New Key box, and then click Add.
The license key is added to the system.

396 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
License Keys

Note: When adding a Storage Capacity license, it may take up to

10 minutes for the system to recognize the new storage
capacity.

Licensing Data-at-Rest Data-at-Rest Encryption secures all data stored on the DXi6902,
Encryption and including file data and metadata, configuration files, and the DXi
Obtaining Premium software and operating system (see Data-at-Rest Encryption on
Feature Keys page 343).
Before you can enable Data-at-Rest Encryption to encrypt all hard drives,
you must add the Data-at-Rest Encryption license. In addition, you must
upload a Premium Feature Key (PFK) file for each Array module in the
DXi6902. Contact your Quantum sales representative to obtain a Data-
at-Rest Encryption license. After you obtain the license, you will receive
a License Certificate containing an authorization code.
To add the license key and required PFK files to the DXi6902, locate the
License Certificate, and then perform the following steps:
1 Open two Web browser windows on a computer with Internet
access.

Note: During this procedure, you can copy and paste required
numbers between these two windows.

a In one browser, navigate to the Utilities > License Keys page in

the DXi remote management console.
Note that the system serial number and Storage Array Feature
IDs display directly above the New Key box.
b In the other browser, enter the address for the License Key
Management Web site (see Figure 219):
http://www.quantum.com/licensekeys
2 On the License Key Management Web site, perform the following
steps:
a Enter the system serial number in the Serial Number box and
click Submit.
b Enter the authorization code (printed on the License Certificate)
and click Get License Key.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 397

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Secure Shred

c Enter the Feature ID for each storage array.

If entering more than one Feature ID, make sure to enter the
correct Feature ID for Storage Array 1 (Qarray1) and Storage
Array 2 (Qarray2).
d Click Get License Key.
The License Key Details section displays the Data-at-Rest
Encryption license key. Print out or write down the license key,
or save it to a text file.
e For each Storage Array, click Generate PFK File to generate a
Premium Feature Key file, and then click Save to save the PFK
file to your computer.

Note: Make sure to keep a copy of the PFK files for backup
purposes.

3 In the DXi remote management console, on the Utilities > License

Keys page, enter the Data-at-Rest Encryption license key in the New
Key box, and then click Add.
The Data-at-Rest Encryption license key is added to the system.
4 In the DXi remote management console, navigate to the
Configuration > System > Security > Data-at-Rest page and
perform the following steps:
a Upload the correct PFK file to each Storage Array (see Uploading
a PFK File on page 348).
b Enable Data-at-Rest Encryption for all hard drives in the
DXi6902 (see Enabling Data-at-Rest Encryption on page 345).
c Make a backup copy of your encryption keys (see Managing
Recovery Files on page 347).

Secure Shred
The Secure Shred page allows you to securely and permanently erase
sensitive data stored on the DXi6902. To securely erase data, first delete
files on NAS shares or storage servers or erase tape cartridges on VTL

398 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Secure Shred

partitions, then start secure shred. During secure shred, all residual data
associated with the deleted files or cartridges is securely erased from the
disk drives by performing a single-pass overwrite with zeros.
While secure shred is running, the DXi6902 operates in limited mode.
This means you cannot perform backups or restores, all scheduled jobs
(including replication jobs) are stopped, and you cannot access or use
any other features of the DXi. If necessary, you can cancel secure shred
at any time and return the DXi to normal operation.

Caution: The secure shred process can take multiple days to

complete.

To access the Secure Shred page, click the Utilities menu, and then click
the Secure Shred tab (see Figure 220).

Figure 220 Secure Shred Page

To securely erase data on the DXi6902:

1 Delete the data you want to securely erase:
• Delete files on NAS shares, or delete the shares (see NAS on
page 210).
• Delete backup images on OST logical storage units (LSUs), or
delete the LSUs and storage servers (see OST on page 267).
• Recycle (erase) tape cartridges on VTL partitions, or delete the
partitions (see VTL on page 227).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 399

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Secure Shred

2 Run space reclamation from the Utilities > Space Reclamation

page (see Space Reclamation on page 389).
3 Make sure all replication and backup jobs are completed (see
DXi6902 Replication on page 119).
4 On the Secure Shred page, click Start Shred.
A warning message displays.
5 Click Yes.
The system reboots and begins the secure shred process. This
process can take multiple days to complete.
6 To check the status of secure shred, log onto the DXi6902 to view
the limited Secure Shred Mode interface (see Figure 221).
• The Secure File Shred Log displays details about the secure
shred progress. Click Hide to hide the log.
• To cancel the secure shred process, click Cancel. The DXi reboots
and resumes normal operation.
• When the secure shred process is complete, the Reboot button
displays.

Note: You must log on as an Admin user to cancel secure shred or

reboot the system.

400 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Software Upgrades

Figure 221 Secure Shred Mode

Interface

When secure shred is

complete, Cancel changes
to Reboot

7 Click Reboot to finalize the secure shred process and reboot the
DXi.
After the DXi finishes rebooting, you can resume normal system
operation.

Software Upgrades
Software upgrades allow you to update the software running on the
DXi6902 to the latest version. Software upgrades can include new
features as well as bug fixes.
There are two methods for upgrading the DXi software:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 401

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Software Upgrades

• Check for an upgrade (Home page) - The DXi can automatically

check for software upgrades on the Home page, or you can
manually perform an upgrade check (see Checking For Software
Upgrades on page 402). If an upgrade is found, you can choose to
download and install it.
This is the recommended method for upgrading, but it requires that
the DXi be able to access the Internet.

Caution: Configure your firewall so that the DXi can send data
to and received data from updates.quantum.com using
port 80 (HTTP).

• Upload a software upgrade file (Software Upgrade page) - You

can download a software upgrade file from the Quantum Service
and Support Web site and then manually upload it to the DXi using
the Software Upgrade page (see Uploading a Software Upgrade
File on page 406).
You can use this method if the DXi cannot access the Internet.

Note: Uploading a software upgrade file may be useful if you are

upgrading multiple DXi systems, as the file only needs to
be downloaded once. Also, this method assures that all
systems will be running the same software version
following the upgrade.

Checking For Software The Software Upgrade Utility (accessible from the Home page) allows
Upgrades you to check for available DXi software upgrades and, if available,
download and install them. You can also configure the DXi6902 to
automatically check for software upgrades.

Note: To check for and download software upgrades, the DXi must
be able to access the Internet. If the DXi cannot access the
Internet, see Uploading a Software Upgrade File on page 406.

To access the Software Upgrade Utility, click Home on the main menu,
and then click the Software Upgrade link (see Figure 222).

402 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Software Upgrades

Figure 222 Software Upgrade

Utility

Click to
Select to automatically manually
check for upgrades daily check for
upgrades

Click to
download an
available
upgrade

Use the Software Upgrade Utility to perform the following tasks:

• Configure the DXi6902 to automatically check for software
upgrades (see Automatically Checking for Upgrades on page 403).
• Manually check for software upgrades (see Manually Checking for
Upgrades on page 404).
• Download and install available software upgrades (see
Downloading and Installing Upgrades on page 404).

Automatically Checking for Upgrades

The DXi6902 can automatically check for available software upgrades
on a daily basis. If a software upgrade is found, you will be notified by
an admin alert as well as by a Quick Tip icon on the Home page, next to
the current software version (see Figure 223).
On the Software Upgrade Utility, select the Check daily for software
upgrades check box to enable automatic upgrade checking. Automatic
upgrade checking is enabled by default. To disable automatic upgrade
checking, clear the Check daily for software upgrades check box (not
recommended).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 403

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Software Upgrades

Figure 223 Home Page -

Software Upgrade Available

Available software upgrade

Manually Checking for Upgrades

To check for available software upgrades at any time, on the Software
Upgrade Utility, click Check Now.
If a software upgrade is available, you can read information about the
contents of the upgrade and, if you choose, download and install it.

Downloading and Installing Upgrades

If a software upgrade is available (after automatically or manually
checking for upgrades), a summary describing the upgrade displays on
the Software Upgrade Utility.
To download and install an available software upgrade:
1 On the Software Upgrade Utility, click Download.
The bottom status bar displays download progress. It will take
several minutes to download the upgrade, depending on network
speeds. You can use the DXi normally while the upgrade downloads.
If you need to return to this window, click Software Upgrade on
the Home page.

404 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Software Upgrades

When the download is complete, a list of pre-upgrade actions

displays (see Figure 224). These are important actions you should
take prior to installing the upgrade.

Figure 224 Software Upgrade

Utility - Software Upgrade
Downloaded

Click to
remove a
Read instructions for downloaded
upgrading upgrade

To install,
select the
check box and
click Install

2 To ensure the system is healthy before upgrading, read and follow

the instructions in each of the pre-upgrade actions. The pre-
upgrade actions can differ depending on the type of upgrade, but
typical actions include the following:
• Address and delete all outstanding administration alerts (see
Admin Alerts on page 199).
• Resolve and close all outstanding service tickets (see Service
Tickets on page 201).

Note: Quantum recommends taking the following actions before

upgrading.

• Stop all active backup jobs (see your backup application). Any
backup jobs that are run during the upgrade will fail.
• Make sure all replication jobs are complete (see DXi6902
Replication on page 119). If replication or synchronization jobs
are nearly complete, Quantum recommends allowing them to
complete before upgrading.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 405

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Software Upgrades

• Make sure space reclamation is complete (see Space

Reclamation on page 389). If space reclamation is nearly
complete, Quantum recommends allowing it to complete
before upgrading.
• Download a system diagnostics file and transfer the file to a
safe repository off of the DXi (see System Diag File on
page 378). The system diagnostics file can help in resolving
problems if they occur.
3 Confirm that you have completed all pre-upgrade actions by
selecting the Ready to install check box.

Note: The Ready to install check box and the Install button are
disabled if there are any outstanding administration alerts
or service tickets.

4 To begin the upgrade process, click Install.

Read the onscreen information to learn what to expect during the
upgrade. The bottom status bar displays installation progress, and a
message displays if a reboot is required.
Depending on the type of upgrade, the DXi may be placed in service
mode for about an hour. While in service mode, the system will shut
down all backup and replication services. If necessary, the DXi will
restart one or more times to complete the upgrade.

Note: If you decide not to install the software upgrade after

downloading it, click Remove Software Upgrade File to
remove the current download from the DXi.

Note: Clear your Web browser cache before logging on to the remote
management console for the first time following the software
upgrade. This will ensure the remote management console
displays correctly.

Uploading a Software The Software Upgrade page allows you to upload and install a
Upgrade File software upgrade file on the DXi6902. Use this upgrade method if the
DXi cannot access the Internet.

406 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Software Upgrades

Before you begin, download the software upgrade file on a computer

connected to the Internet, and then copy the software upgrade file
(.fw) to the computer you will use to access the DXi remote
management console. You can download the software upgrade file and
release notes from the Quantum Service and Support Web site:
http://www.quantum.com/ServiceandSupport/Index.aspx
To access the Software Upgrade page, click the Utilities menu, and
then click the Software Upgrade tab (see Figure 225).

Figure 225 Software Upgrade

Page

To upload a software upgrade file:

1 Click the Browse button to browse the system and locate the
software upgrade file.
2 Click Upload.
3 Click Start to begin the upload process.
Do not close the window until the uploading and unpacking process
is complete. An Information message displays stating the software
upgrade file was uploaded successfully.
4 Click OK.
The Software Upgrade page indicates that a software upgrade file has
been uploaded (see Figure 226).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 407

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Software Upgrades

Figure 226 Software Upgrade

Page - Software Upgrade File
Uploaded

Click to install upgrade

Click to remove
upgrade file from the DXi

5 Click Install.

Note: If necessary, click the link to delete any outstanding

administration alerts before proceeding.

Note: If you decide not to install the software upgrade file after
uploading it, click Remove on the Utilities > Software
Upgrade page to remove the uploaded software upgrade
file from the DXi.

The Software Upgrade Utility displays (see Figure 227).

408 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Software Upgrades

Figure 227 Software Upgrade

Utility - Software Upgrade File
Uploaded

Read instructions for

upgrading

To install,
select the
check box and
click Install

6 To ensure the system is healthy before upgrading, read and follow

the instructions in each of the pre-upgrade actions. The pre-
upgrade actions can differ depending on the type of upgrade, but
typical actions include the following:
• Address and delete all outstanding administration alerts (see
Admin Alerts on page 199).
• Resolve and close all outstanding service tickets (see Service
Tickets on page 201).

Note: Quantum recommends taking the following actions before

upgrading.

• Stop all active backup jobs (see your backup application).

• Make sure all replication jobs are complete (see DXi6902
Replication on page 119). If replication or synchronization jobs
are nearly complete, Quantum recommends allowing them to
complete before upgrading.
• Make sure space reclamation is complete (see Space
Reclamation on page 389). If space reclamation is nearly
complete, Quantum recommends allowing it to complete
before upgrading.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 409

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Storage

• Download a system diagnostics file and transfer the file to a

safe repository off of the DXi (see System Diag File on
page 378). The system diagnostics file can help in resolving
problems if they occur.
7 After you have completed all pre-upgrade actions, confirm that you
are ready to continue by selecting the Ready to install check box.

Note: The Ready to install check box and the Install button are
disabled if there are any outstanding administration alerts
or service tickets.

8 To begin the upgrade process, click Install.

Read the on-screen information to learn what to expect during the
upgrade. The bottom status bar displays installation progress, and a
message displays if a reboot is required.
Depending on the type of upgrade, the DXi may be placed in service
mode for about an hour. While in service mode, the system will shut
down all backup and replication services. If necessary, the DXi will
restart one or more times to complete the upgrade.

Note: Clear your Web browser cache before logging on to the remote
management console for the first time following the software
upgrade. This will ensure the remote management console
displays correctly.

Storage
The Storage page allows you to manage Premium Feature Key (PFK) files
for the Turbo feature, which is used to increase disk performance in
DXi6902 systems that include Expansion modules. When an Expansion
module (EBOD) is added to the DXi6902 during a capacity expansion, a
Turbo PFK must be uploaded to the Array module (RBOD) to which the
Expansion module is connected. The new Expansion module will include
a License Certificate containing an authorization code.

410 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Storage

Note: Before uploading a PFK file, make sure you are using a
supported Web browser (see Supported Browsers on page 50).

To access the Storage page, click the Utilities menu, and then click the
Storage tab (see Figure 228).

Figure 228 Storage Page

To obtain a Turbo PFK file and upload it to an Array module (RBOD):

1 Open two Web browser windows on a computer with Internet
access.

Note: During this procedure, you can copy and paste required
numbers between these two windows.

a In one browser, navigate to the Utilities > License Keys page in

the DXi remote management console.
Note that the system serial number and Storage Array Feature
IDs display directly above the New Key box.
b In the other browser, enter the address for the License Key
Management Web site:
http://www.quantum.com/licensekeys
2 On the License Key Management Web site, perform the following
steps:

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 411

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Storage

a Enter the system serial number in the Serial Number box and
click Submit.
b Enter the authorization code (printed on the License Certificate)
and click Get License Key.
c Enter the Feature ID for each storage array.
If entering more than one Feature ID, make sure to enter the
correct Feature ID for Storage Array 1 (Qarray1) or Storage Array
2 (Qarray2).
d Click Get License Key.
e For each Storage Array, click Generate PFK File to generate a
Premium Feature Key file, and then click Save to save the PFK
file to your computer.

Note: Make sure to keep a copy of the PFK files for backup
purposes.

3 In the DXi remote management console, navigate to the Utilities >

Storage page.
4 Select an Array module in the Storage Array drop-down box. The
PFK will be uploaded to this module (Qarray1 or Qarray2).
The following information displays:
• Qarray ID - The identification number of the Array module.
• Feature ID - The feature identification number of the Array
module.
• Turbo PFK Installed - The PFK status (No for not installed, or Yes
for installed).

Note: The Qarray ID and Feature ID are required to initially obtain

the PFK file. If a PFK is already installed, there is no need to
upload a PFK file.

5 In the Turbo PFK File Upload box, type the location and filename of
the PFK file. Or click the button to browse the system and locate the
PFK file.

412 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Reboot & Shutdown

Caution: If you are uploading more than one PFK file, check the
file names carefully, and make sure to upload the
correct file to each Array module.

6 Click Upload.
The PFK file is uploaded to the selected Array module. The module is
now enabled for Turbo.

Note: You must also add a Storage Capacity license to enable to the
capacity on the Expansion module (EBOD). To add a Storage
Capacity license, see License Keys on page 393.

Reboot & Shutdown

The Reboot & Shutdown page allows you to reboot or shut down the
DXi6902.
To access the Reboot & Shutdown page, click the Utilities menu, and
then click the Reboot & Shutdown tab (see Figure 229).

Caution: Before shutting down the DXi6902, make sure that all
backup and replication jobs are finished, and that space
reclamation activity is complete.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 413

Chapter 10: DXi6902 Utilities
Reboot & Shutdown

Figure 229 Reboot &

Shutdown Page

To reboot or shutdown the DXi6902:

1 Under System Action, select an option:
• Reboot - Reboots the DXi6902.
Rebooting the system closes the Web browser connection. You
must log on again after the system has rebooted.
• Shutdown - Shuts down the DXi6902.
• Reset from diagnostic state - (Only available when the node is
in degraded mode) Restarts the services on the node without
rebooting the system.
2 Click Apply.
3 Close the browser window.

Note: Shutting down the system can take up to 15 minutes. Only the
node will completely shut down. When rebooting, the system
can take approximately 30 minutes to start up, depending on
the amount of installed storage capacity.

414 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Appendix A
DXi6902 System
Specifications

This appendix lists the following DXi6902 specifications:

• Physical Characteristics
• Environmental Specifications

Physical Characteristics The following tables provide dimensions and other physical
characteristics of the DXi6902 system components:
• Table 11 - Physical Characteristics
• Table 12 - Storage Capacity
• Table 13 - Cable Drops
• Table 14 - Virtual Device Limits and Hardware Interfaces
• Table 15 - Power Requirements

Table 11 Physical
Characteristics

Expansion Module
DXi6902 Node Array Module (RBOD) (EBOD)

Height 2U, 3.4 inches (8.7 cm) 2U, 3.4 inches (8.7 cm) 2U, 3.4 inches (8.7 cm)

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 415

Appendix A: DXi6902 System Specifications

Width (side to side) 17.5 inches (44.4 cm) 17.8 inches (45.1 cm) 17.8 inches (45.1 cm)

Depth (front to back) 28.6 Inches (72.6 cm) 21.8 inches (55.2 cm) 21.8 inches (55.2 cm)

Weight (stand alone) 53.0 pounds (24.0 kg) 59.0 pounds (26.8 kg) 57.0 pounds (25.9 kg)

Rack Space Required 2U 2U 2U

Air clearance Open 4 in. (10.2 cm) behind unit for proper air flow

Table 12 Storage Capacity

DXi6902 Storage Capacity

Usable capacity From 17 to 510 TB

Capacity increments Each Array Module (RBOD) and Expansion Module (EBOD)
provides 34 TB of usable capacity, licensable in 17 TB increments.

416 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Appendix A: DXi6902 System Specifications

Table 13 Cable Drops

DXi6902 Cable Drops

Ethernet Cable Drops DXi6902 (3 x 1GbE ports and 2 x 10GbE ports) - 1 to 3 1GbE Ethernet
connections and 1 to 2 10GbE Ethernet connections (optical or Twinax,
see below) for NAS or OST connectivity, replication, and remote
management.
DXi6902 (7 x 1GbE ports and 2 x 10GbE ports) - 1 to 7 1GbE Ethernet
connections and 1 to 2 10GbE Ethernet connections (optical or Twinax,
see below) for NAS or OST connectivity, replication, and remote
management.
DXi6902 (3 x 1GbE ports and 4 x 10GbE ports) - 1 to 3 1GbE Ethernet
connections and 1 to 4 10GbE Ethernet connections (optical or Twinax,
see below) for NAS or OST connectivity, replication, and remote
management.
Note: For Cisco 5000 Series Data Center Class switches, Quantum
recommends using the approved 5 meter Twinax cable type that is
shipped with the DXi6902 system. Otherwise, Quantum
recommends using optical (SFP+) connectivity.
The 10GbE Copper (Twinax) cable options that Quantum provides do not
support all switches. Please note the supported switches during the
purchase-configuration process, and if the Twinax cables supplied by
Quantum are not compatible with your switch, then you will need to
provide your own compatible Twinax cables from your switch vendor. Be
sure to have these available before the system installation takes place.

10GbE Optical Cable 10GbE Copper (Twinax) Cable

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 417

Appendix A: DXi6902 System Specifications

DXi6902 Cable Drops

Fibre Channel Drops 1 to 4 Fibre Channel connections for data transfer and 1 to 2 Fibre
Channel connections path-to-tape (also configurable for data transfer).

Power Outlets Node - 2 USA type 3-prong power outlets (Nema 5-15) or 2 C13 type
3-prong power outlets (IEC320 C13). For additional information, see
Table 15.
Array Module and Expansion Module (each) - 2 USA type 3-prong
power outlets (Nema 5-15) or 2 C13 type 3-prong power outlets (IEC320
C13).

Table 14 Virtual Device Limits

and Hardware Interfaces

DXi6902 Virtual Device Limits and Hardware Interfaces

Virtual Device Limits VTL backup target: 64 partitions maximum, 512 virtual tape drives
(VTDs) maximum
NAS backup target: 128 shares maximum (NFS or CIFS)
OST backup target: 100 storage servers maximum
Note: NFS version: NFSv2 and NFSv3
Note: Samba version: 3.6.12

Hardware / Interfaces 3 ports 100/1000BASE-T Ethernet (RJ45 connector), 2 ports 10GbE

Ethernet (optical 10GBASE-SR via LC connector or Twinax copper
10GBASESFP+Cu via SFP+), and 6 ports 8 Gb Fibre Channel (LC
connector)
Note: An optional network adapter may be added providing 4
additional 100/1000BASE-T Ethernet ports or 2 additional
10GbE Ethernet ports.

418 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Appendix A: DXi6902 System Specifications

Table 15 Power Requirements

DXi6902 Power Requirements

Power Supplies and Node Two (2) hot-swappable redundant power

Cords Array Module (RBOD) supplies
Expansion Module Two (2) USA type 3-prong power cords with
(EBOD) IEC320 C13 to Nema 5-15 connectors:

Two (2) C13 to C14 type 3-prong power cords

with IEC320 C13 to IEC320 C14 connectors:

Voltage Node 100–240 VAC

Array Module (RBOD) 100–240 VAC

Expansion Module 100–240 VAC

(EBOD)

Frequency Node 50–60Hz

Array Module (RBOD) 50–60Hz

Expansion Module 50–60Hz

(EBOD)

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 419

Appendix A: DXi6902 System Specifications

Average AC Current Node 586 Watts, 5.9A @100 VAC 2000 BTU/hr
586 Watts, 2.3A @240 VAC 2000 BTU/hr

Array Module (RBOD) 334 Watts, 3.3A @100 VAC 1140 BTU/hr
334 Watts, 1.4A @240 VAC 1140 BTU/hr

Expansion Module 228 Watts, 2.3A @100 VAC 780 BTU/hr

(EBOD) 228 Watts, 1.0A @240 VAC 780 BTU/hr

Inrush Peak AC Current Maximum 42A @ 100 VAC

Configuration 18A @ 240 VAC

Caution: To safeguard backups and to avoid potential data loss in

the event of a power outage, Quantum recommends that
you connect the DXi6902 to an uninterruptable power
supply (UPS) with a minimum UPS capacity rating that
meets the power requirements stated above.

Environmental Table 16 provides various DXi6902 environmental specifications.

Specifications

Table 16 Environmental
Specifications

Climatic Environment

Temperature Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) with a maximum

temperature gradient of 10°C per hour
Note: 35°C (95°F) is the maximum
temperature for the DXi6902 at sea
level. For every 1,000 feet (305 meters)
of altitude, the maximum temperature
is reduced by 0.9°C.

Shipping and storage –20° to 60°C (–4° to 140°F) with a maximum

temperature gradient of 20°C per hour

420 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Appendix A: DXi6902 System Specifications

Relative humidity Operating 20% to 80% (non-condensing) with a

maximum humidity gradient of 10% per hour

Shipping and storage 5% to 95% (non-condensing) with a maximum

humidity gradient of 10% per hour

Altitude Operating –16m to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)

Shipping and storage –16m to 10,600 m (–100 to 35,000 ft)

Vibration and Shock

Sine Vibration Operating Random 0.26 G’s, 5–350 Hz, Operational axis
10 minutes, psd: 0.0002 G2/Hz

Non-operating Random 0.5 G’s, 5–350 Hz, Operational axis 10

minutes, psd: 0.0007 G2/Hz

Shock Vibration Operating 2 G’s for 11 ms, half-sine input, 3 shock pulses
in both + and – directions operational axis

Non-operating 3.5 G’s for 11 ms, half-sine input, 3 shock

pulses in both + and – directions operational
axis

Acoustic

Acoustic output Operating Sound Pressure Level 72 dbA maximum at any

operation position

DXi6902 Agency Approvals

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 421

Appendix A: DXi6902 System Specifications

EMC/Safety 47 CFR part 15 Class A

CNS 13438 Class A
CISPR 22 Class A
CISPR 24 Class A
EN 55022 Class A
EN 55024
EN 61000-3-2
EN 61000-3-3
ICES-003 Class A
VCCI V-3/2000 Class A
AS/NZS 3548 Class A
KCC RRL Class A

Immunity Tests IEC 61000-4-2 (Ed. 2.0 2008-12) - Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-3 (Ed. 3.1 2008-04) - Radiated RF Immunity
Standards: IEC 61000-4-4 (Ed. 2.0 2004-07) - Electrical Fast Transient/Burst
EN55024: 1998 IEC 61000-4-5 (Ed. 2.0 2005-11) - Surge Immunity
+A1: 2001 IEC 61000-4-6 (Ed. 2.2 2006-05) - Conducted RF Immunity
+A2:2003 IEC 61000-4-8 (Ed. 1.1 2001-03) - Magnetic Field
KN24 IEC 61000-4-11 (Ed. 2.0 2004-03) - AC Dips and Interrupts

Caution: The DXi6902 systems are designed to be installed in a rack

enclosure. Ensure that the operating temperature inside
the rack enclosure does not exceed the maximum rated
ambient temperature. Do not restrict air flow to the
DXi6902 components.

422 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Appendix B
Troubleshooting

This appendix describes the status and problem reporting features of

the DXi6902 as well as problems you might encounter during setup and
operation of the system. Corrective information is provided to help you
resolve these problems.
For for information about troubleshooting the DXi6902, see the
following sections:
• DXi6902 Status and Problem Reporting
• General Troubleshooting Actions
• Common Problems and Solutions

DXi6902 Status and Problem Reporting

To maintain system health and help you identify and correct problems
that occur, the DXi6902 constantly performs the following actions:
• Monitors the system software and hardware components.
• Detects system problems.
• Attempts to isolate each problem to a specific field replaceable
component.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 423

Appendix B: Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting Actions

• Attempts to recover from the problem.

• Logs the problem.
• If the problem requires service, the system reports the problem in a
service ticket associated with the field replaceable component.

General Troubleshooting Actions

For information about general troubleshoot actions you can take, see
the following sections:
• Viewing Service Tickets
• Checking Hardware Status
• Downloading a System Diagnostics File

Viewing Service Tickets Service tickets include time and date information, status (open or
closed), information about each error, and links to recommended
troubleshooting procedures. The DXi6902 generates service tickets
according to the following scenarios:
• If the component associated with the problem does not have an
open service ticket, the DXi6902 opens a service ticket for the
component and reports the problem in a service ticket.
• If the problem reoccurs, the DXi6902 logs the number of times that
it detects the problem in the existing report.
• If a different problem occurs with the same component, the
DXi6902 adds a new report to the same service ticket.
• If a problem occurs with a different component, the DXi6902 uses
the above scenario to open a new service ticket for the component
or report the problem in an existing service ticket associated with
the component.
To access the Service Tickets page, click the Alerts menu, and then click
the Service Tickets tab.
For more information about working with service tickets, see Service
Tickets on page 201.

424 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Common Problems and Solutions

Checking Hardware The Hardware page allows you to view information about the hardware
Status components of the DXi6902. You can view the overall status of the node
as well as detailed status information for components such as the
system board, Fibre Channel adapters, network ports and storage
arrays.
To access the Hardware page, click the Status menu, and then click the
Hardware tab.
For information about using the Status page, see Hardware on
page 172.

Downloading a System The System Diag File page allows you to generate and download a
Diagnostics File system diagnostics file. This file contains the diagnostic logs for all of
the system components.
To access the System Diag File page, on the Diagnostics page, click the
System Diag File tab.
For information about downloading the system diagnostics file, see
System Diag File on page 378.

Common Problems and Solutions

The troubleshooting information in this section covers the following
topics:
• Start-up Problems
• Hardware Problems
• Ethernet Network Problems
• Replication Problems
• Temperature Problems

Start-up Problems Table 17 describes problems that can occur during system start-up.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 425

Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Common Problems and Solutions

Table 17 Start-up Problems

Problem Corrective Action

FATAL ERROR Unable Contact your Quantum Customer Support

to start SNFS! representative (see Getting More
Message displays. Information or Help on page xxviii).

FATAL ERROR Unable Contact your Quantum Customer Support

to start blockpool! representative (see Getting More
Message displays. Information or Help on page xxviii).

Hardware Problems Table 18 describes corrective actions for problems occurring with the
system hardware.

Table 18 Hardware Problems

Problem Corrective Action

The system does not Make sure the power cords are connected
power on. to a grounded electrical outlet and the
power switches located on the back of the
power supplies are on. If the problem
persists, contact your Quantum Customer
Support representative to arrange for
service (see Getting More Information or
Help on page xxviii).

One power supply is Determine which power supply has failed by

not functioning. observing the fault LED on the power
supply. Contact your Quantum Customer
Support representative to arrange for
service (see Getting More Information or
Help on page xxviii).

Both power supplies Determine which power supply has failed by

are not functioning. observing the fault LED on the power
supply. Contact your Quantum Customer
Support representative to arrange for
service (see Getting More Information or
Help on page xxviii).

426 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Common Problems and Solutions

Problem Corrective Action

One fan is not Determine which fan has failed by reading

operating. the service ticket generated by the system.
Contact your Quantum Customer Support
representative to arrange for service (see
Getting More Information or Help on
page xxviii).

Multiple fans are not Caution: Turn the system off immediately!
operating. The system will overheat with
multiple fans not operating.
Contact your Quantum Customer Support
representative to arrange for service (see
Getting More Information or Help on
page xxviii).

A hard drive is not Determine which drive has failed by

responding observing the fault LED on the drive carrier.
Contact your Quantum Customer Support
representative for a drive carrier
replacement (see Getting More Information
or Help on page xxviii).

A SAS cable is The system will shut down as soon as it

removed during recognizes the problem. There is a potential
normal operation. for data loss.
Power off the system, re-insert the SAS
cable and restart the system. Depending on
the state of the system when the SAS cable
was removed, a long-running, mandatory
data verification may occur.

Ethernet Network Table 19 describes corrective actions for problems occurring with the
Problems Ethernet network.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 427

Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Common Problems and Solutions

Table 19 Ethernet Network

Problems Problem Corrective Action

The Ethernet link light Check to make sure the Ethernet cable is
on the DXi6902 is not not a cross-over cable. Use only “straight”
lit when a cable is CAT-6 Ethernet cables.
connected to a hub or Port on the hub or switch is not active or
switch. damaged.
Port on the DXi6902 is damaged. Contact
the Quantum Customer Support
department (see Getting More Information
or Help on page xxviii).

The Ethernet link light Check to make sure the Ethernet cable is
on the switch or hub not a cross-over cable. Use only “straight”
is not lit when a cable CAT-6 Ethernet cables.
is connected to Port on the hub or switch is not active or
DXi6902 system. damaged.
Port on the DXi6902 is damaged. Contact
the Quantum Customer Support
department (see Getting More Information
or Help on page xxviii).

DXi6902 system is not Try to ping the DXi6902 system IP address

visible on the Ethernet from a host on the same network. If the
network. ping reports round trip times, the DXi6902
system is active. If not, check the cables,
switches, or hubs for damaged
components. If everything checks out,
contact the Quantum Customer Support
department (see Getting More Information
or Help on page xxviii).

428 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Common Problems and Solutions

Problem Corrective Action

DXi6902 remote IF you cannot connect to the DXi6902

management pages remote management pages, verify that the
are not visible. following network settings for the DXi6902
are correct:
• Hostname
• IP addresses
• Default gateway
• Subnet mask
• Domain name (optional)

An Ethernet cable is The system will discontinue use of the

removed during associated Ethernet port. A Service ticket
normal operation. will be issued. The possibility of errors exist;
data corruption will not occur.
Reconnect the cable as soon as possible. It
is not necessary to power the system off.
Depending on the state of the system when
the Ethernet cable was removed,
replication, system management, or ingest
may need to be restarted.

Replication Problems Table 20 describes corrective actions for problems occurring with the
replication.

Table 20 Replication Problems

Problem Explanation/Corrective Action

The replication was When you click Pause, the system will
paused, but the continue to replicate the current tag or
replication is still in block of information in process. The process
process. of completing the current tag replication
can take up to 15 minutes to complete.
Once that tag has completed replication the
system will pause and wait to resume.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 429

Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Common Problems and Solutions

Problem Explanation/Corrective Action

The replication was This is normal. When a replication is paused,

paused and a Failure a failure event is generated on the
event was generated Replication Events page. They system will
in the Replication continue the replication when you click
Events page. Resume.

Replication was If you click Disable during a replication in

disabled while a process, the system will complete the entire
replication was in replication and then disable replication on
process and the the system. The system will be unable to
replication replicate until you click Enable.
completed.

Enabled replication You must configure the target system prior

on a NAS share and to configuring the source. If the target
received the following system is not configured first, you will not
Event: No be able to designate the replication target.
destination host
is specified for
replication.
Able to enable and It is possible to enable and schedule a
schedule replication replication when a target system has not
for NAS even though been configured. The replication will not
no target IP start until a target system is configured.
configured.

Temperature Problems Temperature problems are generally caused by incorrect room

temperature, poor air circulation inside the DXi6902 rack or
components, or a malfunctioning cooling fan.
Use the following procedure if a temperature problem is reported:
1 Check the ambient temperature of the room containing the
DXi6902 system to verify that the temperature falls within the
specified range.
2 Inspect for adequate air circulation inside the rack. Some racks may
provide additional fans to improve air circulations. Check the fan for
proper operation. Clean or replace any air filter as necessary.

430 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Common Problems and Solutions

3 If a component reports a temperature problem, verify that the

associated fan is operating correctly. If necessary, contact Quantum
customer support to replace the fan (see Getting More Information
or Help on page xxviii).

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 431

Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Common Problems and Solutions

432 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Glossary

B Blockpool A pool of all unique data blocks that were captured during
the data deduplication cycle. When backup jobs occur, the data
deduplication engine searches for new data entering the
DXi6902 and uses a variable length compression type algorithm
to compare this to existing data in the blockpool. Unique blocks
are added to the blockpool and all known blocks are indexed.
Byte The basic unit of computer memory which is large enough to
hold one character.

C Compress A process of removing fine-grained redundancy from data

prior to storing or transmitting it. The granularity may vary, but
generally compression deals with redundancy in grains of a few
bytes.

D Data Deduplication A process of removing coarse-grained

redundancy from data prior to storing or transmitting it. The
granularity may vary, but generally data deduplication deals
with redundancy in grains of several kilobytes. When you select
Enable Data Deduplication for a NAS share or VTL partition,
data deduplication is running all of the time. Backup data is

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 433

Glossary

sent to the DXi6902 and data deduplication is performed on

data as it is ingested.
Disk A fixed set of sectors with sequential numbers starting from
zero, directly and independently accessible and mutable by
those numbers without affecting any other sector.

F Filesystem An abstraction layered over storage devices (typically disks)

obscuring the physical details of the storage devices it supports
in favor of a presentation oriented at storing and organizing
files.

H Host The device or devices to which the system is connected.

I Ingest The throughput performance of data writes to the system.

L LSU Logical Storage Unit. A logical storage entity defined under the
Symantec OpenStorage API.

N NAS Network Attached Storage is file-level computer data storage

connected to a computer network providing data access to
network clients.
NDMP Network Data Management Protocol is a protocol meant to
transport data between NAS devices, also known as filers, and
backup devices. This removes the need for transporting the data
through the backup server itself, thus enhancing speed and
removing load from the backup server.

O OST OpenStorage API. An interface specific to Symantec NetBackup

and Backup Exec for writing data to disk backup appliances,
replicating it, and, in the case of NetBackup, writing data
directly to disk, under control of the backup application.

434 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide

 Glossary

R RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks is a technology through

which several physical storage disks are grouped into an array
that appears to an operating system as one or more physical
devices.

S SNFS StorNext® File System

SNMP Short for Simple Network Management Protocol, a set of
protocols for managing complex networks.
Sync ID When you configure a share for Directory/File Based
Replication, you specify a Sync ID for the share. The Sync ID
associates the share on the source system with the share on the
target system that will received the replicated data. The Sync ID
of the source share and the target share must be identical.

T Terabyte A unit of measure for digital data equal to 1,000 gigabytes.

Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide 435

Glossary

436 Quantum DXi6902 User’s Guide